WO2004023284A1 - A language-code input method - Google Patents

A language-code input method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2004023284A1
WO2004023284A1 PCT/CN2003/000721 CN0300721W WO2004023284A1 WO 2004023284 A1 WO2004023284 A1 WO 2004023284A1 CN 0300721 W CN0300721 W CN 0300721W WO 2004023284 A1 WO2004023284 A1 WO 2004023284A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
code
word
group
words
codes
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2003/000721
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
Rongjie Liu
Original Assignee
Rongjie Liu
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Rongjie Liu filed Critical Rongjie Liu
Priority to AU2003261577A priority Critical patent/AU2003261577A1/en
Publication of WO2004023284A1 publication Critical patent/WO2004023284A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/018—Input/output arrangements for oriental characters
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/02—Input arrangements using manually operated switches, e.g. using keyboards or dials
    • G06F3/023—Arrangements for converting discrete items of information into a coded form, e.g. arrangements for interpreting keyboard generated codes as alphanumeric codes, operand codes or instruction codes
    • G06F3/0233—Character input methods

Abstract

This invention provides a language-code input method, which utilizes the international standard keyboard, wherein the code elements are 26 English letters. The method inputs character, word, phrase and short sentence with character, word, phrase or letter. As for the ideogram, the method includes Chinese, Korean, Japanese or Vietnamese (Nan), and implements one character by one key, one character by one code element or one code by one character, in which the input of whole paragraph can be implemented by using three-characters input method without need of pressing spacebar. As for the phoneticize writing, the method includes English and French, and implements one word by one key, one word by one code element or one code by one word, in which the input of the whole paragraph can be implemented by using three-words input method. The advantage of the invention is that the language-code unifies the ideogram and phoneticize writing, and unifies the keyboard input, the scanning input, the handwriting input and the phonic input, that is the language-code performs coding and inputting for different languages and writings and for different inputting way, so as to facilitates the human-machine interaction of different environments for various languages and different terminals within the scope of the word. The method have the features of high input speed, easily-studied and easily-remembered, and can be widely used in the information processing field.

Description

语言码输入法 技术领域  Language code input method
本发明属于文字信息输入和处理领域， 特别是一种语言码输入法。  The invention belongs to the field of text information input and processing, in particular to a language code input method.
背景技术 Background technique
一般文字信息输入均采用键盘输入、 扫描输入、 语音输入、 密码编写、 PDA、 手机 输入及计算机语言编写。 目前， 世界上大约有一千多种语言， 可分为表意文字 （表形文 字）和拼音文字。 这些文字在键盘输入中， 现有方法为他借码输入。 他借码， 即借用其 他符号来输入文字： .  General text information input uses keyboard input, scan input, voice input, password writing, PDA, mobile phone input, and computer language writing. At present, there are more than a thousand languages in the world, which can be divided into ideographic characters (hyphenated characters) and pinyin characters. These texts are entered on the keyboard, and the existing method is to enter them by borrowing codes. He borrowed codes, that is, he borrowed other symbols to enter text:.
1.在表意文字中 （如汉语） ， 可根据所借用的符号分为- 1. In ideographic text (such as Chinese), it can be divided into-
( 1 ) 数字码： 借用阿拉伯数字来编码如区位码， 电报码。 其缺点： 不便记忆；(1) Numeric code: Borrow Arabic numerals to encode codes such as location codes and telegraph codes. Its disadvantages: inconvenient memory;
(2) 形码： 借用笔画， 字根进行编码， 如五笔输入法。 其缺点： 难学、 难记、 码 组不具可读性； (2) Shape code: Borrow strokes to encode the radicals, such as Wubi input method. Its disadvantages: It is difficult to learn, difficult to remember, and the code group is not readable;
(3) 音码： 借用汉字的读音进行编码， 智能 ABC。 其缺点： 重码多；  (3) Phonetic code: Borrowed from the pronunciation of Chinese characters for encoding, intelligent ABC. Its disadvantages: many heavy codes;
2.在拼音文字中， 借用文字中的字母来输入单词： IME (输入法编辑器）提供的。微 软多国语言输入法， 其缺点： 字母多的长单词敲键次数多， 速度慢。  2. In Pinyin text, use the letters in the text to input words: provided by IME (input method editor). Micro soft multi-language input method, its disadvantages: long words with many letters have more keystrokes and slow speed.
发明内容 Summary of the Invention
为解决上述技术中存在的问题， 本发明的目的是提供一种在表意文字中， 易学、 易 记、 易用、 易编、 无重码、 一字一码、 一键一字， 一码元一字， 码组可读性； 在拼音文 字中， 提供一种输入字母多的长单词， 敲键次数少， 输入速度快， 一键一单词， 一码元 一单词， 码组 （码长） 短的易学， 易记的适用于多国语言的语言码输入法。  In order to solve the problems existing in the above technologies, the object of the present invention is to provide an easy learning, easy to remember, easy to use, easy to edit, no heavy code, one word one code, one key one word, one symbol one Words and code groups are readable; in Pinyin text, a long word with many letters is input, the number of keystrokes is small, the input speed is fast, one key is one word, one code is one word, and the code group (code length) is short Easy to learn and easy to remember multilingual language code input method.
为实现上述目的， 本发明的技术方案是提供一种语言码输入法， 键盘采用国际标准 键盘， 码元为 26个英文字母， 其中： 用字、词、单词、短语、字母和拼音字母来输入字、 词、 单词短语、 字母的语言码， 用语言本身的字、 词、 单词或短语来编码， 来输入语言、 文字； 对于表意文字， 包括汉语、 日语和韩语， 实现一键一字、 一码元一字； 语言码最 小单位是码字码和码元字， 码字码组成码词码码语码， 三字码词码称为三字码字码或三 字码语码， 码词码也叫码语码、 码字码或码字母码； 码词素也叫码语素或码字素； 对于 拼音文字， 最小编码单位是码单词码， 也叫码元单词； 码单词码组成码词组码或码语码; 三单词码词码称为三单词码语码， 码单词码也叫码词组码、 码语码或码字码； 码单词素 也叫码语素、 码字母素或码假名素； 语言码统一表意文字、 拼音文字， 统一了键盘输入、 扫描输入、 手写输入和语言输入即不同的语言、 文字、 不同的输入方式， 用统一的语言 码进行编码和输入， 便于世界范围内不同语种、 不同环境、 不同终端设备的人机交流； 语言码， 即码词码， 用码词来输入组成码词中的码词素； 码词可以是字、 词、 单词、 字 母、 短语或短句， 码词素可以是字、 词、 单词、 字母、 短语或短句， 用码词要输入的文 字或语言可以是字、 词、 单词、 短语、 短句或码词对应的字、 词、 单词、 短语或短句， 这个码词叫做本码词或本词， 是以一的一字一码、 一词一码或一语一码； 按照要输入的 码词码词素的个数， 码词素可分为： 单码词素码和多码词素码； 对于单码词素码， 一个 码词输入一个码词素； 对于多码词素码， 一个码词输入多个码词素或几个码词输入多个 码词素； 按照码词素在码词中的位置和顺序， 码词素可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指码词素在前面的码词码； 中组码是指码词素在中间的码词码； 后组码是指码 词素在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化和简化的顺序，码词码可分为简码和全码； 简 码又分可为前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全码进行简化了的码词码； 前简码 是指对前面的码词素简化了的简码； 后简码是指对后面的码词素简化了的简码； 前后简 码是指对前面及后面的码词素简化了的简码； 全码是指没有简化的码词码； 码词码可以 是字母、 字、 单词或假名； 码词素可以是字母、 字、 单词或假名； 码词码按照语种、 语 系可以分为： 阿尔巴尼亚语码词码、 阿拉伯语码词码、 阿泽里语（拉丁） 码词码、 阿泽 里语 （西里尔）码词码、 爱沙尼亚语码词码、 巴斯克语码词码、 白俄罗斯语码词码、 保 加利亚语码词码、 冰岛语码词码、 波兰语码词码、 波斯语码词码、 朝鲜语码词码、 韩国 语码词码、 鞑靼语码词码、 丹麦语码词码、 德语码词码、 俄语码词码、 法罗语码词码、 法语码词码、 芬兰语码词码、 弗里斯兰语码词码、 哈萨克语码词码、 荷兰语码词码、 加 利西亚语码词码、 加泰罗尼亚语码词码、 捷克语码词码、 克罗地亚语码词码、 拉脱维亚 语码词码、 立陶宛语码词码、 罗马尼亚语码词码、 马来语码词码、 马其顿语码词码、 南 非荷兰语码词码、 挪威语码词码 （博克马尔语码词码） 、 挪威语码词码 （尼诺斯克语码 词码） 、 葡萄牙语码词码、 日语码词码、 瑞典语码词码、 塞尔维亚语 （拉丁）码词码、 塞尔维亚语（西里尔）码词码、 斯洛伐克语码词码、 斯洛文尼亚语码词码、 塞尔维加亚- 克罗地亚语码词码、 斯瓦希里语码词码、 土耳其语码词码、 乌尔都语码词码、 乌克兰语 码词码、 乌兹别克语（拉丁） 码词码、 乌兹别克语 （西里尔语）码词码、 西班牙语码词 码、 希伯来语码词码、 希腊语码词码、 匈牙利语码词码、 意大利语码词码、 印度尼西亚 语码词码、 英语 （澳大利亚）码词码、 英语 （加拿大）码词码、 英语 （美国）码词码、 越南语、 藏语码词码、 蒙古语码词码、 维吾尔语码词码、 满语码词码、 汉藏语系码词码、 印欧语系码词码、 萨莫狄语系码词码、 阿尔太语系码词码、 闪语语系码词码、 达罗毗荼 语系码词码、 南亚语系码词码、 南岛语系码词码、 古亚细亚诸语言码词码、 苏丹语系码 词码、 班图语系码词码、 柯伊散语系码词码、 美洲印第安语码词码； 码词码可分为表形 文字码词码和拼音文字码词码； 码词码按照应用领域可分为键盘输入码词码、 非键盘输 入码词码； 码词码按照码词素可分为字母码词码、 字码词码、 单词码词码、 词码词码和 假名码词码； 码词码按照码词素的个数可分为： 三码词码， 二码词码、 一码词码、 多码 词码、 四码词码和五码词码； 三码词码是指码词素个数为三个的码词码， 三码词码可分 为单三码词素码和多三码词素码， 单三码词素是指一个三码词输入一个码词素， 多三码 词码是指一个三码词输入多个码词素或几个码词输入多个码词素； 码词码按照码词素在 码词中的位置和顺序可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指码词素在前面的三 码词码； 中组码是指码词素在中间的三码词码； 后组码是指码词素在后面的三码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后组码的形式， 可组合出其 中实用的三种码； a.前组前简码、 b.中组前简码和 c.后组前简码； 二码词码是指码词素 个数为二个的码词码； 单二码词素是指可用一个二码词输入一个码词素； 多二码词素是 指可用一个二码词输入多个码词素或几个二码词输入多个码词素； 按照码词素在码词中 的位置和顺序^ ^为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指码词素在前的二码词码； 后组码是指 码词素在后面的二码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的 形式， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码： a.前组全码、 b.前组前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d. 前组前后简码、 e.全组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是 由附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码， 后加码是指字母在后面的加码， 前后加码是指字母在 面和后面的加码。 In order to achieve the above objective, the technical solution of the present invention is to provide a language code input method. The keyboard is an international standard keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters, in which: words, words, words, phrases, letters, and pinyin are used for input. The language codes of words, words, word phrases, and letters are encoded by the words, words, words, or phrases of the language itself to enter the language and text; for ideographic characters, including Chinese, Japanese, and Korean, one key, one word, one One word of the code element; The minimum unit of the language code is the code word code and the code word code. The code word code is composed of the code word code and the code word. The three word code word code is called the three word code code or the three word code code. The code is also called code code, code word code, or code letter code; code morpheme is also called code morpheme or code morpheme; for Pinyin text, the minimum coding unit is code word code, also called code word; code word code forms code phrase Code or code word code; Three word code word code is called three word code code, code word code is also called code phrase code, code word code or code word code; code morpheme is also called code morpheme, code letter or code kana Vegetarian Code unified ideographic characters, pinyin text, unified keyboard input, scan input, handwriting input and language input, that is, different languages, texts, different input methods, encoding and input with a unified language code, which is convenient for different languages, Human-computer communication in different environments and different terminal devices; Language codes, that is, codeword codes, use codewords to enter codeword morphemes in codewords; codewords can be words, words, words, letters, phrases, or short sentences. A morpheme can be a word, a word, a word, a letter, a phrase, or a short sentence, and the text or language to be entered with a codeword can be a word, word, word, phrase, phrase, or codeword corresponding to a word, word, word, phrase, short sentence, or codeword For short sentences, this codeword is called this codeword or this word, which is one by one, one by one, one by one, or one by one. According to the number of code morphemes to be entered, the code morphemes can be divided into : Single-code morpheme code and multi-code morpheme code; for single-code morpheme codes, one code word enters one code morpheme; for multi-code morpheme codes, one code word enters multiple code morphemes or several Enter multiple code morphemes in words; according to the position and order of code morphemes in the code words, the code morphemes can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the code word code in which the code morpheme precedes The middle group code refers to the code word code with the code morpheme in the middle; the latter group code refers to the code word code with the code morpheme behind; according to whether the code word code is simplified and simplified, the code word code can be divided into short code and full code. Shortcodes can be divided into shortcodes before, shortcodes, and shortcodes before and after; shortcodes are codeword codes that simplify the full code; pre-shortcodes are shortcodes that simplify the previous code morphemes ; The short code refers to the simplified code of the code morpheme of the following code; the front and back code codes refers to the simplified code of the code morpheme of the front and back; the full code refers to the code word code without simplification; the code word code can Is a letter, a word, a word, or a pseudonym; a code morpheme can be a letter, a word, a word, or a pseudonym; a codeword code can be divided according to language and language: Albanian codeword code, Arabic codeword code, Azeri (Latin ) Codeword code, Azeri (Cyrillic) codeword code, Estonian codeword code, Basque codeword code, Belarusian codeword code, Bulgarian codeword code, Icelandic codeword code, Polish Code word code, Persian code word code, Korean code word code, Korean code word code, Slang code word code, Danish code word code, German code word code, Russian code word code, Faroese code word Code, French code word code, Finnish code word code, Frisian code word code, Kazakh code word code, Dutch code word code, Galician code word code, Catalan code word code , Czech code word code, Croatian code word code, Latvian code word code, Lithuanian code word code, Romanian code word code, Malay code word code, Macedonian code word code, Afrikaans code word code , Norwegian code word code ( Bokmal code word code), Norwegian code word code (Nynorsk code word code), Portuguese code word code, Japanese code word code, Swedish code word code, Serbian (Latin) code word code, Serbian (Cyrillic) code word code, Slovak code word code, Slovenian code word code, Servegaya-Croatian code word code, Swahili code word code, Turkish code word code, Uzbekistan Urdu code word code, Ukrainian code word code, Uzbek (Latin) code word code, Uzbek (Cyrillic) code word code, Spanish code word code, Hebrew code word code, Greek code Word Code, Hungarian Code Word Code, Italian Code Word Code, Indonesian Code Word Code, English (Australian) Code Word Code, English (Canada) Code Word Code, English (US) Code Word Code, Vietnamese, Tibetan Code word code, Mongolian code word code, Uyghur code word code, Manchu code word code, Chinese-Tibetan code word code, Indo-European code word code, Samodic code word code, Altai code word Code, flash language Word code, Dharavida code word code, South Asian language code word code, Austronesian code word code, Ancient Asian language code word code, Sudanese code word code, Bantu code word code, Khoi Prose Codeword code, American Indian codeword code; Codeword code can be divided into epigram code codeword and pinyin code codeword code; Codeword code can be divided into keyboard input codeword code, non-keyboard input codeword according to the application field The code word code can be divided into letter code word code, word code word code, word code word code, word code word code, and kana code word code according to the code morpheme; code word code can be divided into: Code word code, two code word code, one code word code, multiple code word code, four code word code and five code word code; three code word code refers to a code word code with three code morphemes, three code words The code can be divided into single three-code morpheme code and multiple three-code morpheme code. Single three-code morpheme refers to a three-code word entering one code morpheme, and multiple three-code morpheme refers to one three-code word entering multiple code morphemes or several Enter multiple code morphemes in code words; code word codes can be divided into: The first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code; the former group code refers to the three-code word code with the code morpheme in front; the middle group code refers to the three-code word code with the code morpheme in the middle; the latter group code means the code morpheme in the middle The following three-code word code; simplified by the short code is part of the full code, according to the form of the former group code, the middle group code and the latter group code, three practical codes can be combined; a. Code, b. Short code before the middle group and c. Short code before the second group; two-code morpheme refers to the codeword code with two morphemes; single-code morpheme means that one code can be used to enter a code Morphemes; Multiple two-code morphemes refer to the use of one two-code word to enter multiple code morphemes or several two-code words to enter multiple code morphemes; according to the position and order of code morphemes in the code words ^ ^ Group code; the first group code refers to the two-code word code with the code morpheme first; the last group code refers to the two-code word code with the code morpheme behind; according to the simplified code, it is a part of the full code, and according to the previous group code and The form of the post group code can be combined into eight practical codes: a. The full code of the former group, b. The short code of the former group, c. The short code of the former group d. short codes before and after the group, e. full codes for the whole group, f. short codes before the group, g. short codes after the group and h. short codes before and after the group; plus code is a combination of additional letters and code word codes The encoding can be divided into: a. Pre-addition, b. Post-addition, and c. Pre- and post-addition; pre-addition refers to the addition of the letter in front, post-addition refers to the addition of the letter in the back, and pre-addition refers to the letter in the Face and back plus.
本发明的有益效果是该语言码输入法统一了表意文字、拼音文字， 统一了键盘输入， 扫描输入， 手写输入、 语音输入， 即不同的语言、 文字， 不同的输入方式， 用统一的语 言码进行编码， 进行输入， 便于世界范围内各语种不同环境， 不同终端设备的人机交流； 输入速度快， 一键一单词， 一码元一单词， 码组 （码长） 短的易学， 易记的适用于多国 语言的语言码输入。 语言码输入法易学， 易记， 可广泛应用于信息处理领域。  The beneficial effect of the present invention is that the language code input method unifies ideographic characters and pinyin characters, unified keyboard input, scan input, handwriting input, and voice input, that is, different languages, characters, different input methods, and a unified language code. Encoding and inputting are convenient for man-machine communication in different languages and environments around the world, and different terminal devices; fast input speed, one key one word, one symbol one word, short code group (code length), easy to learn, easy to remember Enter the language code for multiple languages. The language code input method is easy to learn and easy to remember, and can be widely used in the field of information processing.
具体实施方式 结合实施例对本发明的语言码输入法加以说明。 detailed description The language code input method of the present invention will be described with reference to the embodiments.
语言码， 即码词码、 即码字码、 即码单词码，也称即码语码。 用码词， 码语， 码字来 输入组成码词， 码字， 码语中的码词素、 码语素、 码字素； 码词， 码语可以是字、 词、 单词、 字母、 码词素码语素， 可以是字、 词、 单词、 字母、 短语。 用码词， 码字， 码语 对要输入的文字、 语言可以是字、 词、 单词、 短语、 字母。  A language code is a codeword code, a codeword code, a codeword code, and is also called a codeword code. Codewords, codewords, and codewords are used to enter codewords, codewords, codewords, codewords, and codewords in codewords; codewords, codewords can be words, words, words, letters, and codeword code Morphemes can be words, words, words, letters, phrases. Use codeword, codeword, codeword. For the text and language to be entered, it can be words, words, words, phrases, and letters.
按照要输入的码词素个数分为： 单码词素码、 多码词素码； 单码词素码： 一个码词 输入一个码词素；  According to the number of code morphemes to be input, it is divided into: single-code morpheme code and multi-code morpheme code; single-code morpheme code: one code word enter one code morpheme;
多码词素码： 一个码词输入多个码词素； 或几个码词输入多个码词素；  Multi-code morpheme code: Enter multiple code morphemes for one code word; or enter multiple code morphemes for several code words;
按照码词素在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码； 前组码： 码词 素在前面的码词码； 中组码： 码词素在中间的码词码； 后组码： 码词素在后面的码词码。 按照码词码是否简化和简化的顺序，码词码可分为简码和全码； 简码又分为前简码、 后简 码、 前后简码； 简码： 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码： 对前面的码词素简化的简码； 后简码： 对后面的码词素简化的简码； 前后简码： 对前面、 后面的码词素简化的简码； 全码： 没有简化的码词码；  According to the position of the code morphemes in the code words, the order is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code; the former group code: the code morpheme in front of the code word code; the middle group code: the code morpheme in the middle code word Code; last group code: code word code with code morpheme behind. According to whether the codeword code is simplified and simplified, the codeword code can be divided into short code and full code; short code is divided into front short code, post short code, front and back short code; short code: the simplified code of the full code Term code; front short code: simplified short code for previous code morphemes; short short code: simplified short code for subsequent code morphemes; front and back short codes: short code simplified for front and back code morphemes; full code: No simplified code word code;
码词码可以是字母、 字、 单词、 假名、 短语； 码词素可以是字母、 字、 单词、 假名、 短语； 码词码按照语种、 语系， 可分为：  Code word code can be letters, words, words, kana, phrases; code morphemes can be letters, words, words, kana, phrases; code word codes according to language, language family, can be divided into:
阿尔巴尼亚语 （码词码） 、 阿拉伯语 （码词码） 、 阿泽里语 （拉丁码词码） 、 阿泽 里语（西里尔码词码） 、 爱沙尼亚语（码词码） 、 巴斯克语（码词码） 、 白俄罗斯语（码 词码） 、 保加利亚语 （码词码） 、 冰岛语 （码词码） 、 波兰语 （码词码） 、 波斯语 （码 词码） 、 朝鲜语（码词码） 、 韩国语（码词码）、 鞑靼语 '(码词码） 、 丹麦语（码词码）、 德语 （码词码） 、 俄语 （码词码） 、 法罗语 （码词码） 、 法语 （码词码） 、 芬兰语 （码 词码） 、 费里斯兰语 （码词码） 、 哈萨克语 （码词码） 、 荷兰语 （码词码） 、 加利西亚 语 （码词码） 、 加泰罗尼亚语 （码词码） 、 捷克语 （码词码） 、 克罗地亚语 （码词码） 、 拉脱维亚语 （码词码） 、 立陶宛语 （码词码） 、 罗马尼亚语 （码词码） 、 马来语 （码词 码） 、 马其顿语 （码词码） 、 南非荷兰 （码词码） 、 挪威语 （博克马尔语码词码） 、 挪 威语 （尼诺斯克语码词码） 、 葡萄牙 （码词码） 、 日语 （码词码） 、 瑞典语 （码词码） 、 塞尔维亚语 （拉丁码词码） 、 塞尔维亚语、 （西里尔码词码） 、 斯洛伐克语 （码词码） 、 斯洛文尼 （码词码） 、 斯瓦希里语码词码 （码词码） 、 土耳其语 （码词码） 、 乌尔都语 (码词码） 、 乌克兰语码词码、 乌兹别克语 （拉丁码词码） 、 乌兹别克语 （西里尔码词 码） 、 西班牙语 （码词码） 、 希伯语 （码词码） 、 希腊语 （码词码） 匈牙利 （码词码） 、 意大利 （码词码） 、 印度尼西亚语 （码词码） 、 英语 （澳大利亚码词码） 、 英语 （加拿 大码词码） 、 英语（美国码词码） 、 英语（英国码词码） 、 藏语（码词码） 、 蒙古语（码 词码） 、 维吾尔语（码词码） 、 满语（码词码）等； 汉藏语系 （码词码） 、 印欧语系 （码 词码） 、 萨莫狄语系 （码词码） 、 阿尔太语系 （码词码） 、 闪语语系 （码词码） 、 达罗 毗荼（码词码） 、 南亚语系 （码词码） 、 南岛语系 （码词码） 、 "古亚细亚"诸语言 （码 词码） 、 苏丹语系 （码词码） 班图语素 （码词码） 、 柯伊散码词码、 美洲印第安语码词 码、 可分为表形文字码词码、 拼音文字码词码， 码词码按照应用领域分为： 键盘输入码 词码、 非键盘输入码词码。 码词码按照码词素可分为： 字母码词码、 字码词码、 单词码 词码、 词码词码、 语码词码、 假名码词码。 按照码词素的个数分为： 一码词码、 三码词 码、 二码词码、 四码词码； 五码词码、 多码词码； 三码词码： 码词素个数为三个的码词 码； 三码词码分为： 单码词素码、 多三码词素码、 多码词码、 单三码词素码， 一个三码 词输入一个码词素， 多三码词素码： 一个三码词输入多个码词素。 或几个三码词素输入 多个码词素； 按照码词素在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码； 前组 码： 码词素在前面的码词码； 中组码： 码词素在中间的三码词码； 后组码： 码词素在后 面的三码词码。 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码、 后组码， 可 组合出其中实用的三种码： a.前组前简码、 b.中组前简码、 c.后组前简码 Albanian (codeword code), Arabic (codeword code), Azeri (Latin codeword code), Azeri (Cyrillic codeword code), Estonian (codeword code), Basque (Codeword code), Belarusian (codeword code), Bulgarian (codeword code), Icelandic (codeword code), Polish (codeword code), Persian (codeword code), Korean (codeword code) Word code), Korean (code word code), Slang (code word code), Danish (code word code), German (code word code), Russian (code word code), Faroese (code word Code), French (codeword code), Finnish (codeword code), Ferrisland (codeword code), Kazakh (codeword code), Dutch (codeword code), Galician (code Word code), Catalan (code word code), Czech (code word code), Croatian (code word code), Latvian (code word code), Lithuanian (code word code), Romanian (Codeword code), Malay (codeword code), Macedonian Codeword code), South Africa (codeword code), Norwegian (Bokmal codeword code), Norwegian (Nynorsk codeword code), Portugal (codeword code), Japanese (codeword code) , Swedish (Codeword Code), Serbian (Latin Codeword Code), Serbian, (Cyrillic Codeword Code), Slovak (Codeword Code), Slovenia (Codeword Code), Swahili Code Code (Code Code), Turkish (Code Code), Urdu (Code Code), Ukrainian Code Code, Uzbek (Latin Code Code), Uzbek (Cyrillic Code) Word code), Spanish (code word code), Hebrew (code word code), Greek (code word code), Hungarian (code word code), Italy (code word code), Indonesian (code word code), English (Australian code word code), English (Canadian code word code), English (US code word code), English (UK code word code), Tibetan (code word code), Mongolian (code word code), Uighur (Code word code), Manchu (codeword code), etc .; Sino-Tibetan language (codeword code), Indo-European language (codeword code), Samodic language (codeword code), Altai language (codeword code), Flash language (Codeword code), Dharavidia (codeword code), South Asian language (codeword code), Austronesian language (codeword code), "Ancient Asia" languages (codeword code), Sudanese language (codeword (Code) Bantu morpheme (code word code), Koy hash code word code, American Indian code word code, can be divided into table text code word code, pinyin text code word code, code word code according to the application area is divided into: Keyword input code word code, non-keyboard input code word code. Code word code can be divided into code word morpheme: letter code word code, word code word code, word code word code, word code word code, code word code, kana code word code. According to the number of code morphemes, it is divided into: one-code word code, three-code word code, two-code word code, four-code word code; five-code word code, multi-code word code; three-code word code: the number of code morphemes is three Three code morpheme codes are divided into: single code morpheme code, multiple three code morpheme code, multiple code morpheme code, single three code morpheme code, one three code word enters one code morpheme, multiple three code morpheme code: Enter multiple code morphemes for a three code word. Or several three-code morphemes, enter multiple code morphemes; according to the position of the code morphemes in the code words, they are sequentially divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code; the former group code: the code word code in front of the code word The middle group code: the three-code word code in the middle of the code morpheme; the second group code: the code morpheme in the middle Three-word word code. What is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code. According to the former group code, the middle group code, and the last group code, three practical codes can be combined: a. Before the group short code, b. Before the group short code , C. Short code before group
二码词码： 码词素个数为二个的码词码； 单二码词素码： 一个二码词输入一个码词 素；  Two-code morpheme: two code-word morphemes; single two-code morpheme code: one code-word enter one code morpheme;
多二码词素码： 一个二码词输入多个码词素， 或几个二码词输入多个码词素。  Multiple two-code morpheme code: Enter one code morpheme for one two-code word, or enter multiple code morphemes for several two-code words.
按照码词素在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 后组码。 前组码： 码词素在前面 的二码词码。 后组码： 码词素在后面的二码词码。  According to the position of the code morpheme in the code word, the sequence is divided into: the first group code and the last group code. Pre-group code: The two-code word code with the code morpheme in front. After group code: The code two morpheme code code.
按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 后组码， 可以组合出其中实用的 八种码：  Simplified according to the short code is part of the full code. According to the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined:
a. 前组全码、 b.前组前简码、 c.前组前后简码、 d.前组前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f. 后组前简码、 g.后组后简码、 h.后组前后简码；加码为附加字母与码词码合称加码， 可分为 a.前加码： 字母在前面的加码， b.后加码： 字母在后面的加码  a. Full code before group, b. Short code before group, c. Short code before group, d. Short code before group, e. Full code after group, f. Short code before group, g. Rear group Post-code, h. Pre- and post-codes in the back group; plus-code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes, which can be divided into a. Pre-code: the letter is coded in front, b. Post-code: the code is coded in the back
c.前后加码： 字母在前面的加码； 字母码词码组前码 □ η 以下七种优化方案,适用于表意文字拼音文字， 各个语种。 一键一字、 一码元一字、 字替换成单词、 韩字、 日字； 一级方案， 二字 （单词） 数字语言码； 使用前组全码， 以汉语为例， 其特点： 一字一码、 输入字的二字码叫本码、 本词、 主码、 字林， 无重 码， 防止 "zh和 z" 、 " ch和 c" 、 " sh和 s " 以及 "eng和 ong"之间的混淆。 1、 用二字前组全码， 作码打前一个字  c. Pre- and post-coding: Letters are coded in the front; letter-code word-code group pre-code □ η The following seven optimization schemes are applicable to ideographic characters and pinyin characters in each language. One key, one character, one character, one character, replaced with words, Korean characters, Japanese characters; First-level solution, two-character (word) digital language code; Use the full set of codes before, using Chinese as an example, its characteristics: The word one code and the two word code of the input word are called this code, this word, the main code, the word forest, and no heavy code. It prevents "zh and z", "ch and c", "sh and s", and "eng and ong" Confusion between. 1. Use the full code in front of two characters to type the previous character.
( 1 ) 单字码学学习 xue xi (2) 多字码即词码 a.二字词码 单字码 +单字码 学 问， 学习问题 (1) Single-word code learning xue xi (2) Multi-word code is word code a . Two-word word code single word code + single word code learning
xuexiwenti b.三字词码单字码 +单字码 +单字码 植物园 植树物质园艺 zhishiwuzhiyuanyi  xuexiwenti b. Three-character word code, single-word code, single-word code, single-word code, botanical garden, tree planting, material gardening, zhishiwuzhiyuanyi
c. 四字码词单字码 +单字码 +单字码 +单字码 炉火火焰纯情青岛 luhuohuoyamchunging luhuohuoyamchunqingqingniao d.多字词码， 中华人民共禾口 国 ， 中 国 华 人 人 民 民 众 共 产 和 平 国 家 zhongguohua renrenminminzhonggongchanhepingguojia  c. Four-character code single-character code + single-character code + single-character code + single-character code Fire flame flame innocence Qingdao luhuohuoyamchunging luhuohuoyamchunqingqingniao d. Multi-character code, the Chinese People's Republic of China, the Chinese people, the Chinese people, the people, the common people and the flat country zhongguohua renrenminminzhonggongchanping
2、用二字前组全码打前字； 二字后组全码 +数字 1作码打后一字， 用二字全码码打这 两个字。 3、 用二字前组全码 +数字 1作码打前一字； 用二字后组全码 +数字 2作码打 后一字； 用二字全码作码打这两个字。二级方案 二字（单词）简化数字语言码使用 前组后简码后组前简码以汉语为例； 特点： 重码用数字区分， 不超过 10个， 无须翻 屏一字一码、 无重码， 可以防止 "zh和 z" 、 " ch 和 c" 、 " sh和 s " 以及 "eng 和 ong"之间的混淆。 （1 ) 单字码： 学 学习 xue X 合 合作 hez4  2. Type the first word with the full code of the two-character group; type the full code with the number after the two-character group + the number 1 to type the last word; type the two characters with the two-word full-code code. 3. Use the first two-character full code + number 1 as the code to type the first word; use the second two-character full code + number 2 as the code to type the next character; use the two-character full code as the code to type the two characters. Two-level scheme with two-character (word) simplified digital language code. Use the front group and the short group. The front group and short group code use Chinese as an example. Features: The heavy codes are distinguished by numbers, no more than 10, and there is no need to flip the screen one word and one code. To prevent confusion between "zh and z", "ch and c", "sh and s", and "eng and ong". (1) Word code: Learn to learn xue X cooperation cooperation hez4
( 2) 多字码即词码 a.二字词码 单字码 +单字码 b.三字词码 单字码 +单字码 +单字码 c四字词码 单字码 +单字码 +单字码 +单字码 d.多字词码 三级方案  (2) Multi-character code is word code a. Two-character code single-character code + single-character code b. Three-character code single-character code + single-character code + single-character code c Four-character code single-character code + single-character code + single-word code + single-character code d. Three-level multi-word code scheme
二字 （单词） 阴差阳错语言码， 简称： 二字输入法使用前组前简码、 前组前后简码、 后组后简码、 后组前后简码， 以汉语为例； 特点： 一字一码、 要输入的字， 只打第一 个字母， 不输入的字（区分码）打全码、 无重码， 防止 "zh和 z"、 "ch和 c"、 "sh 和 s" 以及 "eng和 ong"之间的混淆。 （1 )单字码 a.好爱好 ai h b.合 合作 hzuo Two-character (word) Yin-Yang-Yang wrong language code, abbreviation: Two-character input method uses the first group of front shortcodes, the front group of front and back shortcodes, the back group of shortcodes, and the back group of front and back shortcodes. Take Chinese as an example; One word and one code, the word to be entered, only the first letter, and the word that is not entered (distinguishable code) is typed in full code and no double code, preventing "zh and z", "ch and c", "sh and s" And the confusion between "eng and ong". (1) One-word code a. Hobbies ai h b. Cooperation hzuo
(2) 多字码即词码 a.二字词码 单字码 +单字码 b.三字词码 c.四字词码 d.多 字词码； 四级方案 三字 （单词） 千理声似语言码， 简称： 一字输入法、 三字输 入法、 千理输入法、 语言输入法； 使用三前组前简码、 前组前后简码、 单简码， 可以 汉语为例： 1、输入字不用按空格键； 2、 一字千理声似语言码 二字千理声似语言码； 3、 一键一字、 一码元一字、 码元字； 4、 利用声母第一个字母相同， 发音相似的特性； 5、 最小单位是码元字、 即码词素， 码语素， 码元字组成码词， 组成码语， 输入字母， 三（四） 字码词码， 可成为码语码； 6、 实现整段输入 ， 四字码词码， 整句整篇； 7、 拆词 （1 ) 单字码 学 学习好 xuexihaoxxh (2)多字码即词码 a.二字词码 单字码 +单字码 b.三字词码 单字码 +单字码 +单字码 c.四字词码 单字码 +单字 码 +单字码 +单字码 d.多字词码 五级方案 四字千理声似语言码， 简称四字输入 法 使用四前组前简码 不常用字编码， 手机输入， 数字键盘输入 （1 ) 键盘输入， 鼠标键盘输入后 后院起火 h y q h ， 六级方案为， 二字 （单词）字母语言码， 使用字母码词码； 与三字 （单词） 千理声似语言码结合， 特种输入、 小键盘、 手机输 入、 鼠标键盘输入； 七级方案为， 五字千理声似语言码， 简称五字输入法。 使用五前 组前简码， 学 学习会得奖 X X h d j ; —输一码： 一个码素输入一个待输入素； 一 输多码： 个码素输入多个待输入素； 多输一码： 多个码素输入一个待输入素； 多输少 码： 多个码素输入较少待输入素； 多输多码： 多个码素输入更多个待输入素； 多输更 多码： 多个码素输入更多个待输入素； 语言码分为音语言码， 形语言码， 音语言码： 打每一个码字素的第一个拼音字母； 形语言码： 打每一个码字素的第一笔画； 打每一 个码字素的第一个字根， 或部首。 (2) Multi-word code is word code a. Two-word word code single-word code + single-word code b. Three-word word code c. Four-word word code d. Multi-word word code; Four-level plan three-word (word) Qian Lisheng Similar language codes, abbreviations: one-word input method, three-word input method, Qianli input method, language input method; use three front groups of front shortcodes, front group front and back shortcodes, and single shortcodes. Chinese can be taken as an example: 1. Enter the word without pressing the space bar; 2. One word sounds like a language code, two words sound like a language code; 3. One key, one character, one character, one character, and one character; 4. Use the first consonant Characters with the same letters and similar pronunciation; 5. The minimum unit is a codeword word, that is, a codeword morpheme, a codeword morpheme, a codeword word forming a codeword, forming a codeword, entering a letter, and a three (four) word codeword code, which can become a codeword code; 6. Realizing the entire paragraph Input, four-character code, whole sentence and whole sentence; 7, word splitting (1) learn how to learn single-character code xuex ihaoxxh (2) multi-character code is word code a. Two-character word code single-word code + single-word code b. Three Word code single word code + single word code + single word code c. Four word word code single word code + single word code + single word code + single word code d. Multi-word word code five-level plan four word sounds like language code, short word input You ca n’t use the four short front codes, which are not commonly used. Mobile phone input, numeric keyboard input (1) keyboard input, mouse keyboard input, backyard fire, hyqh, six-level plan, two-character (word) alphabet language code, use alphabet code Word code; combined with three-character (word) Qianlisheng language code, special input, keypad, mobile phone input, mouse and keyboard input; the seven-level scheme is Wuzi Qianlisheng language code, referred to as five-character input method. Use five short groups of pre-codes and learn to win the prize XX hdj; — Lose one code: Enter one code element and one to be input element; One-input multi-code: Enter one code element to multiple elements to be input; Enter one more code: Multiple symbols enter one to be input; Multiple symbols are input less: Multiple symbols are input less to be input; Multiple symbols are input: Multiple symbols are input to more symbols; Multiple symbols are input: more Enter more code elements for each code element. The language code is divided into phonetic language code, shape language code, and phonetic language code: type the first pinyin letter of each code element. Shape language code: type each code element. The first stroke of each; type the first radical or radical of each code element.
在表意文字中汉语， 码词素可以是字， 拼音字母， 短语， 码词码可以是字,词， 拼 音字母,短语， 即汉语码词码，汉语码字码,汉语码语码，一字一键,一码元一字,一字一 码,键盘釆用国际通用标准键盘， 码元为 26个英文字母。 码词码按照字个数分为三字 码词码、 一字码字码、 五字码字码、 二字码词码、 四字码词码、 多字码词码。 按照要 输入的字个数分为： 单字码、 多字码、 单字码： 一个码词输入一个字； 多字码： 一个 码词输入多个字， 或几个码词输入多个字。  In ideographic Chinese, code morphemes can be words, pinyin letters, phrases, code word codes can be words, words, pinyin letters, phrases, that is, Chinese code word code, Chinese code word code, Chinese code word code, one word one word The key, one code, one word, one word, one code, the keyboard uses the international standard keyboard, the code is 26 English letters. Code word codes are divided into three-word code words, one-word code words, five-word code words, two-word code words, four-word code words, and multi-word code words according to the number of words. According to the number of words to be entered, it is divided into: single-word code, multi-word code, single-word code: one codeword enters one word; multi-word code: one codeword enters multiple words, or several codewords enter multiple words.
按照字在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码； 前组码： 字在前 面的码词码； 中组码： 字在后面的码词码； 后组码： 字在后面的码词码；  According to the position of the word in the code word, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code; the former group code: the code word code before the word; the middle group code: the code word code after the word; Group code: the word code behind the word;
按照码词码是否简化和简化的顺序，码词码可分为简码、全码； 简码又分为： 前简 码、 后简码、 前后简码。 简码： 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码： 对前面的字简化 的简码； 后简码： 对后面的字简化的简码； 全码； 没有简化的码词码； 三字码词码： 字个数为三个的码词码； 三字码词码： 分为单三字码、 多三字码； 单三字码： 一个三 字码词输入一个字； 多三字码： 一个三字码词输入多个字， 或几个三字码词输入多个 字。 按照字在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码。 前组码： 字在前 面的三字码词码； 中组码： 字在中间的三字码词码； 后组码： 字在后面的三字码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码、 后组码， 可组合出三 种码。  According to whether the codeword code is simplified and simplified, the codeword code can be divided into short code and full code; short code is further divided into: front short code, post short code, front and back short codes. Shortcode: simplified codeword code for full code; previous shortcode: simplified codeword for previous word; postcode: simplified codeword for subsequent word; full code; no simplified codeword code; three Code word code: Three word code words; Three word code words: divided into single three word codes, multiple three word codes; single three word codes: one three word code words; one more word Code: Enter multiple words for one three-word code word, or multiple words for several three-word code words. According to the position of the word in the code word, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The first group code: the three-character code word with the word in front; the middle group code: the three-character code word with the word in the middle; the last group code: the three-character word code with the word in the back; Part of the code can be combined into three codes according to the former group code, the middle group code, and the last group code.
a.前组字前简码 雳 雳霹 雷 lipilei lpl b.中组字前简码 霹 雳 霹 雷 lipilei lpl c后组字前简码 雷 雳 霹 雷 lipilei lpl 二字码词码： 字个数为二个的码词码； 单二字码： 一个二字码词输入一个字。 多二字 码： 一个二字码词输入多个字， 或几个二字码词输入多个字 a. Before the group of characters before the short code Lili thunder lipilei lpl b. In the group of words before the short code thunder thunder lipilei lpl c After the group of words before the short code thunder thunder thunder lipilei lpl two-character word code: the number of words is two Code word code; Single two-word code: Enter a word for a two-word code word. Multiple two-character code: Enter multiple characters for one two-character code word, or enter multiple characters for several two-character code words
按照字在码词中位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 后组码； 前组码： 字在前面的二字码词码; 后组码： 字在后面的二字码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分。 按照前组码、 后组码、 可以组合出其中实用的八种码： According to the position of the word in the code word, the order is divided into: the first group code and the last group code; the former group code: the two-character code word before the word; the last group code: the two-character word code after the word; What the code simplifies is part of the full code. According to the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined:
二字码词码 Two-word code
a.前组全码 雳 雳 霹 lipi a. Full size front group
b.前组字前简码 雳 雳 霹 lipi lpi c.前组字后简码 雳 雳 霹 lipi lip d.前组字前后简码 雳 雳 霹 lipi ip e.后组全码 霹 雳 霹 lipi b. Before the group of characters before the short code bang li lipi lpi c. After the group of words before the short bang li lip i lip d. front group before and after the short code bang li lipi ip e. back group full code lish li lipi
f.后组字前简码 霹 雳 霹 lipi lpi g.后组字后简码 霹 雳 霹 lipi lip h.后组字前后简码 霹 雳 霹 lipi lp f. Short letter before the group of words Perak lipi lpi g. Short letter after the group of words Perak lipi lip h. Short letter before and after the group of words Perak lipi lp
加码： 附加字母与码词码合称加码  Overweight: The additional letters and codewords are collectively called overweight
a.前加码： 字母在前面的加码 有雳 霹 ylipi a. Overweight: Letter overweight in front has ylipi
b.后加码： 字母在后面的加码 雳 霹 雷 lipil b. Overweight: Letter overweight in the back
c.前后加码： 字母在前后的加码 有雳 霹 雷 ylipl c. Overweight before and after: Overweight of letters before and after You have thunder, thunder, ylipl
单字码： 工 工作狂 gzk 学 学习 xuex 多字码： One-word code: workaholic gzk learn to learn xuex multi-word code:
二字词码： 单字码 +单字码 工作 工作狂 作为大 gzk z d Two-character word code: single word code + single word work workaholic as big gzk z d
三字词码： 单字码 +单字码 +单字码 植物园 植树节 物产广丰平园四艺学字 z s l wcfyyx The three-word code: + word code word code word code + Botanical Garden Arbor Park property guangfeng level four arts school word zsl wcfyyx
四字词码：单字码 +单字码 +单字码 +单字码；炉火纯青炉火旺火势猛纯净水 青青草 lhwhsmcjsqqc Four-character word code: single-word code + single-word code + single-word code + single-word code; furnace fire pure green furnace fire flourishing fierce pure water green grass lhwhsmcjsqqc
多字词码； 多个单字码相加合  Multi-word code; multiple single-word codes added
中华人民共和国 中国大 华人多 人们来 民主会 共产党 和平久 国家强 zgdhrdrralmzhgcdhpjgjq或 The People's Republic of China The People's Republic of China has a large Chinese population, and the people come to the Democratic Party, the Communist Party, the peaceful and long-lasting country, and the country to be strong. Zgdhrdrralmzhgcdhpjgjq or
zhrmghq zhrmghq
四字码词码  Four-character code
组前简码 阳阳春白雪 ycbx ; 字母码词码； 前组前简码 [J] E1 (3 ' Group short code Yangyangchun Baixue ycbx ; letter code word code; front group short code [J] E1 (3 '
日语、 日语码词码、 日语码字码、 日语 码、 日语假名码、 日语罗马字码； 一 字一码、一键一码、一码元一字、其键盘采用国际标准键盘、码元为 26个英文字母码 词素可以使日语汉字、 日语假名， 日语罗马字、 码词码可以是日语汉字、 日语假名、 日语罗马字。 码词码按照码词素的个数分为二码词码、 一码词码、 三码词码、 四码词 码、 多码词码。 码词码按照码词素分为： 日语汉字码词码、 日语假名码词码、 日语罗 马字码词码； 日语汉字码词码可以用来输入汉字假名、 罗马字、 日语假名码词码可以 用来输入汉字、假名、 罗马字； 日语罗马字码词码可以用来输入汉字、 假名、 罗马字， 按照要输入的码词素个数分为： 单码词素码、 多码词素码： 单码词素码： 一个码词输 入一个码词素， 多码词素码： 一个码词输入多个码词素， 或几个码词输入多个码词素。  Japanese, Japanese code word code, Japanese code word code, Japanese code, Japanese kana code, Japanese Roman code; one word, one code, one key, one code, one character, one word, the keyboard uses an international standard keyboard, and the symbol is The 26 English alphabet code morphemes can make Japanese Kanji, Japanese Kana, Japanese Roman characters, and code word codes can be Japanese Kanji, Japanese Kana, and Japanese Roman characters. Code word codes are divided into two-code word codes, one-code word codes, three-code word codes, four-code word codes, and multi-code word codes according to the number of code morphemes. Code word codes are divided into code morphemes: Japanese Kanji code word codes, Japanese Kana code word codes, Japanese Roman code word codes; Japanese Kanji code word codes can be used to input Chinese kana, Roman characters, and Japanese kana code word codes can be used To input Chinese characters, kana and roman characters; Japanese roman code word codes can be used to input kanji, kana and roman characters, which are divided into single-code morpheme codes, multi-code morpheme codes: single-code morphemes Code: Enter one code morpheme for one codeword, Multi-code morpheme code: Enter multiple code morphemes for one codeword, or enter multiple code morphemes for several codewords.
按照码词素在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码： 前组码： 码 词素在前面的码词码， 中组码： 码词素在中间的码词码； 后组码： 码词素在后面的码 词码。  According to the position of the code morphemes in the code words, the order is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, the last group code: the front group code: the code morpheme in front of the code word code, the middle group code: the code morpheme in the middle code word Code; last group code: code word code with code morpheme behind.
按照码词码是否简化和简化的顺序,码词码可分为简码和全码；简码又分为：前简 码、 后简码、 前后简码。  According to whether the codeword code is simplified and simplified, the codeword code can be divided into short code and full code; short code is further divided into: front short code, back short code, front and back short codes.
简码： 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码： 对前面的码词素简化的简码。  Shortcode: simplified codeword code for the full code; pre-shortcode: simplified codeword for the previous code morpheme.
后简码： 对后面的码词素简化的简码； 前后简码： 对前面、 后面的码词素简化的 简码。  Short code: simplified short code for the code morpheme of the following code; short code before and after: simplified short code for the code morpheme of the code before and after.
全码： 没有简化的码词码； 日语汉字码词码： 假名码词码、 罗马字码词码。  Full code: No simplified code word code; Japanese Kanji code word code: Kana code word code, Roman code word code.
三码词码分为： 日语汉字码词； 三假名码词码： 罗马字码词码；  Three code word codes are divided into: Japanese Kanji code words; Three kana code word codes: Roman code word codes;
三日语汉字码词码： 日语汉字个数为三个的码词码；  Three Japanese kanji code word codes: Three Chinese kanji code word codes;
三日语汉字码词码分为单三日语汉字码， 多三日语汉字码。 单三日语汉字码： 一 个曰语汉字码词输入一字； 多三日语汉字码： 一个日语汉字码词输入多个字， 或几个 日语汉字码词输入多个字。 Three Japanese character codes are divided into single three Japanese character codes, and multiple three Japanese character codes. Single three Japanese kanji code: Enter one word for one Japanese kanji code word; Multiple three Japanese kanji code: Enter multiple characters for one Japanese kanji code word, or several Enter multiple characters for Japanese Kanji code words.
按照日语汉字在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码  According to the position of Japanese kanji in code words, the sequence is divided into: front group code, middle group code, and rear group code
前组码： 日语汉字在前面的三日语汉字码词码； 中组码： 日语汉字在中间的三日语汉 字码词码， 后组码： 字在后面的三日语汉字码词码。 The first group code: three Kanji characters in the front of the Japanese Kanji code; the middle group code: the three Japanese Kanji characters in the middle of the Japanese Kanji code; the last group code: the three Japanese Kanji codes in the back.
按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码、 后组码可组合出三种 码。  What is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, and three codes can be combined according to the former group code, the middle group code, and the last group code.
二日语汉字码词码： 日语汉字个数为二个码词码： 单二日语汉字码： 一个日语二 字码词输入一个字。  Two Japanese Kanji code word codes: The number of Japanese Kanji characters is two code word codes: Single two Japanese Kanji code: One Japanese two-character code word enter one character.
多二日语汉字码： 一个日语汉字输入多个字或多个日语汉字码词输入多个字。 按照日语汉字在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 后组码： 前组码： 字在前面 的二字码词码。  Multiple Japanese Kanji Code: Enter multiple characters for one Japanese Kanji or multiple characters for multiple Kanji code words. According to the position of Japanese kanji in code words, the sequence is divided into: first group code, last group code: first group code: two-character code word with the word in front.
后组码： 字在后面的二字码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分  After group code: the two-character code word followed by the word; what is simplified according to the short code is part of the full code
按照前组码、 后组码可以组合出其中实用的八种码：  According to the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined:
a.前组全码、 b.前组字前简码、 c.前组前后简码、 d.前组字前后简码、 e后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组前简码、 h.后组单词前后简码。 a. Full code before the group, b. Short code before the group, c. Short code before the group, d. Short code before the group, e Full code after the group, f. Short code before the group, g. Back Short code before group, h. Short code before and after group words.
Figure imgf000008_0001
Figure imgf000008_0001
多字词码 多个单字码相加合 Multi-word word codes
四字码词码 前组前简码； 日语字母与键盘上名键对应关系 服从主流通用， 标准对 应关系 Four-character code word code Short code before group; Correspondence between Japanese letters and name keys on the keyboard Obey mainstream, standard correspondence
(1)三字码词输入方式 (1) Three-character code word input method
(2)三日语汉字 （日语假名、 日语罗马字）输入码  (2) Three Japanese Kanji (Japanese kana, Japanese Roman) input code
a.前组字前简码 合 合縁奇 ¾ 1/、 / u § ai en ki aek合 b.中组字前简码 縁 合縁奇 f ^ ai en ki aek縁 a. Short code before the first group of words combined together odd ¾ 1 /, / u § ai en ki aek together b. Short code before the middle group 縁 combined oddities f ^ ai en ki aek 縁
c后组字前简码 奇 合縁奇 ί) (/' X /v ¾ ai en ki aek奇 c after the group of words before the short code 奇 合 縁 奇 ί) (/ 'X / v ¾ ai en ki aek 奇
(3)二日语汉字日语罗马字码、 日语假名输入码  (3) Second Japanese Kanji Japanese Roman code, Japanese kana input code
a.前组字全码 愛 愛育 H、 < a i i ku愛 a. The first group of words full code love love education H, <a i i ku love
b.前组字前简码 愛 愛育 a i i ku a i ku愛 c前组字后简码 愛 愛育 ¾ l> l> < a i i ku a i i愛 d.前组字前后简码 愛 愛育 ¾ w < a i i ku a i愛 b. Front group before the short code love love education aii ku ai ku love c Front group before the short code love love education ¾ l> l> <aii ku aii love d. Front group before and after short code love love education ¾ w <aii ku ai Love
e.后组字全码 咽 哀咽 d¾ I/5 X. Ό a i e tu咽 e. Back group full code pharyngeal d¾ I / 5 X. Ό aie tu
g.后组字前简码 咽 哀咽 ¾ I/5 X. a i e tu a etu咽 f.后组字后简码 咽 哀咽 a i e tu a ie咽 h.后组字前后简码 咽 哀咽 a i e tu a e咽 g. Short code in front of back group sorrow ¾ I / 5 X. aie tu a etu tu ae pharynx
加码： 字母与单词输入码合称加码：  Plus code: Letter and word input code are collectively called plus code:
a.前加码： 字母在前面的加码； b.后加码： 字母在后面的加码； c.前后加码： 字母在 前后的加码 a. Before the code: the letter in front of the code; b. After the code: the letter in the code behind; c. Before and after the code: the letter in the code before and after
假名码； 字母与键盘上各键对应关系， 服从主流通用， 标准对应关系 Kana code; Correspondence between letters and keys on the keyboard, obey mainstream common, standard correspondence
(1)三字码词输入方式 （单下划线表示要输入的单词双下划线表示组码） (1) Three-character code word input method (single underline indicates the word to be input, double underline indicates the group code)
①输入码 a.前组字前简码 合縁奇 ¾ 无 / U ¾ m合 ①Enter the code a. The first group of words before the code combination is odd ¾ None / U ¾ m
b.中组字前简码 縁 合縁奇 ί) λ /u ¾ 无 色縁 b. Short code in the middle group 縁 縁 合 奇奇 ί) λ / u ¾ No color
c.后组字前简码 奇 合縁奇 ί) I/5 λ / ¾ *无 ¾奇 c. After the group of words before the short code is odd and strange Qi I) 5 / λ / ¾ * None
(2)二字码词输入方式  (2) Two-word code word input method
①字输入码  ①Word input code
a. 前组全码 愛 愛育 愛 a. Full size of the front group Love Love Education Love
b.前组字前简码 愛 愛育 <愛 b. Before the first group of words, love, love, education, love
c前组字后简码 愛 愛育 ί> (/、 、愛 c before the group of words short code love love education ί> (/,, love
d.前组字前后简码 愛 愛育 & 愛 d. Shortcodes before and after the word love love education & love
e.后组字全码 咽 哀咽 ¾ L、 咽 e. Full code of posterior group of words
g.后组字前简码 咽 哀咽 ¾ 咽 g. Short code before group words
f.后组字后简码 咽 哀咽 H P因 f. Post group short code
h.后组字前后简码 咽 哀咽 h. Short codes before and after the word group
(3)加码： 字母与字输入码合称加码  (3) Overweight: Letter and word input codes are collectively called overweight
罗马字码； 字母与键盘上各键对应关系， 服从主流通用， 标准对应关系； （1 )三 字码词输入方式 （单下划线表示要输入的单词双下划线表示码组）①字输入码； a.前 组字前简码合 合缘奇  Roman code; Correspondence between letters and keys on the keyboard, subject to the mainstream and standard correspondence; (1) Three-character code word input mode (single underline indicates the word to be entered; double underline indicates the code group) ① character input code; a . The first group of words before the code together
b.中组字前简码 缘 合缘奇 c.后组字前简码 奇 合缘奇 假名 （2 ) 二字码 词输入方式①字输入码 a.前组字全码爱 爱育； b.前组前简码爱 爱育； c.前组字 后简码爱 爱育； d.前组字前后简码爱 爱育； e.后组字全码 咽 哀咽； f.后组字后 简码咽 哀咽； g.后组字后简码咽 哀咽； h.后组字前后简码咽 哀咽； （3 )加码： 字母与字输入码合称加码； a.前加码： 字母在前面的加码； b.后加码： 字母在后面的 加码； c.前后加码： 字母在前面、 后面的加码； 字母码词码 前组前简码 a.前加码： 前后的加码
Figure imgf000009_0001
一字一码、 一键一字、一字一码元、其键盘采用国际标准键盘、码元为 26个英文字母； 韩语罗马 字、 码词码可以是韩语汉字、 韩语假名、 韩语罗马字。 码词码按照码词 素的个数分 为二码词码、 三码词码、 四码词码、 一码词码、 五码词码、 多码词码。 码词码按照码 词素分为： 韩语汉字码词码、 韩语假名码词码、 韩语罗马字码词码； 韩语汉字码词码 可以用来输入韩语汉字、韩语假名、韩语罗马字韩假名码词码可以用来输入韩语汉字、 韩语假名、 韩语罗马字； 韩语罗马字码词码可以用来输入韩语汉字、 韩语假名、 韩语 罗马字。 b. The short code before the middle group is connected to the odd c. The short word before the middle group is connected to the odd kana (2) Two-character code word input method ① The word input code a. The front group is full-code love love education; b . The former group of short code love love education; c. The former group of short code love love education; d. The former group of short code love love education; e. The rear group of full code sore throat; f. The rear group of words After the short code swallows sorrows; g. After the short word swallows sorrows; h. After the short group swallows sorrows; (3) Overweight: the letter and the word input code are collectively called overweight; a . Before overweight: Letters in front of the code; b. Codes in the back: code in the back of the letter; c. Codes in front and back: the code in the front and back of the letter; letter code in front of the group before the short code a. Code in the front: code before and after
Figure imgf000009_0001
One word, one code, one key, one word, one word, one symbol, the keyboard uses international standard keyboard, the symbol is 26 English letters; Korean Roman characters, codeword codes can be Korean Chinese characters, Korean kana, Korean Roman characters. Code word codes are divided into two code word codes, three code word codes, four code word codes, one code word codes, five code word codes, and multiple code word codes according to the number of code morphemes. The codeword code is divided into codeword morpheme: Korean Chinese character codeword, Korean kana codeword code, Korean Roman codeword code; Korean Chinese character codewordcode can be used to input Korean Chinese characters, Korean kana, Korean romanic code words The code can be used to input Korean Chinese characters, Korean kana, and Korean Roman characters; the Korean Roman character code can be used to input Korean Chinese characters, Korean kana, and Korean Roman characters.
按照要输入的码词素个数分为： 单码词素码、 多码词素码； 单码词素码： 一个码 词输入一个码词素多码词素码： 一个码词输入多个码词素， 或几个码词输入多个码词 素； 按照码词素在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码； 前组码： 码 词素在前面的码词码； 中组码： 码词素在中间的码词码； 后组码： 码词素在后面的码 词码； 按照码词码是否简化和简化的顺序，码词码可分为简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前 简码、 后简码、 前后简码； 简码： 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码： 对前面的码词 素简化的简码； 后简码： 对后面的码词素简化的简码； 前后简码： 对前面、 后面的码 词素简化的简码全码： 没有简化的码词码； 韩语汉字码词码： 韩语字母码词码， 韩语 罗马字码词码三码词码分为： 韩语汉字码词； 三韩语字母码词码： 罗马字码词码  According to the number of code morphemes to be input, it is divided into: single code morpheme code, multi-code morpheme code; single code morpheme code: one code word enters one code morpheme multi-code morpheme code: one code word enters multiple code morphemes, or several Enter multiple code morphemes in codewords; According to the position of codeword morphemes in codewords, they are divided into: first group code, middle group code, last group code; front group code: code morphemes in front of codeword code; middle group code : Code morphemes with code morphemes in the middle; Back group codes: Code morphemes with code morphemes behind It is: before short code, after short code, before and after short code; short code: simplified code word code for the full code; before short code: simplified short code for the previous code morpheme; after short code: for the subsequent code morpheme Simplified shortcodes; front and back shortcodes: simplified shortcodes for front and back code morphemes; full code: no simplified codeword codes; Korean Chinese codewordcodes: Korean alphabet codewordcodes, Korean Roman codewordwordcodes three codes Word code is divided into: Korean Chinese code words; three Korean Mother code word code: Roman word code word code
三韩语汉字码词码：韩语汉字个数为三个的码词码;三韩语汉字码词码分为单三韩 语汉字码， 多三韩语汉字码。单三韩语汉字码： 一个韩语汉字码词输入一字；多三日韩 语汉字码： 一个韩语汉字码词输入多个字， 或几个韩语汉字码词输入多个字。 Three-Korean Chinese Character Code Word Code: Three-Korean Chinese Character Code Word Code Chinese character code, more than three Korean character code. Single three Korean kanji code: Enter one character for one Korean kanji code word; Three more days Korean kanji code: Enter multiple characters for one Korean kanji code word, or multiple characters for several Korean kanji code words.
按照韩语汉字在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码： 前组码： 韩语汉字在前面的三韩语汉字码词码； 中组码：韩语汉字在中间的三韩语汉字码词码; 后组码： 字在后面的三韩语汉字码词码。  According to the position of Korean Chinese characters in code words, the order is divided into: front group code, middle group code, rear group code: front group code: Korean character in front of the three Korean character code word code; middle group code: Korean character in the middle The three Korean characters code word code; the last group code: the three Korean characters code word code in the back.
按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码、 后组码可组合出三种 码。 「各各哥  What is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, and three codes can be combined according to the former group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. "Every brother
二韩语汉字码词欠码： 韩语汉字个数为二个码词码； 单二韩语汉字码： 一个韩语二 字码词输入一个字。 多二韩语汉字码： 一个韩语汉字输入多个字或多个韩语汉字码词 输入多个字。  Two-Korean Chinese code word owing code: The number of Korean Chinese characters is two-code word code; Single-two Korean Chinese code: One Korean two-word code word. Multi-Korean Chinese Character Code: Enter multiple characters for one Korean Chinese character or multiple characters for Korean Chinese character code.
按照韩语汉字在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 后组码： 前组码： 字在前面 的二字码词码，后组码： 字在后面的二字码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分。  According to the position of the Korean characters in the codewords, the order is divided into: the first group code, the last group code: the first group code: the two-word code word before the word, and the second group code: the two-word code word after the word; Simplified according to the short code is part of the full code.
按照前组码、 后组码可以组合出其中实用的八种码：  According to the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined:
(1)韩语汉字码词码  (1) Korean Chinese character code
a. 前字全码： 各 各個^ 711 7} Π 7flkak ka各 b.前组字前简码 各 各個^ 7fl ^〕H "Ί 〕H k ka各 a. Full code of the front word: each ^ 711 7} Π 7flkak ka each b. The front short code of the previous group each ^ 7fl ^] H "Ί】 H k ka each
c.前组字后简码 各個 4 71 ， 卜 kak k各 c. The first group of words followed by the short code each 4 71 ， kak k each
d.前组字前后简码 各個 4 π 2 〕H - 1 k各 e.后组字全码 古歌卫 7} π 丄
Figure imgf000010_0001
卫 ko ka歌 d. Each short code before and after the previous group 4 π 2] H-1 k each
Figure imgf000010_0001
Wei ko ka song
f.后组字前简码 歌 古歌 ΞΙ 7} Π 7} 卫 \ 1 k ka歌 f. The short code of the last group of words 歌 古 歌 ΞΙ 7} Π 7} Wei \ 1 k ka song
g.后组字后简码 歌 古歌 ΞΙ 7} Π 丄 π 卫 ： Π — 1 _1_ —1 ko ka歌 g. After the group of words short code song ancient song ΞΙ 7} Π 丄 π Wei: Π — 1 _1_ —1 ko ka song
h.后组字前后简码 歌 古歌 Ξ1 7} Π 1 卫 Ό\ "Ί ~Ί k k歌h. Short code before and after the word Song Ancient Song Ξ1 7} Π 1 Wei Ό \ "Ί ~ Ί k k 歌
(1) 码： 字母与字输入码合称加码： a.前加码: 字母在前面的加码； b.后加码： 字母 在后面的加码 (1) Code: The letter and word input code are collectively called plus code: a. Pre-code: the letter is coded in front; b. Post-code: the letter is coded in the back
c.前后加码： 字母在前后的加码 不， 不知其數， 早^ 71午, 单字码； 多字码即词码；四字码词码 y τ; n A, pk chi ki sk, 二字词码： 单字码 +单字码 c. Pre- and post-code: The letters are not coded before and after, I do n’t know the number, as early as ^ 71 noon, single-word code; multi-word code is word code; four-word code word code y τ; n A, pk chi ki sk, two-word word Code: Single word code + single word code
三字词码： 单字码 +单字码 +单字码 Three-character word code: single-word code + single-word code + single-word code
四字词码： 单字码 +单字码 +单字码 +单字码 Four-character word code: single word code + single word code + single word code + single word code
多字词码： 多个单字码相加合 Multi-word code: Add multiple single-word codes
四字码词码； 前组前简码： 不 不知其数 pkchikiskpcks (韩语拉丁字母码）韩语字母码 韩语拉丁字母码； 字母与键盘上各键对应关系， 服从主流通用， 标准对应关系 Four-character code word code; Before the first group of short code: I do not know the number pkchikiskpcks (Korean Latin alphabet code) Korean alphabet code Korean Latin alphabet code; Correspondence between letters and keys on the keyboard, obey the mainstream, standard correspondence
(1) 三字码词输入方式  (1) Three-word code word input method
①字输入码 ①Word input code
a.前组字前简码 假 假建物 4 ¾ ， n 口 2i g ~> a k k m a. The front group of short-coded fake building 4 ¾, n mouth 2i g ~> a kkm
b.中组字前简码 建 假建物 7 · π π 口 2d 詈 k k m b. Short code in the middle of the word building fake building 7 · π π mouth 2d 詈 k k m
c.后组字前简码 物 假建物 晉 π π 口 1· k k m 韩语字母码 c. After the group of words before the short code fake building Jin π π mouth 1 · km Korean alphabet code
字母与键盘上各键对应关系， 服从主流通用， 标准对应关系: The correspondence between the letters and the keys on the keyboard is subject to the mainstream, the standard correspondence:
( 1 )三字码词输入方式  (1) Three-word code word input method
①字输入码  ①Word input code
a.前组字前简码 假假建物 7]· 3 ¾■ π π 口 a. Before the initial group of short code, fake building 7] · 3 ¾ ■ π π mouth
b.中组字前简码 建假建物 7]· 晉 π π 口 ^ 2 b. Short code in front of the middle group word False Building 7) · Jin π π mouth ^ 2
C后组字前简码 物假建物 7 ¾ Π Π ϋ J\ ! After the C group short code before the fake building 7 ¾ Π Π ϋ J \!
韩语字母码  Korean alphabet code
二字码词输入方式  Two-word code word input method
① 字输入码  ① Word input code
a. 前组字全码 各 各個 4 7fl 7} Π 7fl 〕H ^各 b.前组字前简码 各 各個^ Π D \ a. Full code of the previous group of words 4 7fl 7} Π 7fl】 H ^ each b. Each short code of the previous group of words ^ Π D \
I . 〕H - ， 〕H各  I.] H-,] H each
c前组字后简码 各 各個^ 7} 1 D\ ，各 d.前组字前后简码 各 各個 ^ Π Π D Y c before the first group of characters each ^ 7} 1 D \, each d. before and after the first group of characters short ^ Π Π D Y
~ 1 ，各  ~ 1 each
e.后组字全码 歌 古歌卫 7} Π 丄 Ά 卫 — 1 丄 e. After the full word of the song Ge Gu Wei 7} Π 丄 Ά — — 1 丄
f.后组字前简码 歌 古歌卫 7} Π 丄 Π 卫 \ -| 丄 ，歌 g.后组字后简码 歌 古歌卫 7} Π 7} ~ i 观 f. Short code before the word Ge Gu Ge Wei 7} Π 丄 Π Wei \-| 丄, song g. Short code after the word Ge Gu Ge Wei 7} Π 7} ~ i view
h.后组字前后简码 歌 古歌卫 7} Π Π 卫 ~1歌 h. Short code before and after the word Song Gu Ge Wei 7} Π Π Wei ~ 1 song
( 1 )加码： 字母与字输入码合称加码： a.前加码： 字母在前面的加码； b.后加码： 字母 在后面的加码  (1) Overweight: The letter and the word input code are collectively called overweight: a. Before the plus: the letter is added in front; b. After the plus: the letter is added in the back
c.前后加码： 字母在前后的加码; 母 ^词码  c. Pre- and post-code: the pre- and post-code of the letter; mother ^ word code
前组前简码 Θ 0  Short code before group Θ 0
键盘用国际标准通用健盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字 Keyboard with international standard universal disk, code element is 2 6 English characters
在拼音文字中， 码词素为单词， 字母字母码词码是单词， 字母， 码词码可以输入单 词、 字母即拼音文字码词码， 码词码又叫码单词码、 码语码、 码字母码、 一假物建单词一码、 一码元一单词、 一键一单词、 码词码按照单词个数分为： 三单词码词码， 二单词码词码， 四单词码词码， 一单词码词码、 五单词码词码、 多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词 的个数分为单词码、 多单词码。  In Pinyin text, the code morpheme is a word, and the alphabetic code is the word. The letter can be a word. The letter is the pinyin code. The code is also called the code word code, code word code, and code letter. Code, one fake one word, one code, one word, one key, one word, code word codes are divided according to the number of words: three word code word code, two word code word code, four word code word code, one Word code word code, five word code word code, multi-word code word code; Code word code is divided into word code and multi-word code according to the number of words to be input.
单词码： 一个码词输入一单词。 多单词码： 一个码词输入多个单词， 或多个码词输入多 个单词。 Word Code: Enter a word for a code word. Multi-word code: Enter multiple words for one code word, or enter multiple words for multiple code words.
按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码； 前组码： 单词在 前面的码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的码词码； 按照码 词码是否简化和简化的顺序和不简化， 可分为简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简 码、 前后简码； 简码： 对全码进行简化的码词码。 前简码： 对前面的单词简化的简码； 后简码： 对后面的单词简化的简码； 前后简码： 对前面、 后面的单词简化的简码； 全码: 没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码： 单词个数为三个的码词码。  According to the position of the word in the code word, the order is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code; the former group code: the code word with the word in front; the middle group code: the code word with the word in the middle; Group code: The word code behind the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and simplified, and can not be simplified, it can be divided into short code and full code; short code is divided into: front short code, last short code, front and back short codes Short code: Simplified code word code for the full code. Short code before: simplified short code for the previous word; short code: simplified short code for the following word; front and back short code: simplified short code for the previous and following word; full code: no simplified code word code ; Three-word code word code: Three-word code word code.
三单词码词码分为： 单三单词码、 多三单词码； 单三单词码： 一个三单词码词码输 入一个单词。  Three-word code word codes are divided into: single three-word code, multiple three-word code; single three-word code: one three-word code word code Enter a word.
多三单词码： 一个三单词码词输多个单词， 或几个三单词码输入多个单词。  Multiple three-word codes: Enter multiple words for one three-word code word, or enter multiple words for several three-word codes.
按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码： 前组码： 单词在 前面的三单词码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的三 单词码词码。  According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, the last group code: the first group code: the three-word code word with the word in front; the middle group code: the three-word code with the word in the middle Word code; After group code: The word is the three word code followed by the word code.
按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码、 后组码， 可以合出三种 码， 即 a.前组单词前简码； b.中组单词前简码； c.后组单词前简码。 二单词码词码： 单词的个数为二个的码词码； 单二单词码： 一个二单词码输入一个 单词。 What is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code. According to the previous group code, the middle group code, and the last group code, three kinds of codes can be combined, namely a. The previous group of short codes; b. The middle group of words ; C. Short code before the next group of words. Two-word code word code: The number of words is two code word codes; Single two-word code: One two-word code Enter a word.
多二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入多个单词， 或几个二单词码词输入多个单词。 按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 后组码： 前组码： 单词在前面的二 单词码词码。 后组码： 单词在后面的二单词码词码。  Multiple two-word code: Enter multiple words for one two-word code word, or enter multiple words for several two-word code words. According to the position of the word in the code word, the order is divided into: the first group code, the last group code: the first group code: the two words before the word code. After group code: The word is the two-word code behind the word.
按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 后组码， 可以组合出其中实用的 八种码：  Simplified according to the short code is part of the full code. According to the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined:
a.前组全码； b.前组单词前简码； c.前组单词后简码； d.前组单词前后简码； e.后组全 码； f.后组前简码； g.后组后简码； h.后组单词前后简码。 a. Full code before the group; b. Short code before the group of words; c. Short code before the group of words; d. Short code before and after the group of words; e. Full code after the group; f. Short code before the group; g. . Shortcodes after the group; h. Shortcodes before and after the group of words.
加码： 附加字母与码词码合称加码； a.前加码： 字母在前面的加码； b.后加码： 字母 在后面的加码； c.前后加码： 字母在前后的加码。  Adding code: The additional letter and code word code are collectively called plus code; a. Before plus code: letter plus code in front; b. After plus code: letter plus code at the back; c. Before and after code plus code: before and after code.
Figure imgf000012_0001
Figure imgf000012_0001
来输入单词： 字母， 即印尼语码词码， 其键盘手用国际通用标准键盘： 码元为 26个英文 字母。 字母是本国语字母对应的拉丁字母。 To enter words: letters, which is the Indonesian code word code, its keyboard player uses the international standard keyboard: the code element is 26 English letters. The alphabet is the Latin alphabet corresponding to the national alphabet.
码词码按照单词个数分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码， 一单词码词码、 四单词码词 码、 多单词码词码。 按照要输入单词个数分为： 单单词码， 多单词码： 单单词码： 一个 码词输入一个单词多单词码： 一个码词输入多个单词， 或几个码词输入多个单词。 The code word code is divided into three word code words, two word code words, one word code words, four word code words, and multiple word code words. According to the number of words to be entered, it is divided into: single word code, multiple word codes: single word code: one codeword, one word, multiple word codes: one codeword, multiple words, or several codewords, multiple words.
按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码， 中组码， 后组码。 前组码： 单词在 前面的码词码中组码： 单词在中间的码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的码词码。  According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The first group code: the word is in the front codeword group code: the word in the middle codeword code; the last group code: the word codeword in the back codeword.
按照码词码是否简化和简化的顺序,码词码可分为简码和全码；简码又分为：前简码、 后前码、 前后简码简码： 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码： 对前面的单词进行简化的 简码， 后简码： 对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码： 对前面， 后面的单词简化的 简码， 全码： 没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码： 单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码 词码分为单三单词码， 多三单词码； 单三单词码： 一个三单词码词输入一个单词； 多三 单词码： 一个三单词码词输入多个单词， 或几个三单词码输入多个单词。  According to whether the codeword code is simplified and simplified, the codeword code can be divided into short code and full code; short code is further divided into: front short code, back front code, front and back short code Word code; short code before: simplified short code of the previous word, short code: simplified short code of the following word; front and back short code: simplified short code of the front and subsequent word, full code: no Simplified code word code; Three-word code word code: Three-word code word code; Three-word code word code is divided into single three-word code, multiple three-word code; single three-word code: one three-word code word Enter a word; Multiple three-word codes: Enter multiple words for a three-word code word, or multiple words for several three-word codes.
按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码， 中组码， 后组码； 前组码： 单词在 前面的三单词码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的三 单词码词码。 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分。 按照前组码， 中组 后组码， 可组合出三种码。  According to the position of the word in the code word, the order is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, the last group code; the former group code: the three-word code word with the word in front; the middle group code: the three-word code with the word in the middle Word code; After group code: The word is the three word code followed by the word code. Simplified according to the short code is part of the full code. According to the former group code, the middle group and the latter group code, three kinds of codes can be combined.
印度尼西亚语； 字母与键盘上各键对应关系， 服从主流通用， 标准对应关系。  Indonesian; Correspondence between letters and keys on the keyboard, subject to mainstream, standard correspondence.
三单词码词码  Three-word code
a.前组单词前简码  a. Short code before the previous group of words
中文： paspor paspor akan visa pav Chinese: paspor paspor akan visa pav
护照 护照 即将
Figure imgf000012_0002
Passport is coming
Figure imgf000012_0002
b.中组单词前简码  b. Short code before middle group words
中文： akan paspor akan visa pav Chinese: akan paspor akan visa pav
即将 护照 即将 签证  Imminent passport imminent visa
c.后组单词前简码  c. Short code before the next group of words
中文： vviissaa paspor akan visa pav Chinese: vviissaa paspor akan visa pav
签证 即将 签证 二单词码词码： 单词个数为 2个的码词码。 单二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入一个 单词。 Visa coming soon Two-word code word code: A code word code with two words. Single two-word code: Enter a word for a two-word code word.
多二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词。 按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码， 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面的二 单词码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的二单词码词码。  Multiple two-word code: Enter multiple words for one two-word code word or multiple words for several two-word code words. According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code and the last group code. The first group code: the two word codes in front of the word; the second group code: the two word codes in front of the word.
按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分。 按照前组码， 后组码， 可以组合出其中通用的八种 码： Simplified according to the short code is part of the full code. According to the former group code and the latter group code, eight common codes can be combined:
二单词码词码  Two-word code
a.前组全码：  a. Full code of the previous group:
中文： aspor paspor akan Chinese: aspor paspor akan
护照 护照 即将  Passport passport coming
b.前组单词前简码  b. Short code before the previous group of words
中文： paspor paspor akan pakan Chinese: paspor paspor akan pakan
护照 护照 即将  Passport passport coming
C.前组后简码  C. Short code before group
中文： aspor paspor akan paspora Chinese: aspor paspor akan paspora
护照 护照 即将  Passport passport coming
d.前组单词前后简码  d. Shortcodes before and after the previous group of words
中文： paspor paspor akan pa Chinese: paspor paspor akan pa
护照 护照 即将  Passport passport coming
e.后组全码  e. Rear group full code
中文： akan paspor akan Chinese: akan paspor akan
护照 护照 即将  Passport passport coming
f.后组前简码  f. Short code before group
中文： akan paspor akan pakan Chinese: akan paspor akan pakan
护照 护照 即将  Passport passport coming
g.后组单词后简码  g. short code after the group of words
中文： akan paspor akan paspora Chinese: akan paspor akan paspora
护照 护照 即将  Passport passport coming
h.后组前后简码  h. Short codes before and after the group
中文： akan paspor akan pa Chinese: akan paspor akan pa
护照 护照 即将  Passport passport coming
加码； 附加字母与码词码合称加码  Code-adding
a.前加码： 字母在前面的加码  a. Before the code: the letter in front of the code
中文： ooakan oopa Chinese: ooakan oopa
护照  Passport
b.后加码： 字母在后面的加码  b. Post-code: The letter is followed by the code
中文： akanoo paoo Chinese: akanoo paoo
护照  Passport
c.前后加码： 字母在前后的加码  c. Pre- and post-code: The pre- and post-code of the letter
中文： oakano opao Chinese: oakano opao
护照  Passport
ing加码； en加码； est加码； ly加码； ed加码； in前加码 ing code; en code; est code; ly code; ed code; in code before
四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码 P paspor Pa Four-word code: short code before the group; letter code: short code before the group P paspor Pa
中文 护照 Chinese Passport
P paspor alcan pa  P paspor alcan pa
中文 护照 即将 Chinese passport coming soon
在拼音文字中英语， 码词素为单词、 字母、 码词码是单词、 字母， 码词码可以用来 输入单词， 字母， 即英语码词码， 其键盘用国际通用标准键盘： 码元为 26个英文字母， 字母是本国语字母对应的拉丁字母， 或本国语字母一单词一码。  In Pinyin text, the code morphemes are words, letters, and code words are words and letters. Code word codes can be used to enter words. Letters, that is, English code word codes. The keyboard uses the international standard keyboard: code element is 26 English letters, where the letters are the Latin letters corresponding to the native alphabet, or the native alphabet is one word and one code.
码词码按照单词个数分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码， 四单词码词码、 一单词 码词码、 多单词码词码。 按照要输入单词个数分为： 单单词码， 多单词码。 单单词码： 一个码词输入一个单词多单词码： 一个码词输入多个单词， 或几个码词输入多个单词。  Code word codes are divided into three word code words: two word code words, two word code words, four word code words, one word code words, and multiple word code words. According to the number of words to be input, it is divided into: single word code, multi-word code. Single-word code: Enter one word for one codeword. Multi-word code: Enter multiple words for one codeword, or multiple words for several codewords.
按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码， 中组码， 后组码。 前组码： 单词在 前面的码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的码词码。 按照码 词码是否简化和简化的顺序，码词码可分为简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后前码、 前后简码。 简码： 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码： 对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码： 对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码： 对前面， 后面的单词简化的简码； 全码： 没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码： 单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码分 为单三单词码， 多三单词码； 单三单词码： 一个三单词码词输入一个单词； 多三单词码： 一个三单词码词输入多个单词， 或几个三单词码输入多个单词。  According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The first group code: the code word code in front of the word; the middle group code: the code word code in the middle of the word; the last group code: the code word code in the back of the word. According to whether the code word code is simplified and simplified, the code word code can be divided into short code and full code; short code is further divided into: front short code, back front code, front and back short codes. Shortcode: Simplified codeword code for the full code; Pre-shortcode: Simplified shortcode for the previous word; Post-shortcode: Simplified shortcode for the following words; Pre- and short-code: For the front, the following Simplified short word code; full code: no simplified code word code; three-word code word code: three-word code word code; three-word code word code is divided into single three-word code, multiple three-word code; Single three-word code: Enter one word for a three-word code word; Multiple three-word code: Enter multiple words for a three-word code word, or enter multiple words for several three-word codes.
按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码， 中组码， 后组码。 前组码： 单词在 前面的三单词码词码中组码： 单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的三单 词码词码。  According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The first group code: the word in the first three-word code, the group code: the three-word code in the middle, the last group code: the three-word code in the last three words.
按照简码所简化的是全码'的一部分按照前组码， 中组码， 后组码可组合出三种码： 三单词码词码  What is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code. According to the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code, three types of codes can be combined: three-word code word code
a.前组单词前简码  a. Short code before the previous group of words
(a) 小写： anyhing angthing aluable inside avi  (a) Lower case: anyhing angthing aluable inside avi
. 中文译： 任何事 任何事 有价值 在里面  Chinese Translation: Everything is valuable in it
(b) 开头字母大写： Anything Avi  (b) Uppercase letters: Anything Avi
中文译： 任何事  Chinese Translation: Anything
(c)大写： ANYTHING AVI  (c) Uppercase: ANYTHING AVI
任何事  anything
b.中组单词前简码  b. Short code before middle group words
valuable anything valuable inside avi  valuable anything valuable inside avi
中文译： 有价值 任何事 有价值 在里面 Chinese translation: worth anything anything worth there
c.后组单词前简码  c. Short code before the next group of words
illumination moment of illumination moi  illumination moment of illumination moi
中文译： 照亮 瞬间 照亮 Chinese translation: light up
二单词码词码： 单词个数为 2个的码词码。 单二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入一个 单词。  Two-word code word code: A two-word code word code. Single two-word code: Enter a word for a two-word code word.
多二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词。  Multiple two-word code: Enter multiple words for one two-word code word or multiple words for several two-word code words.
按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码， 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面的二 单词码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的二单词码词码。 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分。  According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code and the last group code. The first group code: the two word codes in front of the word; the second group code: the two word codes in front of the word. Simplified according to the short code is part of the full code.
按照前组码， 后组码， 可以组合出其中通用的八种码： 二单词码词码  According to the former group code and the latter group code, eight common codes can be combined: two-word code word code
a.前组全码中文： think think you  a. Full group Chinese in front: think think you
想 想 你 b.前组单词前简码中文： think think you tyou Think of you b. Before the short group of words in Chinese: think think you tyou
*百 想 你 你  * 100 miss you you
c.前组后简码中文： think think you thinky  c. Short code in front of group in Chinese: think think you thinky
想 想 你  Think about you
d.前组单词前后简码 中文： think think you ty  d. Shortcodes before and after the group of words Chinese: think think you ty
想 想 你  Think about you
e.后组全码 中文： determine to determine  e. Full code of back group Chinese: determine to determine
决定 于 决定  Decide to decide
f.后组前简码 中文： determine to determine tdetermine  f. Short code before group Chinese: determine to determine tdetermine
决定 于 决定  Decide to decide
g.后组单词后简码 中文： determine to determine tod  g. After group short words Chinese: determine to determine tod
决定 于 决定  Decide to decide
h.后组前后简码 中文： determine to determine td  h. Short codes before and after the group Chinese: determine to determine td
决定 于 决定  Decide to decide
加码： 附加字母与码词合称加码  Overweight: The additional letters and codewords are collectively called overweight
a.前力 B码：字母在前面的力 Π码 中文： incorporate in corporate body of in cbo  a. Forward force B code: the force of the letter in front Π code Chinese: incorporated in corporate body of in cbo
法人 法人 体  Legal person
b.后力 Q码：字母在后面的力卩码 sensational sensation was good sgal 感情 感情 是 好 c.前后加码： 字母在前后的加码 production pro duct to the ion prodttion  b. Back force Q code: the force code of the letter at the back sensational sensation was good sgal feeling feeling is good c. before and after the code: the letter before and after the production pro duct to the ion prodttion
生产 管 于 这  Production tube at this
extend extend her hand ehli ing 力口码； extending； ehhing er 力口码 extreme extreme grief in egi extremer egien extend extend her hand ehli ing force code; extending; ehhing er force code extreme extreme grief in egi extremer egien
est 力卩码 extremest egiest ； ly 力口码 hollow hollow feeling in hfi hollowly hfily ； ed加码 extended 扩展 ehhed ； in前加码 空 感觉 四单词码词码； 前组前简码； 字母码词码； 前组前简码 est extreme egiest; ly hollow hollow feeling in hfi hollowly hfily; ed plus extended extended ehhed; in plus plus empty feeling four-word code word code; short code before the group; letter code word before the group Short Code
pvivilege pvivilege to make his ptm pvivilege pvivilege to make his ptm
特 特权 使 他  Special privilege makes him
s sun moon sm s sun moon sm
中文 太阳 月亮 Chinese Sun Moon
o of of o of of
中文 的 Chinese
在拼音文字中西班牙语码词素为单词、 字母、 码词码是单词、 字母。 码词码可以用 来输入单词， 字母， 即西班牙语码词码， 其键盘用国际通用标准键盘： 码元为 26个英文 字母。 字母是本国语字母对应的拉丁字母或本国语字母。  In Pinyin text, the Spanish code morphemes are words, letters, and code words are words, letters. The code word code can be used to input words, letters, that is, the Spanish code word code, and its keyboard uses the international standard keyboard: the code element is 26 English letters. The alphabet is the Latin or native alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet.
码词码按照单词个数分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码， 四单词码词码、 一单词 码词码、 多单词码词码。 按照要输入单词个数分为： 单单词码， 多单词码。 单单词码： 一个码词输入一个单词多单词码： 一个码词输入多个单词， 或几个码词输入多个单词。 按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码， 中组码， 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面 的码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码 是否简化和简化的顺序,码词码可分为简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后前码、 前后 简码； 简码： 对全码进行简化的码词码前简码： 对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码： 对后面的单词进行简化的简码前后简码： 对前面， 后面的单词简化的简码； 全码： 没有 简化的码词码； 三单词码词码： 单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码分为单三单词 码， 多三单词码； 单三单词码： 一个三单词码词输入一个单词； 多三单词码： 一个三单 词码词输入多个单词， 或几个三单词码输入多个单词。 按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序 分为： 前组码， 中组码， 后组码。 Code word codes are divided into three word code words: two word code words, two word code words, four word code words, one word code words, and multiple word code words. According to the number of words to be input, it is divided into: single word code, multi-word code. Single-word code: Enter one word for one codeword. Multi-word code: Enter multiple words for one codeword, or multiple words for several codewords. According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The first group code: the code word code in front of the word; the middle group code: the code word code in the middle of the word; the second group code: the code word code in the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and simplified, the code word code It can be divided into short code and full code; short code is further divided into: front short code, back front code, front and back short codes; short code: a code that simplifies the full code; code short code: simplifies the preceding word Shortcode Simplified short code before and after the short word: simplified short code for the previous and following words; full code: no simplified code word code; three-word code word code: three-word code word code Three-word code words are divided into single three-word codes, multiple three-word codes; single three-word codes: one three-word code words enter one word; multiple three-word codes: one three-word code words enter multiple words, or several Enter multiple words with a three-word code. According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code.
前组码： 单词在前面的之单词码词码。 中组码： 单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组 码： 单词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分，按照前组码， 中组 码， 后组码，可组合出三种码； 西班牙语三单词码词码，  Pre-group code: The word code in front of the word. Middle group code: the three-word code word with the word in the middle; the last group code: the three-word code word with the word in the middle; what is simplified according to the short code is part of the full code, according to the previous group code, the middle group code, Group code, which can be combined into three codes; Spanish three-word code word code,
a.前组单词前简码  a. Short code before the previous group of words
negro negro lana puro snip  negro negro lana puro snip
中文 黑 色 黑 色 羊毛 纯 Chinese Black Black Wool Pure
b.中组单词前简码  b. Short code before middle group words
negro negro lana puro snip  negro negro lana puro snip
中文 黑 色 黑 色 羊毛 纯 Chinese Black Black Wool Pure
c.后组单词前简码  c. Short code before the next group of words
negro negro lana puro snip  negro negro lana puro snip
中文 黑 色 黑 色 羊毛 纯 Chinese Black Black Wool Pure
二单词码词码： 单词个数为 2个的码词码。 单二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入一个单词。 多二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入多个单词， 或几个二单词码词输入多个单词。 Two-word code word code: A two-word code word code. Single two-word code: Enter a word for a two-word code word. Multiple two-word code: Enter multiple words for one two-word code word, or enter multiple words for several two-word code words.
按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为， 前组码， 后组码； 前组码： 单词在前面的二 单词码词码； 后组码： 单词在后二单词码词码按照简码所箭化的是全码的一部分， 按照 前组码， 且码， 可以组合出其中早用的八种码。 二单词码词码：  According to the position of the word in the code word, the order is divided into the first group code, the last group code; the first group code: the word in the first two word code word code; the last group code: the word in the last two word code word code according to short code The arrow is a part of the full code. According to the previous group of codes, the eight codes used earlier can be combined. Two word code word code:
a.前组全码 a. Full code of the previous group
negro negro lana  negro negro lana
中文 黑 色 黑 色 羊毛 Chinese Black Black Wool
b.前组单词前简码 b. Short code before the previous group of words
negro negro lana nlng  negro negro lana nlng
中文 黑 色 黑 色 羊毛 Chinese Black Black Wool
c.前组后简码 c. Short code before group
negro negro lana negrol  negro negro lana negrol
中文 黑 色 黑 色 · 羊毛 Chinese Black Black Wool
d.前组单词前后简码 d. Shortcodes before and after the previous group of words
negro negro lana nl  negro negro lana nl
中文 黑 色 黑 色 羊毛 Chinese Black Black Wool
e.后组全码 e. Rear group full code
negro negro lana  negro negro lana
中文 黑 色 黑 色 羊毛 Chinese Black Black Wool
f.后组前简码 f. Short code before group
lana negro lana n ana  lana negro lana n ana
中文 羊毛 黑 色 羊毛 Chinese Wool Black Wool
g.后组单词后简 g. After the group of words
lana negro lana negrol  lana negro lana negrol
中文 羊毛 黑 色 羊毛 Chinese Wool Black Wool
h.后组前后， 简码 h. Before and after the group, shortcode
lana negro lana nl 中文 羊毛 黑色 羊毛 lana negro lana nl Chinese wool black wool
加码： 附加字母与码词码合称加码 0|ang 0 nl Overweight: The additional letters and codewords together are called overweight 0 | ang 0 nl
a.前加码： 字母在前面的加码. 中文 羊毛 Olanao nlO a. Front oversize: Overweight of the letter in front. Chinese wool Olanao nlO
b.后加码： 字母在后面的加码. 中文 羊毛 Olanao 0 n|o b. Back-up: Overweight of letters at the back. Chinese Wool Olanao 0 n | o
c.前后加码： 字母在前后的加码。 中文 羊毛 c. Pre- and post-code: The pre- and post-code of the letter. Chinese Wool
ing 加码 er 加码; est 加码; ly 加码; ed 加码; in 加码。 四单词码词码 ing plus er plus; est plus; ly plus; ed plus; in plus. Four-word code
前组前简码。 字母码词码； 前组前简码 Short code before the previous group. Letter code word code
n negro lana nl  n negro lana nl
中文 黑色 羊毛 Chinese black wool
n negro ne  n negro ne
中文 黑色 Chinese black
在拼音文字中， 德语， 码词素为单词、 字母， 码词码是单词、 字母， 码词码可以用 来输入单词、 字母,即德语码词码， 其键盘用国际通用标准键盘,码元为 26个英文字母。 字母是本国语字母， 或本国语对应的拉丁字母， 码词码按照单词个数分为： 三单词码词 码， 二单词码词码， 四单词码词码， 多单词码词码，一单词码词码。  In pinyin text, German, code morphemes are words and letters, code word codes are words and letters, code word codes can be used to enter words and letters, that is, German code word codes, and the keyboard is an international standard keyboard. The code element is 26 English letters. The alphabet is the native alphabet, or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native language. The codeword code is divided according to the number of words: three-word codeword code, two-word codewordcode, four-word codewordcode, multi-wordcodewordcode, one word Code word code.
按照要输入单词个数分为： 单单词码， 多单词码， 单单词码： 一个码词输入一个单 词， 多单词码， 一个码词输入多个单词， 或几个码词输入多个单词。 按照单词在码词中 的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码， 中组码， 后组码； 前组码： 单词在前面的码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的码词码。 按照码词码是否简化和简化的顺 序，码词码可分为简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码， 后简码， 前后简码； 简码： 对全码 进行简化的码词码前简码： 对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码： 对后面的单词进行 简化的简码。 前后简码： 对前面， 后面的单词简化的简码。  According to the number of words to be input, it is divided into: single-word code, multiple-word code, single-word code: one codeword, one word, multiple-word code, one codeword, multiple words, or several codewords, multiple words. According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code; the former group code: the word code in front of the word; the middle group code: the code word in the middle; Group code: The word code behind the word. According to whether the codeword code is simplified and simplified, the codeword code can be divided into short code and full code; the short code is further divided into: short code before, short code, short code before and after; short code: simplify the full code Shortcode before codeword: simplified shortcode for the previous word; shortcode after: simplified shortcode for the subsequent word. Shortcodes before and after: Simplified shortcodes for the words before and after.
全码： 没有简化的码词码， 三单词码词码： 单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词 码分为单三单词码， 多三单词码词码， 一个三单词码词输入一个单词， 多三单词码， 一 个三联单单词码词输入多个单词， 或几个三单词码输入多个单词。 按照单词在码词， 中 的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码， 中组码， 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面的三单词码词码， 中组码： 单词在中间的三单词码词码。 后组码： 单词在后面的三单词码词码按照简码所 简化的是全码的一部分.按照前组码， 中组码， 后组码， 可组合出三种码； 德语三单词码 词码：  Full code: No simplified code word code, three-word code word code: Three-word code word code; Three-word code word code is divided into single three-word code, multiple three-word code word code, one three-word code Enter one word for each word, multiple three-word codes, multiple words for one triple single-word code, or multiple words for several three-word codes. According to the position of the word in the codeword, the order is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The first group code: the three-word code word with the word in front, the middle group code: the three-word code word with the word in the middle. After group code: The three-word code behind the word is simplified according to the short code, which is part of the full code. According to the previous group code, the middle group code, and the last group code, three types of codes can be combined; German three-word code code:
a.前组单词前简码  a. Short code before the previous group of words
frei frei dann gegen fdg  frei frei dann gegen fdg
中文 自由 自由 然后 将近 Chinese free free then almost
b.中组单词前简码  b. Short code before middle group words
dam frei dann gegen fdg  dam frei dann gegen fdg
中文 然后 自由 然后 将近 Chinese then free then near
C.后组单词前简码  C. Short code before the next group of words
gegen frei dann gegen fdg  gegen frei dann gegen fdg
中文 将近 自由 然后 将近 Chinese is almost free then near
二单词码词码： 单词个数为 2个的码词码,单二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入一个单词。 Two-word code word code: Two-word code word code, single two-word code: One two-word code word Enter a word.
多二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入多个单词， 或几个二单词码词输入多个单词。 按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为， 前组码， 后组码； 前组码： 单词在前面的二 单词码词码后组码： 单词在后面的二单词码词码按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按 照前组码， 后组码， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码- a. 前组全码
Figure imgf000018_0001
Multiple two-word code: Enter multiple words for one two-word code word, or enter multiple words for several two-word code words. According to the position of the word in the code word, the order is divided into: first group code, last group code; first group code: the two word code before the word word group code: the two word code after the word word code according to the short code Simplified is a part of the full code. According to the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined-a. Full group code before
Figure imgf000018_0001
中文 自由 自由 然后 Chinese free free then
b.前组单词前简码 b. Short code before the previous group of words
frei frei dann fdann  frei frei dann fdann
中文 自由 自由 然后 Chinese free free then
c前组后简码 c short code before group
frei frei dann freid  frei frei dann freid
中文 自由 自由 然后 Chinese free free then
d.前组单词前后简码d. Shortcodes before and after the previous group of words
Figure imgf000018_0002
Figure imgf000018_0002
中文 自由 自由 然后 Chinese free free then
e.后组全码 e. Rear group full code
frei frei dann  frei frei dann
中文 自由 自由 然后 Chinese free free then
f.后组前简码 f. Short code before group
frei frei dann fdann  frei frei dann fdann
中文 自由 自由 然后 Chinese free free then
g.后组单词后简码 g. short code after the group of words
frei frei dann freid  frei frei dann freid
中文 自由 自由 然后 Chinese free free then
h.后组前后简码 h. Short codes before and after the group
frei frei dann fd  frei frei dann fd
中文 自由 自由 然后 Chinese free free then
ing加码； er加码； est加码； ly加码； ed加码； in加码； 四单词码词码； 前组前简码； 字母码词码； 前组前简码ing plus code; er plus code; est plus code; ly plus code; ed plus code; in plus code; four-word code word code; previous group short code; letter code word code; previous group short code
Figure imgf000018_0003
Figure imgf000018_0003
中文 自由 Chinese Free
f frei claim fd  f frei claim fd
中文 自由 然后 Chinese free then
在拼音文字中的匈牙利语， 码词素， 为单词、 码词码是单词、 字母， 码词码用来输 入单词、 字母， 即匈牙利码词码， 其键盘国际通用标准盘， 码元为 26个英文字母。 码词 码按照单词个数分为三单词码词码， 二单词码词码， 四单词码词码， 一单词码词码. 多 单词码词码。 按照要输入单词个数分为： 单单词码， 多单词码单单词码， 一个码词输入 一个单词， 多单词码： 一个码词输入多个单词， 或几个码词输入多个单词。 按照单词在 码词中的位置， 顺序分为前组码， 中组码， 后组码， 前组码： 单词在前面的码词码。 中 组码： 单词在中间的码词码。 后组码， 单词在后面的码词码。 按照码词码是否简化和简 化的顺序,码词码可分为简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码， 后简码， 前后简码， 简码： 对全码进行简化的码词码， 前简码： 对前面的单词进行简化的简码， 后简码： 对后面的 单词进行简化的简码前后简码： 对前面， 后面的单词简化的简码。  In Hungarian in pinyin, code morphemes are words, and code words are words and letters. Code word codes are used to enter words and letters, that is, Hungarian code word codes. The keyboard has an international standard keyboard, and the number of code elements is 26. English alphabet. Code word code is divided into three word code word code, two word code word code, four word code word code, one word code word code. Multiple word code word code according to the number of words. According to the number of words to be input, it is divided into: single-word code, multiple-word code, single-word code, one codeword, one word, multi-word code: one codeword, multiple words, or several codewords, multiple words. According to the position of the word in the code word, it is divided into the first group code, the middle group code, the last group code, and the previous group code: the code of the code in front of the word. Medium group code: The code of the word in the middle. After the group code, the word is the code behind the code. According to whether the codeword code is simplified and simplified, the codeword code can be divided into short code and full code; short code is further divided into: front short code, post short code, front and back short codes, short code: simplified full code Code word code, before short code: simplified short code for the previous word, after short code: simplified short code for the subsequent word before and after short code: simplified short code for the previous and subsequent word.
全码： 没有简化的码词码。 三单词码词码： 单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词 码分为单三单词码， 多三单词码， 单三单词码， 一个三单词码词输入一个单词多三单词 码， 一个三单词码词输入多个单词， 或几个三单词码输入多个单词， 按照单词在码词中 的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码， 中组码， 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面三单词码词码； 按照简码所 简化的是全码的一部分按照前组码， 中组码， 后组码， 可组合出三种码。 匈牙利语； 字 母与键盘上各对应关系， 服从主流通用， 标准对应关系， 三单词码词码: a . 前组单词前简码 Full code: No simplified codeword code. Three-word code word code: Three-word code word code; three-word code word code is divided into single three-word code, multiple three-word code, single three-word code, one three-word code word enter one word more three words Code, a three-word code word to enter multiple words, or several three-word codes to enter multiple words, according to the position of the word in the code word, the order is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The first group code: the three-word code word with the word in front; the middle group code: the three-word code word with the word in the middle; the last group code: the three-word code word with the word in the middle; the full code simplified by the short code Part of the three codes can be combined according to the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code. Hungarian Correspondence between mother and keyboard, obey mainstream common, standard correspondence, three-word code word code: a
rubel nibel forint bank rfb  rubel nibel forint bank rfb
中文 卢布 卢布 福林 银行 Chinese Ruble Ruble Forint Bank
b. 中组单词前简码 b. Short code before middle group words
forint rub el forint bank rfb  forint rub el forint bank rfb
中文 福林 卢布 福林 银行 Chinese Forint Ruble Forint Bank
c 后组单词前简码 c short code before group words
bank rubel forint bank rfb  bank rubel forint bank rfb
中文 银行 卢布 福林 银行 Chinese Bank Ruble Forint Bank
二单词码词码： 单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入一个单词。 Two-word code word code: Two-word code word code; Single two-word code: One two-word code word Enter a word.
多二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词。 按照 单词码词中的位置， 顺序分为， 前组码， 后组码； 前组码： 单词在前面的二单词码词码， 后组码： 单词在后面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分。  Multiple two-word code: Enter multiple words for one two-word code word or multiple words for several two-word code words. According to the position in the word code word, the order is divided into: first group code, last group code; the first group code: the two word code in front of the word code, the second group code: the two word code in the back of the word; What the code simplifies is part of the full code.
按照前组码， 后组码， 可以组合出其中实用的八码：  According to the former group code and the latter group code, the practical eight codes can be combined:
a. 前组全码 a. Full group before
rabel rabel forint  rabel rabel forint
中文 卢布 卢布 福林 Chinese ruble ruble forint
b. 前组单词前简码 b. Short code before the previous group of words
rubel rubel forint rforint  rubel rubel forint rforint
中文 卢布 卢布 福林 Chinese ruble ruble forint
c 前组后简码 c short code before group
rabel rabel forint rubelf  rabel rabel forint rubelf
中文 卢布 卢布 福林 Chinese ruble ruble forint
d. 前组单词前后简码 d. Shortcodes before and after the previous group of words
rubel rabel forint rf  rubel rabel forint rf
中文 卢布 卢布 福林 Chinese ruble ruble forint
e. 后组全码 e. Back group full code
rubel rubel forint  rubel rubel forint
中文 卢布 卢布 福林 Chinese ruble ruble forint
f. 后组前简码 f. Short code before group
rubel rubel forint rforint  rubel rubel forint rforint
中文 卢布 卢布 福林 Chinese ruble ruble forint
g. 后组单词后简码 g. Short code after the group of words
rubel rubel forint rubelf  rubel rubel forint rubelf
中文 卢布 卢布 福林 Chinese ruble ruble forint
h. 后组前后简码 h. Short codes before and after the group
rabel rubel forint nf  rabel rubel forint nf
中文 卢布 卢布 福林 Chinese ruble ruble forint
加码： 附加字母与码词码全称加码 ooforint oo  Overweight: Add the full name of the additional letter and code word code.
a. 前加码： 字母在前通的加码。 中文 福林 forintoo rfoo a. Pre-code: The pre-code of the letter. Chinese forint forintoo rfoo
b. 后加码： 字母在后面的加码。 中文 福林 forintoo rfoo b. Post-code: The letter is followed by a code. Chinese forint forintoo rfoo
c. 前后加码： 字母在前前后的加码 ofoninto orfoi 中文 福林 c. Pre- and post-code: the pre- and post-code ofofoninto orfoi in Chinese Forint
ing加码； er加码； est加码； ly加码； ed加码； in加码 ing code; er code; est code; ly code; ed code; in code
四单词码词码， 字母码词码； 前组前简码 r rabel ru Four-word code word code, letter code word code; former short code r rabel ru
中文 卢布 Chinese ruble
r rubel forint rf  r rubel forint rf
中文 卢布 福林 Chinese Ruble Forint
在拼音文字中的俄语， 码词素， 为单词、 字母码词码是单词、 字母， 码词码用来输 入单词、 字母， 即俄码词码， 其盘用国际通用标准盘， 码元为 26个英文字母。 码词码按 照单词个数分为三单词码词码， 二单词码词码， 四单词码词码， 一单词码词码. 多单词 码词码。 按照要输入单词个数分为： 单单词码， 多单词码； 单单词码， 一个码词输入一 个单词； 多单词码： 一个码词输入多个单词， 或几个码词输入多个单词。 按照单词在码 词中的位置， 顺序分为前组码， 中组码， 后组码， 前组码： 单词在前面的码词码。 中组 码： 单词在中间的码词码。 后组码， 单词在后面的码词码。 按照码词码是否简化和简化 的顺序，码词码可分为简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码， 后简码， 前后简码， 简码： 对 全码进行简化的码词码， 前简码： 对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码： 对后面的单 词进行简化的简码前后简码： 对前面， 后面的单词简化的简码； 全码： 没有简化的码词 码。 三单词码词码： 单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码分为单三单词码， 多三单 词码， 单三单词码， 一个三单词码词输入一个单词； 多三单词码： 一个三单词码词输入 多个单词， 或几个三单词码输入多个单词， 按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组 码， 中组码， 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面的三单词码词码中组码： 单词在中间的三单 词码词码， 后组码： 单词在后三单词码词码， 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照 前组码， 中组码， 后组码， 可组合出三种码。 俄语， 三单词码词码：  In the Russian language of Pinyin, code morphemes are words and letters. Code words are words and letters. Code word codes are used to enter words and letters, that is, Russian code word codes. The disk uses the international standard disk. The code element is 26. English letters. Codeword code is divided into three-word codeword code, two-word codewordcode, four-word codewordcode, one-wordcodewordcode. Multi-wordcodewordcode according to the number of words. According to the number of words to be input, it is divided into: single-word code, multi-word code; single-word code, one codeword enters one word; multi-word code: one codeword enters multiple words, or several codewords enter multiple words. According to the position of the word in the code word, it is sequentially divided into the first group code, the middle group code, the last group code, and the previous group code: the word code in front of the word. Middle code: The code of the word in the middle. After the group code, the word is the code behind the code. According to whether the codeword code is simplified and simplified, the codeword code can be divided into short code and full code; the short code is further divided into: front short code, post short code, front and back short codes, short code: simplified full code Code word code, before short code: simplified short code of the previous word; after short code: simplified short code of the following word before and after short code: simplified short code of the previous and subsequent word; full code: no Simplified code word code. Three-word code word code: Three-word code word code; three-word code word code is divided into single three-word code, multiple three-word code, single three-word code, one three-word code word enter one word; multiple three Word code: Enter multiple words for a three-word code word, or multiple words for several three-word codes. According to the position of the word in the code word, it is divided into: first group code, middle group code, and last group code. The first group code: the word in the first three-word code, the group code: the word in the middle three-word code, the last group code: the word in the last three-word code, the full code is simplified according to the short code In one part, three codes can be combined according to the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. Russian, three-word code
a. 前组单词前简码 a. Short code before the previous group of words
caM caM l ak cHoM ckc caM caM l ak cHoM ckc
自己 自己 像 梦 I am like a dream
b.中组单词前简码 b. Short code before middle group words
kak caM kale cHoM ckc  kak caM kale cHoM ckc
像 自己 像 梦  Like myself like dream
c.后组单词前简码 c. Short code before the next group of words
cHoM caM kak cHoM ckc cHoM caM kak cHoM ckc
梦 自己 像 梦 Dream myself like a dream
二单词码词码： 单词个数为 2个的码词码， 单二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入一个单词 多二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入多个单词， 或几个二单词码词输入多个单词 Two-word code word code: two-word code word code, single two-word code: one two-word code word enter one word more two-word code: one two-word code word enter multiple words, or several two words Enter multiple words by code word
按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码， 后组码； 前组码： 单词在前面的二 单词码词码， 后组码： 单词在后面的二单词码词码， 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码， 后组码， 其中实用的八种码； 二单词码词码：  According to the position of the word in the code word, the order is divided into: the first group code, the last group code; the first group code: the two word code in front of the word, the last group code: the two word code in the back, according to The simplified code is a part of the full code. According to the former group code and the latter group code, there are eight practical codes; the two-word code:
a. 前组全码 a. Full group before
caM caM kak  caM caM kak
中文 自己 自己 像 Chinese own like
b. 前组单词前简码 b. Short code before the previous group of words
caM caM kak ckak  caM caM kak ckak
中文 自己 自己 像 Chinese own like
c 前组后简码 c short code before group
caM caM kak camk  caM caM kak camk
中文 自己 自己 像 Chinese own like
d. 前组单词前后简码 d. Shortcodes before and after the previous group of words
caM caM kak ck 中文 自己 自己 caM caM kak ck Chinese own
e. 后组全码 e. Back group full code
caM caM l ak  caM caM l ak
中文 自己 自己 Chinese myself
f. 后组前简码 f. Short code before group
g- caM caM kak ckak g- caM caM kak ckak
中文 自己 自己 Chinese myself
h. 后组单词后简码 h. Short code after the last group of words
caM caM kal camk  caM caM kal camk
中文 自己 自己 Chinese myself
i. 后组前后简码 i. Short codes before and after the group
caM caM kak ck  caM caM kak ck
中文 自己 自己 Chinese myself
加码： 附加字母与码词码合称加码 okak ock 中文： 像 Overweight: the additional letters and codewords are collectively called overweight okak ock Chinese: like
a.前加码： 字母在前面的加码 中文 像 kako cko a. plus code: plus code in front of Chinese like kako cko
b.后加码： 字母在后加码 中文 像 okako ocko b. Post-code: Letters post-code Chinese like okako ocko
c.前后加码： 字母在前后的加码 中文 像 c. before and after the code: the letter before and after the code
ing加码; er加码; est加码; ly加码; ed加码; in加码;四单词码词码;前组前简码；字母码词码. 前组前简码 ing plus code; er plus code; est plus code; ly plus code; ed plus code; in plus code; four-word code word code; previous group short code; letter code word code.
k caM kak ck  k caM kak ck
中文 自己 像 Chinese self like
k caM ca  k caM ca
中文 自己 Chinese myself
拼音文字中法语， 码词素为单词， 字母、 码词码是单词、 字母码词码可以用来输入 单词字母， 即法语码词码， 其键盘用国际通用标准键盘： 码元为 26英文字母。字母是本 国语字母， 或本国语字母对应的拉丁字母， 码词码按照单词个数分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 多单词码词码、 一单词码词码； 按照要输入单词个数分 为： 单单词码、 多单单词码； 单单词码： 一个码词输入一个单词。 多单词码： 一个码词 输入多个单词， 或几个码词输入多个单词。  In Pinyin text, French morphemes are words, letters and codewords are words, and lettercode wordcodes can be used to enter word letters, that is, French codeword codes. The keyboard uses the international standard keyboard: the code element is 26 English letters. The alphabet is the native alphabet, or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet. The codeword code is divided according to the number of words: three-word codeword code, two-word codeword code, four-word codeword code, multi-word codeword code, one Word code word code; According to the number of words to be entered, it is divided into: single word code, multiple single word codes; single word code: Enter one word per code word. Multi-word code: Enter multiple words for one code word, or enter multiple words for several code words.
按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码 ， 前组码： 单词在 前面的码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的码词码。  According to the position of the word in the code word, the order is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, the last group code, the front group code: the code word code in front of the word; the middle code code: the code word code in the middle of the word; Group code: The word code behind the word.
按照码词码是否简化和简化的顺序,码词码可分为简码和全码；简码又分为：前组码、 后组码、 前后简码。 简码： 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码： 对前面的单词进行简化 的简码； 后简码： 对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码： 对前面、 后面的单词简化 的简码； 全码： 没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码分为单三单词码、 多三单词码。 单三 单词词码： 一个三单词码词输入一个单词； 多三单词码： 一个三单词码词输入多个单词， 或几个三单词码输入多个单词。 按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的三单词码词码。 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分按照前组码、 中组码、 后组码可组合出三种码- 法语： a.前组单词前简码 envoyer envoyer lettre attendre ela  According to whether the codeword code is simplified and simplified, the codeword code can be divided into short code and full code; short code is further divided into: front group code, rear group code, front and back short codes. Shortcode: Simplified codeword code for the full code; Pre-shortcode: Simplified shortcode for the previous word; Post-shortcode: Simplified shortcode for the subsequent words; Pre- and post-code: For the front and back Shortcodes for simplified words; Full code: No simplified codewords; Three-word codes are divided into single-three-word codes and multiple-three-word codes. Single three-word code: Enter one word for a three-word code; Multiple three-word code: Enter multiple words for a three-word code word, or enter multiple words for several three-word codes. According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The first group code: the three-word code word with the word in the front; the middle group code: the three-word code word with the word in the middle; the last group code: the three-word code with the word after. Simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code. Three codes can be combined according to the previous group code, the middle group code, and the last group code.-French: a. Short words before the previous group envoyer envoyer lettre attendre ela
中文： 寄 寄 信 等  Chinese: Sending letters, etc.
b.中组单词前简码 lettre envoyer lettre attendre ela 中文： 信 寄 信 等 c.后组单词前简码 attendre envoyer lettre attendre ela b. short code before the middle group of words lettre envoyer lettre attendre ela Chinese: Letters, letters, etc. c. Short words before group words attendre envoyer lettre attendre ela
中文： 等 寄 信 等 二单词码词码： 单词个数为 2个的码词码。 单二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入一个 单词。  Chinese: E-mail, etc. Two-word Code Word Code: Code word code with 2 words. Single two-word code: Enter a word for a two-word code word.
多二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入多个单词， 或几个二单词码词输入多个单词。  Multiple two-word code: Enter multiple words for one two-word code word, or enter multiple words for several two-word code words.
按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面 的二单词码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的二单词码词码； 按照前组码、 后组码， 可 以组合出其中实用的八种码： 二单词码词码： a.前组全码 envoyer envoyer lettre  According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code and the last group code. The first group code: the two-word code word in front of the word; the second group code: the two-word code word in the back; according to the first group code and the last group code, eight practical codes can be combined: two-word code Word code: a. Full code before the group envoyer envoyer lettre
中文： 寄 寄 信  Chinese: Send mail
b.前组单词前简码 envoyer envoyer lettre elettre  b. Short code before the previous group of words envoyer envoyer lettre elettre
中文： 寄 寄 信  Chinese: Send mail
c.前组后简码 envoyer envoyer letter envoyerl 中;^ 寄 寄 信  c. short code before group envoyer envoyer letter envoyerl; ^ mail
d.前组单词前后简码 envoyer envoyer letter el  d. Short code before and after the previous group of words envoyer envoyer letter el
中文： 寄 寄 信  Chinese: Send mail
e.后组码全码 letter envoyer letter  e. Full group letter envoyer letter
中文： 信 寄 信  Chinese: letter post
f.后组前简码 lettre envoyer letter elettre  f. short code before group lettre envoyer letter elettre
中文： 信 寄 信  Chinese: letter post
g.后组单词后简码 letter envoyer letter envoyerl  g. After the group of words short code letter envoyer letter envoyerl
' 中文： 信 寄 信  'Chinese: Letter
h.后组前后简码 lettre envoyer lettre el  h. Short codes before and after the group lettre envoyer lettre el
中文： 信 寄 信  Chinese: letter post
加码： 附加字母与码词码合称加码； a.前加码： 字母在前面的加码 oolettre ooel中文：信 b.后加码： 字母在后面的加码 lettreoo eloo 中 文：信 c.前后加 码： 字母在前后的加码  Code: Additional letters and codeword codes are collectively called plus code; a. Pre-code: letter plus oolettre ooel in front of Chinese: letter b. Post code: letter plus lettreoo eloo in Chinese: letter c. Overweight
olettreo oelo中文： 信 olettreo oelo Chinese: letter
ing加码； er加码； est加码； ly加码； ed加码; in加码 ing code; er code; est code; ly code; ed code; in code
四单词码词码 前组前简码 ■ 字母码词码 前组前简码 Four-word code word code Short code before group ■ Letter code word code Short code before group
e envoyer en 中文： 寄 e envoyer lettre el 中文- 寄 信 在拼音文字中意大利语， 码词素为单词、 字母、 码词码是单词、 字母、 码词码 可以用来输入单词、 字母， 即意大利语码词码， 其键盘用国际通用标准键盘： 码元 为 26个英文字母。 字母是本国语字母， 或本国语字母对应的拉丁字母。 码词码按 照单词个数分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 多单词码词码、 一单词码词码。 按照要输入单词个数分为： 单单词码： 一个码词输入一个单词； 多 单词码： 一个码词输入多个单词， 或几个码词输入多个单词。 按照单词在码词中的 位置， 顺序分为； 前组码、 中组码、 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面的码词码； 中组 码： 单词在中间的码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的码词码。 按照码词码是否简化和 简化的顺序和不简化， 可分为简码和全码。 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码、 前后简 码。 简码： 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码： 对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后 简码： 对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码： 对前面、后面的单词简化的简码； 全码： 没有简化的码词码。 三单词码词码： 单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词 码分为： 单三单词码、 多三单词码。 单三单词码： 一个三单词码词输入一个单词； 多三单词码： 一个三单词码词输入多个单词， 或几个三单词码输入多个单词。 按照 单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面 的三单词码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的三 单词码词码。 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分。 按照前组码、 中组码、 后组码。 可组合出三种码： 意大利语： 三单词码词码 e envoyer en Chinese: 送 e envoyer lettre el Chinese-Send a letter in Pinyin, Italian, codewords are words, letters, codeword codes are words, letters, codeword codes can be used to enter words, letters, that is, Italian Code word code, the keyboard uses the international standard keyboard: the code element is 26 English letters. The alphabet is the native alphabet, or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet. Code word codes are divided into three word code words: two word code words, two word code words, four word code words, multi word code words, and one word code words. According to the number of words to be entered, it is divided into: single-word code: one codeword enters one word; multi-word code: one codeword enters multiple words, or several codewords enter multiple words. According to the position of the word in the code word, it is divided into order; the former group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The first group code: the code word code in front of the word; the middle group code: the code word code in the middle of the word; the last group code: the code word code in the back of the word. It can be divided into short code and full code according to whether the code word code is simplified and simplified. Shortcodes are divided into: shortcodes before, shortcodes, shortcodes before and after. Shortcode: Simplified codeword code for the full code; Pre-shortcode: Simplified shortcode for the previous word; Post-shortcode: Simplified shortcode for the following words; Pre- and short-code: For the front and back Simplified shortcode for words; Full code: No simplified codeword code. Three-word code words: Three-word code words; Three-word code words The codes are divided into single three-word codes and multiple three-word codes. Single three-word code: Enter one word for a three-word code word; Multiple three-word code: Enter multiple words for a three-word code word, or enter multiple words for several three-word codes. According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The first group code: the three-word code word with the word in the front; the middle group code: the three-word code word with the word in the middle; the last group code: the three-word code with the word after. Simplified according to the short code is part of the full code. According to the first group code, middle group code, and last group code. Three codes can be combined: Italian: three-word code
a.前组单词前简码 singore singore piacere vedere spv  a. Short code before the group of words singore singore piacere vedere spv
中文： 先生 先生 看见  Chinese: sir sir
b.中组单词前简码 piacere singore piacere vedere spv  b. Short code before middle group words piacere singore piacere vedere spv
中文： 先生 先生 高兴 看见  Chinese: sir sir glad to see
c.后组单词前简码 vedere smgore piacere vedere spv  c. Short code before group words vedere smgore piacere vedere spv
中文： 看见 先生 ^ 看见  English: see sir ^ see
二单词码词码： 单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码词， 一个二单词码输入一个单 词； 多二单词： 一个二单词码词输入多个单词， 或几个二单词码词输入多个单词。 按 照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面的二单词 码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分。 按照前组码、后组码，可以组合出其中实用的八种码： a.前组全码 singore singore piacere 中文： 先生 先生 高兴  Two-word code word code: two-word code word code; single two-word code word, one two-word code enter one word; multiple two-word: one two-word code word enter multiple words, or several two words Enter multiple words for a codeword. According to the position of the word in the code word, the order is divided into: the first group code and the last group code. The first group code: two words in front of the word code word code; the second group code: two words in front of the word code word code; simplified according to the short code is part of the full code. According to the front group code and the back group code, eight practical codes can be combined: a. Full group code singore singore piacere Chinese: Mr. Mr. Happy
b.前组单词前简码 singore songore piacere spiacere  b. Short code of the previous group of words singore songore piacere spiacere
中文： 先生 先生 间八  Chinese: sir sir
c.前组前后简码 singore singore piacere singorep  c. before and after the short code singore singore piacere singorep
中文： 先生 先生  Chinese: sir
d.前组单词 f后简码 singore singore piacere sp  d. the first group of words f after the short code singore singore piacere sp
中文： 先生 先生 同八  Chinese: Mr. Mr. Tongba
e.后组全码 piacere singore piacere  e. Rear group full size piacere singore piacere
中文： 高兴 先生 向六  Chinese: Happy Mr. Xiang Liu
f.后组前简码 piacere singore piacere spiacere  f. Short code before group piacere singore piacere spiacere
中文： 高兴 先生 高兴  Chinese: Mr. Happy
g.后组单词后简码 piacere singore piacere singorep  g. short code after group words piacere singore piacere singorep
中文： 高兴 先生 问八  Chinese: Happy Mr. Ask Eight
h.后组前后简码 piacere singore piacere sp  h. Short code before and after the group piacere singore piacere sp
中文： 高兴 先生 同八  Chinese: Happy Mr. Tongba
加码：附加字母与码词码合称加码； a.前组码：字母在前面的加码 oopiacere oosp 中文： 高兴 b.后加码： 字母在后面的加码 piacereoo s oo 中文： 高兴 c.前后加码： 字母在前后的加码 opiacereo ospo 中文： 高兴  Plus code: additional letters and codeword codes are collectively called plus code; a. Front group code: letter plus code in front oopiacere oosp Chinese: happy b. Later plus code: letter plus code in the back piacereoo s oo Chinese: happy c. Plus code before and after: letter Oversize before and after opiacereo ospo Chinese: happy
ing加码； er加码； est加码； ly加码； ed加码； in加码  ing code; er code; est code; ly code; ed code; in code
四单词码词码 前组前简码 字母码词码 前组前简码 Four-Word Code Word Code Before Group Short Code Alphabet Code Word Code Before Group Short Code
s singore si 中文： 先生 s singore piacere sp 中文： 先生 高兴 s singore si Chinese: Mr. s singore piacere sp Chinese: Mr. Happy
拼言文字中豪萨语， 码词素为单词、 字母、 码词码是单词、 字母码词码可以用来输 入单词、 字母， 即豪萨语码词码， 其键盘用国际通用标准键盘： 码元为 26个英文字母。 字母是本国语字母， 或本国语字母对应的拉丁字母。 码词码按照单词个数分为： 三单词 码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 多单词码词码、 一单词码词码。 按照要输入单 词个数分为： 单单词码、 多单词码。 单单词码： 一个码词输入一个单词； 多单词码： 一 个码词输入多个单词， 或几个码词输入多个单词。按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面的码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的码词 码； 后组码： 单词在后面的码词码。按照码词码是否简化和简化的顺序，码词码可分为简 码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码、 前后简码。 简码： 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码： 对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码： 对后面的单词简化的简码； 前后简码： 对前面、 后面的单词简化的简码； 全码： 没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码： 单词个数 为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码分为单三单词码、 多三单词码。 单三单 词码： 一个三 单词码词输入一个单词； 多三单词码： 一个三单词码词输入 多个单词， 或几个三单 词码输入多个单词。 按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的三单词码词码。按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分。按照前组码、 中组码、 后组码可组合出三种码： 豪萨语 （字母与键盘上各键对应关系， 服从主流通用， 标准对 应关系） In the Hausa language of the spelling text, the code morpheme is a word, a letter, and the code word code is a word. The letter code word code can be used to enter words and letters, that is, the Hausa code word code. Its keyboard uses the international standard keyboard: Code Yuan is 26 English letters. The alphabet is the native alphabet, or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet. Code word codes are divided into three word code words: two word code words, two word code words, four word code words, multi word code words, and one word code words. According to the number of words to be input, it is divided into: single word code, multi-word code. Single-word code: Enter one word for one codeword; Multi-word code: Enter multiple words for one codeword, or enter multiple words for several codewords. According to the position of the word in the codeword, the order is divided into: First group code, middle group code, and last group code. The first group code: the code word code in front of the word; the middle group code: the code word code in the middle of the word; the last group code: the code word code in the back of the word. According to whether the codeword code is simplified and simplified, the codeword code can be divided into short code and full code; short code is further divided into: front short code, post short code, front and back short codes. Shortcode: Simplified codeword code for the full code; Pre-shortcode: Simplified shortcode for the previous word; Post-shortcode: Simplified shortcode for the following words; Pre- and post-code: For the previous and following words Simplified short code; full code: no simplified code word code; three-word code word code: three-word code word code; three-word code word code is divided into single three-word code, multiple three-word code. Single three-word code: Enter one word for a three-word code word; Multiple three-word code: Enter multiple words for a three-word code word, or enter multiple words for several three-word codes. According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The first group code: the three-word code word with the word in the front; the middle group code: the three-word code word with the word in the middle; the last group code: the three-word code with the word after. Simplified according to the short code is part of the full code. Three types of codes can be combined according to the front group code, middle group code, and rear group code: Hausa (correspondence between letters and keys on the keyboard, subject to the mainstream and standard correspondence)
a.前组单词前简码 kore kore rawaya algashi kra a. Short code before the group of words kore kore rawaya algashi kra
中文： 绿色 绿色 黄色 紫色  Chinese: Green Green Yellow Purple
b.中组单词前简码 rawaya kore rawaya algashi kra b. Short code before middle group words rawaya kore rawaya algashi kra
中文： 黄色 绿色 黄色 紫色  Chinese: Yellow Green Yellow Purple
c.后组单词前简码 algashi kore rawaya algashi kra c. Short code before group words algashi kore rawaya algashi kra
中文： 紫色 绿色 黄色 紫色  Chinese: Purple Green Yellow Purple
二单词码词码： 单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码： 一个单词码词输入一个单词； 多二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入多个单词， 或几个二单词码词输入多个单词。 按照单 词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的二单词码词码。按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分。 按照前组码、 后组码， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码： 二单词码词码 Two-word code word code: two-word code word code; single two-word code: one word code word to enter a word; multiple two-word code: one two-word code word to enter multiple words, or several two words Enter multiple words for a codeword. According to the position of the word in the code word, the order is divided into: the first group code and the last group code. The first group code: the two-word code word code in front of the word; the second group code: the two-word code word code in the back Simplified according to the short code is part of the full code. According to the first group code and the last group code, eight practical codes can be combined: two-word code word code
a.前组全码 kore kore rawaya 中文： 绿色 绿色 黄色 a. Full size of the front group kore kore rawaya Chinese: Green Green Yellow
b.前组单词前简码 kore kore rawaya krawaya 中文： 绿色 绿色 黄色 c.前组后简码 kore kore rawaya korer 文： 绿色 绿色 黄色 d.前组单词前后简码 kore kore wawaya kr 中文； 绿色 绿色 黄色 e.后组全码 rawaya kore rawaya 中文： 黄色 绿色 黄色 b. pre-group short code kore kore rawaya krawaya Chinese: green green yellow c. pre-group short code kore kore rawaya korer text: green green yellow d. pre-group short code before and after kore kore wawaya kr Chinese; green green yellow e. Rear group full code rawaya kore rawaya Chinese: yellow green yellow
f.后组前简码 rawaya kore rawaya krawaya中文： 黄色 绿色 黄色 g.后组单词后简码 rawaya kore rawaya korer 中文： 黄色 绿色 黄色 h.后组前后简码 rawaya kore rawaya kr 中文： 黄色 绿色 黄色 加码: 附加字母与码词码合称加码； 前加码： a.字母在前面的加码 oorawaya ool r 中文：黄色 b.后加码：字母在后面的加码 rawayaoo kroo 中文：黄色 c.前后加码： 字母在前后的加码 orawayao okro 中文： 黄色 f. The short code of the last group of rawaya kore rawaya krawaya Chinese: yellow green yellow g. The short code of the last group of words rawaya kore rawaya korer Chinese: yellow green yellow h. The short code of the rear group before and after rawaya kore rawaya kr Chinese: yellow green yellow plus code : Additional letters and codewords are collectively called plus code; front plus code: a. Letter plus code in front oorawaya ool r Chinese: yellow b. Post plus code: letter plus code in the back rawayaoo kroo Chinese: yellow c. Plus code before and after: letter before and after Oversize orawayao okro Chinese: yellow
ing加码； er加码； est加码； ly加码； ed加码； in加码 ing code; er code; est code; ly code; ed code; in code
四单词码词码； 前组前简码； 字母码词码； 前组前简码 Four-word code word code; Short code before group; Letter code word before group; Short code before group
k kore ko 中文： 绿色 k kore rawaya l r 中文： 绿色 k kore ko in Chinese: green k kore rawaya l r in Chinese: green
15根据 1、 5所述的语言码， 其特征是拼音文字中马来西亚语， 码词素为单词、字母、码 词码是单词、 字母， 即马来西亚语码词码， 其键盘用国际通用标准键盘： 码元为 26个英 文字母。字母是本国语字母， 或本国语字母对应的拉丁字母。码词码按照单词个数分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 多单词码词码、 一单词码词码。 按照要 输入单词个数分为： 单单词码、 多单词码。 单单词码： 一个码词输入一个单词； 多单词 码： 一个码词输入多个单词， 或几个码词输入多个单词。 按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺 序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面的码词码； 中组码： 单词在中 间的码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的码词码。 按照码词码是否简化和简化的顺序和不简 化， 可分为简码和全码。 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码、 前后简码。 简码： 对全码进行 简化的码词码； 前简码： 对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码： 对后面的单词进行简 化的简码； 前后简码： 对前面、 后面的单词简化的简码； 全码: 没有简化的码词码。三 单词码词码： 单词个数为三个的码词码； 单三单词码： 一个三单词码词输入一个单词； 多三单词码： 一个三单词码词输入多个单词， 或几个三单词码输入多个单词。 按照单词 在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面的三单词 码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的三单词码词码。 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分。 按照前组码、 中组码、 后组码可组合出三种码： 马 来西亚语（字母与键盘上各键对应关系， 服从主流通用， 标准对应关系） 。 三单词码词 码 15 The language code according to 1, 5 is characterized by the Malay language in Pinyin, the code morphemes are words, letters, and code words are words and letters, that is, the Malaysian code word codes, and the keyboard is an international standard keyboard: The symbol is 26 English letters. The alphabet is the native alphabet, or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet. Code word codes are divided into three word code words: two word code words, two word code words, four word code words, multi word code words, and one word code words. According to the number of words to be input, it is divided into: single word code, multi-word code. Single-word code: Enter one word for one codeword; Multi-word code: Enter multiple words for one codeword, or enter multiple words for several codewords. According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. Before the group code: the code in front of the word; in the group code: the word in the front Between the codeword code; After the group code: The codeword code of the word at the back. It can be divided into short code and full code according to whether the code word code is simplified and simplified. Shortcodes are divided into: shortcodes before, shortcodes, shortcodes before and after. Shortcode: Simplified codeword code for the full code; Pre-shortcode: Simplified shortcode for the previous word; Post-shortcode: Simplified shortcode for the subsequent words; Pre- and post-code: For the front and back Simplified shortcodes for words; Full code: No simplified codewords. Three-word code words: Three-word code words; single three-word codes: one three-word code words enter one word; multiple three-word codes: one three-word code words enter multiple words, or several three-word codes Enter multiple words for the word code. According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The first group code: the three-word code word with the word in the front; the middle group code: the three-word code word with the word in the middle; the last group code: the three-word code with the word after. Simplified according to the short code is part of the full code. Three types of codes can be combined according to the front group code, middle group code, and rear group code: Malaysian (the correspondence between letters and keys on the keyboard, obeys the mainstream and standard correspondence). Three-word code
a.前组单词前简码 tekak tekak demam muak tdm a. Short code before the previous group of words tekak tekak demam muak tdm
中文- 喉咙 喉昽 发烧 恶心  Chinese-Throat Throat Fever Nausea
b.中组单词前简码 demam tekak demam muak tdm b. Short code before the middle group word demam tekak demam muak tdm
中文: 发烧 喉昽 发烧 恶心  英文: fever throat throat fever nausea
C.后组单词前简码 muak tekak demam muak tdm  C. Short code before group words muak tekak demam muak tdm
中文- 恶心 喉咙 发烧 恶心  Chinese-Nausea Throat Fever Nausea
二单词码词码： 单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码： 一个单词码词输入一个单词； 多二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入多个单词， 或几个二单词码词输入多个单词。 按照单 词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的二单词码词码。按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分。按照前组码、 后组码， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码： 二单词码词码 Two-word code word code: two-word code word code; single two-word code: one word code word to enter a word; multiple two-word code: one two-word code word to enter multiple words, or several two words Enter multiple words for a codeword. According to the position of the word in the code word, the order is divided into: the first group code and the last group code. The first group code: the two-word code word code in front of the word; the second group code: the two-word code word code in the back Simplified according to the short code is part of the full code. According to the first group code and the last group code, eight practical codes can be combined: two-word code word code
a.前组全码 tekak tekak demam 中文： 喉咙 喉咙 发烧  a. Full size front group tekak tekak demam Chinese: Throat Throat Fever
b.前组单词前简码 tekak tekak demam tderaam 中文： 喉咙 喉咙 发 烧  b. Front group of short words before the word tekak tekak demam tderaam Chinese: Throat Throat Fever
c.前组后简码 tekak tekak demam tekakd 中文： 喉咙 喉咙 发 烧  c. Short code before and after group tekak tekak demam tekakd Chinese: Throat Throat Fever
d.前组单词前后简码 tekak tekak demam td 中文： 喉咙 喉咙 发 烧  d. Short code before and after the word tekak tekak demam td Chinese: Throat Throat Fever
e.后组全码 demam tekak demam 中文： 发烧 喉咙 发烧 f.后组前简码 demam tekak demam tdemam 中文： 发烧 喉咙 发烧 g.后组单词后简码 demam tekak demam tekakd 中文： 发烧 喉咙 发烧  e. Full code of back group demam tekak demam Chinese: fever throat fever f. Short code of back group demam tekak demam tdemam Chinese: fever throat fever g. Short code of back group words demam tekak demam tekakd Chinese: fever throat fever
h.后组前后简码 demam tekak demam td 中文： 发烧 喉咙 发烧 加码： 附加字母与码词码合称加码； a.前加码： 字母在前面的加码 oodemam ootd 中文：  h. Short code before and after the group demam tekak demam td Chinese: Fever Throat Fever Overweight: Additional letters and codewords are collectively called overweight; a. Before overweight: Letters are oversized in front oodemam ootd Chinese:
发烧 b.后加码： 字母在后面的加码 demamoo tdoo 中文： 发烧 Fever b. Overweight: letter overweight demamoo tdoo Chinese: fever
前后加码： 字母在前后的加码 odemamo otdo 中文： 发烧 字母码词码； 前组 前简码  Pre- and post-code: Letters pre- and post-code odemamo otdo Chinese: Fever Letter-code word code; Front group Pre-code
t tekak te 中文： 喉咙 t tekak demam td 中文： 喉咙 发烧 t tekak te chinese: throat t tekak demam td chinese: throat fever
在拼音文字中塞尔维亚-克罗地亚语码词素为单词、 字母、 码词码是单词、 字母， 即 塞尔维亚-克罗地亚语码词码， 其键盘用国际通用标准键盘： 码元为 26个英文字母。 字 母是本国语字母， 或本国语字母对应的拉丁字母。 码词码按照单词个数分为： 三单词码 词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 多单词码词码、 一单词码词码。 按照要输入单词 个数分为： 单单词码、 多单词码。 单单词码： 一个码词输入一个单词； 多单词码： 一个 码词输入多个单词， 或几个码词输入多个单词。 按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面的码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的码词 码； 后组码： 单词在后面的码词码。 按照码词码是否简化和简化的顺序，码词码可分为简 码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码、 前后简码。 简码： 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码： 对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码： 对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后 简码： 对前面、 后面的单词简化的简码； 全码： 没有简化的码词码。 三单词码词码： 单 词个数为三个的码词码； 单三单词码： 一个三单词码词输入一个单词； 多三单词码： 一 个三单词码词输入多个单词， 或几个三单词码输入多个单词。按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的三单词码词码。 按照简码所简化的 是全码的一部分。 按照前组码、 中组码、 后组码可组合出三种码： 塞尔维加 -克罗地亚语 (字母与键盘上各键对应关系， 服从主流通用， 标准对应关系） 。 In the Pinyin text, the Serbian-Croatian code morphemes are words, letters, and codeword codes are words and letters, that is, the Serbian-Croatian code wordcode, and its keyboard uses the international standard keyboard: the code element is 26 English letters. The alphabet is the native alphabet, or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet. Code word codes are divided into three word code words: two word code words, two word code words, four word code words, multi word code words, and one word code words. According to the number of words to be input, it is divided into: single word code, multi-word code. Single-word code: Enter one word per code word; Multi-word code: one Enter multiple words for a codeword, or enter multiple words for several codewords. According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The first group code: the code word code in front of the word; the middle group code: the code word code in the middle of the word; the last group code: the code word code in the back of the word. According to whether the codeword code is simplified and simplified, the codeword code can be divided into short code and full code; short code is further divided into: front short code, post short code, front and back short codes. Shortcode: Simplified codeword code for the full code; Pre-shortcode: Simplified shortcode for the previous word; Post-shortcode: Simplified shortcode for the subsequent words; Pre- and post-code: For the front and back Simplified shortcode for words; Full code: No simplified codeword code. Three-word code words: Three-word code words; single three-word codes: one three-word code words enter one word; multiple three-word codes: one three-word code words enter multiple words, or several three-word codes Enter multiple words for the word code. According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The first group code: the three-word code word with the word in the front; the middle group code: the three-word code word with the word in the middle; the last group code: the three-word code with the word after. Simplified according to the short code is part of the full code. Three codes can be combined according to the front group code, the middle group code, and the back group code: Servega-Croatian (correspondence between letters and keys on the keyboard, obeying the mainstream and standard correspondence).
三单词码词码  Three-word code
a.前组单词前简码 draz draz donde slutnja dds 中文： 诱惑 诱惑 到那里 预料 b.中组单词前简码 donde draz donde slutnja dds 中文： 到那里 诱惑 到那里 预料 a. Pre-code of the previous group of words draz draz donde slutnja dds Chinese: temptation temptation to get there Anticipate b. Pre-code of the middle group of words donde draz donde slutnja dds Chinese: Get there tempt to expect
c.后组单词前简码 slutnja draz donde slutnja dds 中文： 预料 诱惑 到那里 预 料 c. Short code before the next group of words slutnja draz donde slutnja dds Chinese: Anticipate the temptation to get there Anticipate
二单词码词码： 单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码： 一个单词码词输入一个单 词； 多二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入多个单词， 或几个二单词码词输入多个单词。 按 照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面的二单词码 词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的二单词码词码。 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分。 按照 前组码、 后组码， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码：  Two-word code word code: two-word code word code; single two-word code: one word code word to enter a word; multiple two-word code: one two-word code word to enter multiple words, or several two words Enter multiple words for a codeword. According to the position of the word in the code word, the order is divided into: the first group code and the last group code. The first group code: the two-word code in front of the word; the second group code: the two-word code in front of the word. Simplified according to the short code is part of the full code. According to the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined:
二单词码词码  Two-word code
a.前组全码 tema tema stil 中文： 题目 题日 风格 a. Full size of the front group tema tema stil Chinese: title question day style
b.前组单词前简码 tema tema stil tstil 中文： 题目 题日 风格 b. Short code of the previous group of words tema tema stil tstil Chinese: title question day style
c.前组后简码 tema tema stil temas 中文： 题目 题日 风格 c. Short code before and after group tema tema stil temas Chinese: title question day style
d.前组单词前后简码 tema tema stil ts 中文： 题目 题日 风格 d. Shortcodes before and after the previous group of words tema tema stil ts Chinese: title question day style
e.后组全码 stil tema stil 中文： 风格 题目 风格 e. Full size of the back group stil tema stil Chinese: style title style
£后组前简码 stil tema stil tstil 中文： 风格 题目 风格  £ after the group short code stil tema stil tstil Chinese: style title style
g.后组单词后简码 stil tema stil temas 中文： 风格 题目 风格 g. After group of words short code stil tema stil temas Chinese: style title style
h.后组前后简码 stil tema stil ts 中文： 风格 题目 风格 h. Short codes before and after the group stil tema stil ts Chinese: Style Title Style
加码： 附加字母与码词码合称加码； a.前加码： 字母在前面的加码 oostil oots中文： 风 格 b.后加码： 字母在后面的加码 stiloo tsoo 中文： 风格 c.前后加码： 字母在前面、 后 面的加码 oostiloo ootsoo 中文： 风格 Plus code: The additional letters and codeword code are collectively called plus code; a. Front plus code: Letter plus oostil oots in front Chinese: Style b. Rear plus code: Letter plus stiloo tsoo behind Chinese: Style c. Plus code before and after: Letter in front , Behind the plus oostiloo ootsoo Chinese: style
ing加码； er加码； est加码； ly加码； ed加码； in前码 ing code; er code; est code; ly code; ed code; in front code
四单词码词码； 前组前简码； 字母码词码； 前组前简码 Four-word code word code; Short code before group; Letter code word before group; Short code before group
t tema stil ts 中文： 题目 风格 t tema te 中文： 题目 风格 t tema stil ts Chinese: topic style t tema te Chinese: topic style
在拼音文字中越南语， 码词素为单词、 字母、 码词码是单词、 字母， 即越南语码词 码， 其键盘用国际通用标准键盘： 码元为 26个英文字母。 字母是本国语字母， 或本国语 字母对应的拉丁字母。 码词码按照单词个数分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单 词码词码、 多单词码词码、 一单词码词码。 按照要输入单词个数分为： 单单词码、 多单 词码。 单单词码： 一个码词输入一个单词； 多单词码： 一个码词输入多个单词， 或几个 码词输入多个单词。 按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面的码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的 码词码。按照码词码是否简化和简化的顺序和不简化， 可分为简码和全码。 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码、 前后简码。 简码： 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码： 对前面的单词 进行简化的简码； 后简码： 对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码： 对前面、 后面的 单词简化的简码； 全码： 没有简化的码词码。三单词码词码： 单词个数为三个的码词码； 单三单词码： 一个三单词码词输入一个单词； 多三单词码： 一个三单词码词输入多个单 词， 或几个三单词码输入多个单词。 按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中 组码、 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的三单词码 词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的三单词码词码。 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分。 按照 前组码、 中组码、 后组码可组合出三种码： In Pinyin text, the code morphemes are words, letters, and code words are words and letters, that is, the Vietnamese code word codes. The keyboard uses the international standard keyboard: the code element is 26 English letters. The alphabet is the native alphabet, or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet. Code word codes are divided into three word code words: two word code words, two word code words, four word code words, multi word code words, and one word code words. According to the number of words to be input, it is divided into: single word code, multi-word code. Single-word code: Enter one word for one codeword; Multi-word code: Enter multiple words for one codeword, or enter multiple words for several codewords. According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The first group code: the code word code in front of the word; the middle group code: the code word code in the middle of the word; the last group code: the code word code in the back of the word. It can be divided into short code and full code according to whether the code word code is simplified and simplified. Shortcodes are divided into: shortcodes before, shortcodes, shortcodes before and after. Shortcode: Simplified codeword code for the full code; Pre-shortcode: Simplified shortcode for the previous word; Post-shortcode: Simplified shortcode for the subsequent words; Pre- and post-code: For the front and back Simplified shortcode for words; Full code: No simplified codeword code. Three-word code words: Three-word code words; single three-word codes: one three-word code words enter one word; multiple three-word codes: one three-word code words enter multiple words, or several three-word codes Enter multiple words for the word code. According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The first group code: the three-word code word with the word in the front; the middle group code: the three-word code word with the word in the middle; the last group code: the three-word code with the word after. Simplified according to the short code is part of the full code. According to the former group code, the middle group code and the last group code, three kinds of codes can be combined:
越南语； 三单词码词码  Vietnamese; three-word code
a.前组单词前简码 sinh sinh an Idiach sak中文： 生 生 哥 客人 a. The short code of the previous group of words sinh sinh an Idiach sak
b.中组单词前简码 anh sinh anl l hach sak 中文： 哥 生 哥 客人 b. Short code before the group of words anh sinh anl l hach sak Chinese:
c.后组单词前简码 khach sinh anh lchach sak 中文： 客人 生 哥 客人 c. Short code before the next group of words khach sinh anh lchach sak Chinese: guest born brother guest
二单词码词码： 单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入一个 单词； 多二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词。 按 照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 后组码； 前组码： 单词在前面的二单词码 词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分。 按照 前组码、 后组码， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码： 二单词码词码  Two-word code word code: Two-word code word code; Single two-word code: One two-word code word enter one word; Multiple two-word code: One two-word code word Enter multiple words or several two words Enter multiple words for a codeword. According to the position of the word in the code word, the order is divided into: the first group code and the last group code; the first group code: the two word code before the word code; the last group code: the two word code after the word; according to What the shortcode simplifies is part of the full code. According to the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined: two-word code word code
a.前组全码 sinh sinh anh 中文： 生 生 哥 a. Full code of the front group sinh sinh anh Chinese: Health Health
b.前组单词前简码 sinh sinh anh sanh 中文： 生 生 哥 · b. Pre-code of the previous group of words sinh sinh anh sanh Chinese: Shengsheng Brother ·
c.前组后简码 sinh sinh anh sinha 中文： 生 生 哥 c. Short code before group sinh sinh anh sinha Chinese: Sheng Sheng
d.前组单词前后简码 sinh sinli anh sa 中文： 生 生 哥 d. Shortcodes before and after the previous group of words sinh sinli anh sa Chinese: Sheng Sheng
e.后组全码 anh sin anh 中文： 哥 生 哥 e. Full group code anh sin anh Chinese: Brother, Brother
f.后组前简码 anh sinh anh 中文： 哥 生 哥 f. Short code before group anh sinh anh Chinese:
g.后组单词后简码 anh sinh anh sinha 中文： 哥 生 哥 g. short words after group words anh sinh anh sinha Chinese: 哥 生 哥
h.后组前后简码 anh sinh anh sa 中文： 哥 生 哥 h. short code before and after the group anh sinh anh sa Chinese:
加码： 附加字母与码词码合称加码； a.前加码： 字母在前面的加码 ooanh oosa 中 文： 哥 b.后加码： 字母在后面的加码 an oo saoo 中文： 哥 c.前  Plus code: The additional letter and code word code are collectively called plus code; a. Pre-code: The letter is coded in front ooanh oosa Chinese: Brother b. Post-code: The letter is coded in the back an oo saoo Chinese: Brother c. Before
后加码： 字母在前面、 后面的加码 oanho osao 中文： 哥； ing加码； er加码； est 加码； ly加码； ed加码； in前加码  Post-code: the code of the letter before and after oanho osao Chinese: Brother; ing code; er code; est code; ly code; ed code; in code
四单词码词码； 前组前简码； 字母码词码； 前组前简码  Four-word code word code; Short code before group; Letter code word before group; Short code before group
s sinh anli sa 中文： 生 哥 s sinh si 中文： 生 s sinh anli sa in Chinese: raw brother s sinh si in Chinese: raw
在拼音文字中罗马尼亚语， 码词素为单词、 字母、 码词码是单词、 字母， 即罗马尼 亚语码词码， 其键盘用国际通用标准键盘： 码元为 26个英文字母。 字母是本国语字母， 或本国语字母对应的拉丁字母。 码词码按照单词个数分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词 码、 四单词码词码、 多单词码词码、 一单词码词码。 按照要输入单词个数分为： 单单词 码、 多单词码。 单单词码： 一个码词输入一个单词； 多单词码： 一个码词输入多个单词， 或几个码词输入多个单词。 按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后 组码。 前组码： 单词在前面的码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的码词码； 后组码： 单词在 后面的码词码。按照码词码是否简化和简化的顺序,码词码可分为简码和全码； 简码又分 为： 前简码、 后简码、 前后简码。 简码： 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码： 对前面的 单词进行简化的简码； 后简码： 对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码： 对前面、 后 面的单词简化的简码； 全码： 没有简化的码词码。 三单词码词码： 单词个数为三个的码 词码； 单三单词码： 一个三单词码词输入一个单词； 多三单词码： 一个三单词码词输入 多个单词， 或几个三单词码输入多个单词。 按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组 码、 中组码、 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的三 单词码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的三单词码词码。 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分。 按照前组码、 中组码、 后组码可组合出三种码： In Pinyin, Romanian, code morphemes are words, letters, and code word codes are words and letters, that is, Romanian code word codes. Its keyboard uses the international standard keyboard: the code element is 26 English letters. The alphabet is the native alphabet, or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet. Code word codes are divided into three word code words: two word code words, two word code words, four word code words, multi word code words, and one word code words. According to the number of words to be input, it is divided into: single word code, multi-word code. Single-word code: Enter one word for one codeword; Multi-word code: Enter multiple words for one codeword, or enter multiple words for several codewords. According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The first group code: the code word code in front of the word; the middle group code: the code word code in the middle of the word; the last group code: the code word code in the back of the word. According to whether the codeword code is simplified and simplified, the codeword code can be divided into short code and full code; short code is further divided into: front short code, post short code, front and back short codes. Shortcode: Simplified codeword code for the full code; Pre-shortcode: Simplified shortcode for the previous word; Post-shortcode: Simplified shortcode for the subsequent words; Pre- and post-code: For the front and back Simplified shortcode for words; Full code: No simplified codeword code. Three-word codeWord code: Three-word code Word code; Single three-word code: Enter a word for a three-word code word; Multiple three-word code: Enter multiple words for a three-word code word, or enter multiple words for several three-word codes. According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The first group code: the three-word code word with the word in the front; the middle group code: the three-word code word with the word in the middle; the last group code: the three-word code with the word after. Simplified according to the short code is part of the full code. According to the former group code, the middle group code and the last group code, three kinds of codes can be combined:
罗马尼亚语； 三单词码词码  Romanian; three-word code
a. 前组单词前简码 gri gri alba neagra gan 中文： 灰 灰 白 黑 a. Short code of the previous group of words gri gri alba neagra gan Chinese: gray gray white black
b. 中组单词前简码 alba gri alba neagra gan 中文： 白 灰 白 黑 b. Short code of middle group words alba gri alba neagra gan Chinese: white gray white black
c 后组单词前简码 neagra gri alba neagra 中文： 黑 灰 白 黑 c short group of words before short code neagra gri alba neagra Chinese: black gray white black
二单词码词码： 单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入一个单词； 多二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词。 按照单词 在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 后组码； 前组码： 单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分。 按照前组码、 后组码， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码： Two-word code word code: Two-word code word code; Single two-word code: One two-word code word enter one word; Multiple two-word code: One two-word code word Enter multiple words or several two words Enter multiple words for a codeword. According to the position of the word in the code word, the order is divided into: the first group code and the last group code; the first group code: the two word code before the word code; the last group code: the two word code after the word; according to What the shortcode simplifies is part of the full code. According to the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined:
a.前组全码 alba alba neagra 中文： 白 白 黑 a. Full size of the front group alba alba neagra Chinese: White White Black
b.前组单词前简码 alba alba neagra aneagra 中文： 白 白 黑 b. Short code of the previous group of words alba alba neagra aneagra Chinese: White White Black
c.前组后简码 alba alba nesgra alban 中文： 白 白 黑 c. Short code of the former group alba alba nesgra alban Chinese: white white black
d.前组单词前后简码 alba alba neagra an 中文： 黑 白 黑 d. Short words before and after the previous group of words alba alba neagra an Chinese: Black White Black
e.后组全码 neagra alba neagra 中; ^：: 黑 白 黑 e. Rear group full size neagra alba neagra; ^ :: black white black
f.后组前简码 nesgra alba neagra aneagra中文： 黑 白 黑 f. Short code of back group nesgra alba neagra aneagra Chinese: Black White Black
g.后组单词后简码 neagra alba neagra alban 中文： 黑 白 黑 g. Back group short code neagra alba neagra alban Chinese: Black White Black
h.后组前后简码 neagra alba neagra an 中文： 黑 白 黑 h. Short code before and after the group neagra alba neagra an Chinese: Black White Black
加码：附加字母与码词码全称加码； a.前加码：字母在前面的加码 ooneagra ooan 中文. - 黑； b.后加码： 字母在后面的加码 neagraoo anoo 中文： 黑 c.前后加码： 字母在前 后的力口码 oneagrao oano Plus code: full letter and code word code plus a plus code; a. Front plus code: letter plus ooneagra ooan in front of Chinese.-Black; b. Post plus code: letter plus neagraoo anoo behind Chinese: black c. Plus code before and after: letter in Front and rear power code oneagrao oano
ing加码； er加码； est加码； ly加码； ed加码； in前加码 ing code; er code; est code; ly code; ed code; in code before
四单词码词码； 前组前简码； 字母码词码； 前组前简码 Four-word code word code; Short code before group; Letter code word before group; Short code before group
a alba neagra an 中文： 白 黑 a alba al 中文： 白 a alba neagra an in Chinese: white black a alba al in Chinese: white
在拼音文字中葡萄牙语， 码词素为单词、 字母、 码词码是单词、 字母， 即葡萄牙语 码词码， 其键盘用国际通用标准键盘： 码元为 26个英文字母。字母是本国语字母， 或本 国语字母对应的拉丁字母。 码词码按照单词个数分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 多单词码词码、 一单词码词码。 按照要输入单词个数分为： 单单词码、 多单词码。 单单词码： 一个码词输入一个单词； 多单词码： 一个码词输入多个单词， 或 几个码词输入多个单词。 按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组 码。 前组码： 单词在前面的码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的码词码； 后组码： 单词在后 面的码词码。按照码词码是否简化和简化的顺序,码词码可分为简码和全码；简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码、 前后简码。 简码： 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码： 对前面的单词 进行简化的简码； 后简码： 对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码： 对前面、 后面的 单词简化的简码； 全码： 没有简化的码词码。三单词码词码： 单词个数为三个的码词码; 单三单词码： 一个三单词码词输入一个单词； 多三单词码： 一个三单词码词输入多个单 词， 或几个三单词码输入多个单词。 按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中 组码、 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的三单词码 词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的三单词码词码。 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分。 按照 前组码、 中组码、 后组码可组合出三种码： 葡萄牙语； 三单词码词码 In Pinyin, Portuguese, code morphemes are words, letters, and code word codes are words and letters, that is, Portuguese code word codes. Its keyboard uses the international standard keyboard: the code element is 26 English letters. The alphabet is the native alphabet, or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet. Code word codes are divided into three word code words: two word code words, two word code words, four word code words, multi word code words, and one word code words. According to the number of words to be input, it is divided into: single word code, multi-word code. Single-word code: Enter one word for one codeword; Multi-word code: Enter multiple words for one codeword, or enter multiple words for several codewords. According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The first group code: the code word code in front of the word; the middle group code: the code word code in the middle of the word; the last group code: the code word code in the back of the word. According to whether the codeword code is simplified and simplified, the codeword code can be divided into short code and full code; short code is further divided into: front short code, post short code, front and back short codes. Shortcode: Simplified codeword code for the full code; Pre-shortcode: Simplified shortcode for the previous word; Post-shortcode: Simplified shortcode for the subsequent words; Pre- and post-code: For the front and back Simplified shortcode for words; Full code: No simplified codeword code. Three-word code words: Three-word code words; single three-word codes: one three-word code words enter one word; multiple three-word codes: one three-word code words enter multiple words, or several three-word codes Enter multiple words for the word code. According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The first group code: the three-word code word with the word in the front; the middle group code: the three-word code word with the word in the middle; the last group code: the three-word code with the word after. Simplified according to the short code is part of the full code. According to the former group code, the middle group code and the last group code, three kinds of codes can be combined: Portuguese; three-word code
a.前组全码 turismo turismo junto andar tja 中文： 旅游 旅游 连接 走 b.中组单词前简码 junto turismo junto andar tja 中文： 连接 旅游 连接 走 c 后组单词前简码 andar rurismo junto andar tja 中文： 走 旅游 连接 走 二单词码词码： 单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入一个单词； 多二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词。 按照单词 在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 后组码； 前组码： 单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分。 按照前组码、 后组码， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码； 二单词码词码 a. The full code of the former group turismo turismo junto andar tja Chinese: Travel and tourism connection b. The short code of the group of words junto turismo junto andar tja Chinese: Connect the tourist connection and walk c. The short code of the group of words before the word andar rurismo junto andar tja Chinese: Take the tour and connect the two-word code word code: two-word code word code; single two-word code: one two-word code word to enter a word; multiple two-word code: one two-word code word to enter multiple words or Enter several words for several two-word code words. According to the position of the word in the code word, the order is divided into: the first group code and the last group code; the first group code: the two word code before the word code; the last group code: the two word code after the word; according to What the shortcode simplifies is part of the full code. According to the first group code and the last group code, eight practical codes can be combined; two-word codes and word codes
a. 前组全码 junto junto andar 中文： 连接 连接 走 ' a. Full code of the former group junto junto andar Chinese: connect connect walk '
b. 前组单词前简码 junto junto andar j andar 中文： 连接 连接 走 b. Short code of the previous group of words junto junto andar j andar Chinese: connect connect walk
c.前组后简码 junto junto andar junta 中文： 连接 连接 走 c. Short code before and after group junto junto andar junta Chinese: connect connect walk
d.前组单词前后简码 junto junto andar ja 中文： 连接 连接 d. Shortcodes before and after the word junto junto andar ja Chinese: connect connect
e.后组全码 andar junto andar 中文： 走 连接 走 e. Full code of back group andar junto andar Chinese: Go Connect Go
f.后组前简码 andar junto andar 中文： 走 连接 走 f. Short code of back group andar junto andar Chinese: Go Connect Go
g.后组单词后简码 andar junto andar jumtoa 中文： 走 连接 走 g. Short words after the group of words andar junto andar jumtoa Chinese: go connect go
h.后组前后简码 andar junto andar ja 中文： 走 连接 走 h. Short code before and after the group andar junto andar ja Chinese: Go Connect Go
加码： 附加字母与码词码合称加码； a.前加码：字母在前面的加码 ooandar ooja 中 文： 走  Overweight: the additional letters and codewords are collectively called overweight; a. Before overweight: the overweight of the letter in front ooandar ooja Chinese: go
b.后加码： 字母在后面的加码 andaroo jaoo 中文： 走 c.前后加码： 字母在前后的加 码 b. Post-addition: Letters are added at the back andaroo jaoo Chinese: Going c. Pre- and post-codes: Letters are added before and after
o andar ojao 中文： 走 o andar ojao Chinese: walk
ing加码； er加码； est加码； ly加码； ed加码； in前加码 ing code; er code; est code; ly code; ed code; in code before
四单词码词码； 前组前简码； 字母码词码； 前组前简码 j junto andar ja 中文： 连接走  Four-word code word code; short code before group; letter code word group; before group j junto andar ja Chinese: connect to go
j junto ju 中文： 连接 j junto ju Chinese: Connect
在拼音文字中阿尔尼亚语码词素为单词、 字母、 码词码是单词、 字母即阿尔尼亚语 码词码， 其键盘用国际通用标准键盘： 码元为 26个英文字母。字母是本国语字母， 或本 国语字母对应的拉丁字母。 码词码按照单词个数分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 多单词码词码。 按照要输入单词个数分为： 单单词码、 多单词码。 单单 词码： 一个码词输入一个单词； 多单词码： 一个码词输入多个单词， 或几个码词输入多 个单词。 按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码。 前组码： 单 词在前面的码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的码词码； 组码： 单词在后面的码词码。 按照 码词码是否简化和简化的顺序,码词码可分为简码和全码；简码又分为:前简码、后简码、 前后简码。 简码： 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码： 对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码： 对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码： 对前面、 后面的单词简化的简码； 全码： 没有简化的码词码。 三单词码词码： 单词个数为三个的码词码； 单三单词码： 一 个三单词码词输入一个单词； 多三单词码： 一个三单词码词输入多个单词， 或几个三单 词码输入多个单词。 按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码- 单词在后面的三单词码词码。按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分。按照前组码、 中组码、 后组码可组合出三种码：  In Pinyin text, the morpheme of the Albanian code is a word, a letter, and the codeword is a word, and the letter is an Alanya codeword code. The keyboard uses an international standard keyboard: the code element is 26 English letters. The alphabet is the native alphabet, or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet. Code word code is divided into three word code word code, two word code word code, four word code word code, and multiple word code word code according to the number of words. According to the number of words to be input, it is divided into: single word code, multi-word code. Word code: Enter one word for one code word; Multi-word code: Enter multiple words for one code word, or enter multiple words for several code words. According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The first group code: the code word code in front of the word; the middle group code: the code word code in the middle of the word; the group code: the code word code in the back of the word. According to whether the codeword code is simplified and simplified, the codeword code can be divided into short code and full code; short code is further divided into: front short code, back short code, front and back short codes. Shortcode: Simplified codeword code for the full code; Pre-shortcode: Simplified shortcode for the previous word; Post-shortcode: Simplified shortcode for the subsequent words; Pre- and post-code: For the front and back Simplified shortcode for words; Full code: No simplified codeword code. Three-word code words: Three-word code words; single three-word codes: one three-word code words enter one word; multiple three-word codes: one three-word code words enter multiple words, or several three-word codes Enter multiple words for the word code. According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The first group code: the three-word code word with the word in front; the middle group code: the three-word code word with the word in the middle; the last group code-the three-word code with the word in the back. Simplified according to the short code is part of the full code. Three codes can be combined according to the former group code, the middle group code, and the last group code:
方形框口、 菱形框 三角形框 /\圆形框 ;0' 别表示本国语字母或拉丁字母图形框的 数字， 表示字母的顺序： 同一种图形框集表示一个单词， 不同种图形框集组成一个码单 词。 不同种图形框组成一个简化的码单词。 从右向左书写的语言三单词码词输入方式三 单词码词码 a.前组单词前前简码 π Λ Λ Square frame mouth, diamond frame triangle frame / \ round frame ; 0 'Don't indicate the number of the native or Latin alphabet graphic frame, indicating the order of the letters: the same graphic frame set represents a word, and different graphic frame sets form one Code list Words. Different kinds of graphic boxes make up a simplified code word. The three-word code word input method written from right to left. Three-word code word code a. Before the group of words before the short code π Λ Λ
睡關 刚國關 ^  Sleep Off Gang Kong Pass ^
b.中组单词前简码 Δ Α Δ Α Α ^ π Α φ b. Short code before middle group words Δ Α Δ Α Α ^ π Α φ
c.后组单词前简码 c. Short code before the next group of words
^fit1 m 誦 ^ fit 1 m
前贿简码 ΜΜΞ ΜΘΘΞΞ Δ Δ Α Φ ΦΦ ®®® 0 ΔShort code of previous bribe ΜΜΞ ΜΘΘΞΞ Δ Δ Α Φ ΦΦ ®® 0 Δ
2码词码： 单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入一个单词； 多二 单词码： 一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词。 按照单词在码 词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 后组码； 前组码： 单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组 码： 单词在后面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分。 按照前组码、 后 2 code word code: code word code with 2 words; single or two word code: enter a word with one two word code; multiple word code: enter multiple words or several two word codes with one two word code Enter multiple words. According to the position of the word in the code word, the order is divided into: the first group code and the last group code; the first group code: the two word code before the word code; the last group code: the two word code after the word; according to What the shortcode simplifies is part of the full code. According to the previous group code, after
Figure imgf000030_0001
Figure imgf000030_0001
天成文书 （梵文） 、 锡克教文、 奥利雅文、 泰卢固文、 德拉维族文、 泰文、 藏语、 缅甸 语、 朝鲜语、 埃塞俄比亚语、 欧甘文、 孟加拉文、 古吉拉特文、 泰米尔文、 卡纳达文、 老挝文、 格鲁吉亚文、 切罗基族语、 古代北欧文字、 高棉语、 阿泽里语、 爱沙尼亚语、 巴斯克语、 白俄罗斯语、 保加利亚语、 冰岛语、 波兰语、 鞑靼语、 丹麦语、 法罗语、 芬 兰语、 弗里斯兰语、 哈萨克语、 荷、 加利西亚语、 加泰罗尼亚语、 捷克语、 克罗地亚语、 拉脱维亚语、 立陶宛语、 马其顿语、 南非荷兰语、 挪威语<博克马尔语 >、 挪威语 <尼诺斯 克语〉、瑞典语、 斯洛文尼语、 斯瓦希里语、 土耳其语、 乌克兰语、 乌兹别克语、 希腊语、 藏语、 蒙古语、 维吾尔语、 满语） 码词素为单词、 字母、 码词码是单词、 字母即英语码 词码， 其键盘手用国际通用标准键盘： 码元为 26个英文字母。 字母是本国语字母， 或本 国语字母对应的拉丁字母。 码词码按照单词个数分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 多单词码词码。 按照要输入单词个数分为： 单单词码、 多单词码。 单单 词码： 一个码词输入一个单词； 多单词码： 一个码词输入多个单词， 或几个码词输入多 个单词。 按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码。 前组码： 单 3 000721 词在前面的码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的码词码； 组码： 单词在后面的码词码。 按照 码词码是否简化和简化的顺序,码词码可分为简码和全码；简码又分为：前简码、后简码、 前后简码。 简码： 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码： 对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码： 对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码： 对前面、 后面的单词简化的简码； 全码： 没有简化的码词码。 三单词码词码： 单词个数为三个的码词码； 单三单词码： 一 个三单词码词输入一个单词； 多三单词码： 一个三单词码词输入多个单词， 或几个三单 词码输入多个单词。 按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的三单词码词码。 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分。 按照前组码、 中 组码、 后组码可组合出三种码： Devanagari (Sanskrit), Sikh, Oriya, Telugu, Dravidian, Thai, Tibetan, Burmese, Korean, Ethiopian, Ogan, Bengali, Gujarati, Thai Khmer, Kannada, Lao, Georgian, Cherokee, Ancient Nordic, Khmer, Azeri, Estonian, Basque, Belarusian, Bulgarian, Icelandic, Polish Language, slang, Danish, Faroese, Finnish, Frisian, Kazakh, Dutch, Galician, Catalan, Czech, Croatian, Latvian, Lithuanian, Macedonian, Afrikaans, Norwegian <Bokmal>, Norwegian <Nynorsk>, Swedish, Slovenian, Swahili, Turkish, Ukrainian, Uzbek, Greek Language, Tibetan, Mongolian, Uyghur, Manchu) code morphemes are words, letters, code word codes are words, letters are English code word codes, and its keyboard With the international standard keyboard: symbols for the 26 English letters. The alphabet is the native alphabet, or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet. Code word code is divided into three word code word code, two word code word code, four word code word code, and multiple word code word code according to the number of words. According to the number of words to be input, it is divided into: single word code, multi-word code. Single-word code: Enter one word for one codeword; Multi-word code: Enter multiple words for one codeword, or enter multiple words for several codewords. According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. Front group code: single 3 000721 Code word code in front of the word; Group code: code word code in the middle of the word; Group code: code word code in the back of the word. According to whether the codeword code is simplified and simplified, the codeword code can be divided into short code and full code; short code is further divided into: front short code, back short code, front and back short code. Shortcode: Simplified codeword code for the full code; Pre-shortcode: Simplified shortcode for the previous word; Post-shortcode: Simplified shortcode for the subsequent words; Pre- and post-code: For the front and back Simplified shortcode for words; Full code: No simplified codeword code. Three-word code words: Three-word code words; single three-word codes: one three-word code words enter one word; multiple three-word codes: one three-word code words enter multiple words, or several three-word codes Enter multiple words for the word code. According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The first group code: the three-word code word with the word in the front; the middle group code: the three-word code word with the word in the middle; the last group code: the three-word code with the word after. Simplified according to the short code is part of the full code. According to the former group code, the middle group code and the last group code, three kinds of codes can be combined:
方形框口、菱形框◊三角形框 圆形框, g)|分别表示本国语字母或拉丁字母图形框的数 字， 表示字母的顺序： 同一种图形框集表示一个单词， 不同种图形框集组成一个码单词。 不同种图形框组成一个简化的码单词。 从左向右书写的语言三单词码词输入方式三单词 码词码 a.俞组单词前前简码 Square frame, diamond frame, triangle frame, circular frame, g) | Represents the numbers of the national or Latin alphabet graphic frame, respectively, indicating the order of the letters: the same graphic frame set represents a word, and different types of graphic frame sets form one Code words. Different kinds of graphic boxes make up a simplified code word. Language three-word codeword input method written from left to right Three-word codeword code a. Short code before Yu group words
國 隱 隱 國 編 φ辦  National Yin Yin National Editor 办 Office
b.中组单词前简码 QSQQSS A Δ φ c.后组单词前简码 四单词码词码隱 隱 編 Φ續 b. Short code before the middle group of words QSQQSS A Δ φ c. Short code before the next group of words Four word code Word code Hidden hidden Φ Continued
前组前简码 [ΐ υ Δ Δ Α Φ ΦΦ ①②③ Short code of the previous group [ΐ υ Δ Δ Α Φ ΦΦ ①②③
码词码： 单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入一个单词； 多二 单词码： 一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词。 按照单词在码 词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 后组码； 前组码： 单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组 码： 单词在后面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分。 按照前组码、 后 Codeword code: Codeword code with 2 words; Single or two-word code: Enter a word with one two-word codeword; Multiple-wordcode: Enter multiple words or several two-word codewords with one two-word codeword Enter multiple words. According to the position of the word in the code word, the order is divided into: the first group code and the last group code; the first group code: the two word code before the word code; the last group code: the two word code after the word; according to What the shortcode simplifies is part of the full code. According to the previous group code, after
Figure imgf000031_0001
Figure imgf000031_0001
6. 组„ 國 隱 顯 圆 0編 6. Group „National Yin Xianyuan 0 series
f.后组单词^) '简码 A s Α Λ Α Λ _ . . Λ f. the next group of words ^) 'short code A s Α Λ Α Λ _.. Λ
Δ Α ΑΒΞΘΒΘΘ Δ Α Α Q A A  Δ Α ΑΒΞΘΒΘΘ Δ Α Α Q A A
g.后组单词前后简码 Α Α ΒΞΘ ΞΒ δ ΑΒΘΕΙΘΘ Δ g. Short codes before and after the group of words Α Α ΒΞΘ ΞΒ δ ΑΒΘΕΙΘΘ Δ
h.后组单词前后简码 Λ Λ Λ π Λ h. Short codes before and after the group of words Λ Λ Λ π Λ
隱  Hidden
加码： 字母与单词输 Δ入Α码Α 隱 Overweight: Letter and word input Δ 入 Α 码 Α 隐
合称加码^ a.前加码：字母在前面的 Ξ加ώ码①② Π 0 A Λ Collectively referred to as overweight ^ a. Before overweight: the letter in front of the plus size ①② Π 0 A Λ
b.后加码： 字母在后面的加码 Q A①② b. Back-up: The back-up of the letter Q A①②
c.前后加码： 字母在前后的加码① ② c. Pre- and post-code: The pre- and post-code of the letter ① ②
字母翻码； 前组前简码 QQ¾QQaS 圓 ΘΘΘΘ 在拼音文字中希伯来语码词素为单词、 字母、 码词码是单词、 字母， 即希伯来语码 词码， 其键盘用国际通用标准键盘： 码元为 26个英文字母。字母是本国语字母， 或本国 语字母对应的拉丁字母。 码词码按照单词个数分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四 单词码词码、 多单词码词码。 按照要输入单词个数分为： 单单词码、 多单词码。 单单词 码： 一个码词输入一个单词； 多单词码： 一个码词输入多个单词， 或几个码词输入多个 单词。 按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码。 前组码： 单词 在前面的码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的码词码。 按照 码词码是否简化和简化的顺序,码词码可分为简码和全码；简码又分为：前简码、后简码、 前后简码。 简码： 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码： 对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码： 对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码： 对前面、 后面的单词简化的简码； 全码： 没有简化的码词码。 三单词码词码： 单词个数为三个的码词码； 单三单词码： 一 个三单词码词输入一个单词； 多三单词码： 一个三单词码词输入多个单词， 或几个三单 词码输入多个单词。 按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码- 单词在后面的三单词码词码。按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分。按照前组码、 中组码、 后组码可组合出三种码： Letter turn code; short code before the front group QQ¾QQaS circle ΘΘΘΘ Hebrew code morphemes in Pinyin text are words, letters, codeword codes are words, letters, that is, Hebrew code Word code, the keyboard uses the international standard keyboard: the code element is 26 English letters. The alphabet is the native alphabet, or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet. Code word code is divided into three word code word code, two word code word code, four word code word code, and multiple word code word code according to the number of words. According to the number of words to be input, it is divided into: single word code, multi-word code. Single-word code: Enter one word for one codeword; Multi-word code: Enter multiple words for one codeword, or enter multiple words for several codewords. According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The first group code: the code word code in front of the word; the middle group code: the code word code in the middle of the word; the last group code: the code word code in the back of the word. According to whether the codeword code is simplified and simplified, the codeword code can be divided into short code and full code; short code is further divided into: front short code, back short code, front and back short code. Shortcode: Simplified codeword code for the full code; Pre-shortcode: Simplified shortcode for the previous word; Post-shortcode: Simplified shortcode for the subsequent words; Pre- and post-code: For the front and back Simplified shortcode for words; Full code: No simplified codeword code. Three-word code words: Three-word code words; single three-word codes: one three-word code words enter one word; multiple three-word codes: one three-word code words enter multiple words, or several three-word codes Enter multiple words for the word code. According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The first group code: the three-word code word with the word in front; the middle group code: the three-word code word with the word in the middle; the last group code-the three-word code with the word in the back. Simplified according to the short code is part of the full code. According to the former group code, the middle group code and the last group code, three kinds of codes can be combined:
方形框口、 菱形框 ^角形框 Δ 圆形框 :Q分别表示本国语字母或拉丁字母图形框 的数字， 表示字母的顺序： 同一种图形框集¾示一个单词， 不同种图形框集组成一个码 单词。 不同种图形框组成一个简化的码单词。 Square frame, diamond frame ^ angle frame Δ round frame: Q represents the number of the national language or Latin alphabet graphic frame, respectively, indicating the order of the letters: the same graphic frame set ¾ shows a word, different types of graphic frame sets form one Code words. Different kinds of graphic boxes make up a simplified code word.
从右向左书写的语言三单词码词输入方式三单词码词码 a.前组单词前前简码 b.中組卑 "H f!jl 纖 國 國 辦 0 Language three-word code word input method written from right to left Three-word code word code a. Before the group of words before the short code b. In the group "H f! Jl Fiber Country State Office 0
简码 ◊ ◊  Shortcode ◊ ◊
③②①  ③②①
单词码词码： 单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入一个单词； 多二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词。 按照单词 在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 后组码； 前组码： 单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分。 按照前组码、 Word code word code: Two word code word code; single two word code: one two word code word to enter one word; multiple two word code: one two word code word to enter multiple words or several two word codes Enter multiple words. According to the position of the word in the code word, the order is divided into: the first group code and the last group code; the first group code: the two word code before the word code; the last group code: the two word code after the word; according to What the shortcode simplifies is part of the full code. According to the previous group code,
Figure imgf000032_0001
b.后加码： 字母在后面的加码 Θ G
Figure imgf000032_0001
b. Post-encoding: the letter Θ G at the back
c.前后加码： 字母在前后的加码 c. Pre- and post-code: The pre- and post-code of the letter
字母码词码； 前组前简码 在拼音 中乌尔都语码词素为单词、 字母、 码词码是单词、 字母， 即乌尔都语码 词码， 其键盘用国际通用标准键盘： 码元为 26个英文字母。 字母是本国语字母， 或本国 语字母对应的拉丁字母。 码词码按照单词个数分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四 单词码词码、 多单词码词码。 按照要输入单词个数分为： 单单词码、 多单词码。 单单词 码： 一个码词输入一个单词； 多单词码： 一个码词输入多个单词， 或几个码词输入多 单词。 按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码。 前组码： 单 在前面的码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的码词码。 按照 码词码是否简化和简化的顺序,码词码可分为简码和全码；简码又分为：前简码、后简码、 前后简码。 简码： 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码： 对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码： 对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码： 对前面、 后面的单词简化的简码； 全码： 没有简化的码词码。 三单词码词码： 单词个数为三个的码词码； 单三单词码： 一 个三单词码词输入一个单词； 多三单词码： 一个三单词码词输入多个单词， 或几个三单 词码输入多个单词。 按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的三单词码词码。按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分。按照前组码、 中组码、 后组码可组合出三种码： ― Letter code word code; the former short code of the previous group in the Pinyin Urdu code morphemes are words, letters, code word codes are words, letters, that is, Urdu code word code, the keyboard uses the international standard keyboard: code Yuan is 26 English letters. The alphabet is the native alphabet, or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet. Code word codes are divided into three word code words: two word code words, two word codes, four word codes, and multiple word codes. According to the number of words to be input, it is divided into: single word code, multi-word code. Single-word code: Enter one word for one codeword; Multi-word code: Enter multiple words for one codeword, or enter multiple words for several codewords. According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The first group code: single code word code in front; the middle group code: code word code with the word in the middle; the last group code: code word code with the word in the back. According to whether the codeword code is simplified and simplified, the codeword code can be divided into short code and full code; short code is further divided into: front short code, post short code, front and back short codes. Shortcode: Simplified codeword code for the full code; Pre-shortcode: Simplified shortcode for the previous word; Post-shortcode: Simplified shortcode for the subsequent words; Pre- and post-code: For the front and back Simplified shortcode for words; Full code: No simplified codeword code. Three-word code words: Three-word code words; single three-word codes: one three-word code words enter one word; multiple three-word codes: one three-word code words enter multiple words, or several three-word codes Enter multiple words for the word code. According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The first group code: the three-word code word with the word in the front; the middle group code: the three-word code word with the word in the middle; the last group code: the three-word code with the word after. Simplified according to the short code is part of the full code. Three codes can be combined according to the former group code, the middle group code, and the last group code: ―
方形框口、 菱形框 ◊三角形 圆形框 分别表示本国语字母或拉丁字母图形框 的数字， 表示字母的顺序： 同一种图形框集表 一个单词， 不同种图形框集组成一个码 单词。 不同种图形框组成一个简化的码单词。 Square frame mouth, diamond frame ◊ triangle, circular frame represent the numbers of the national alphabet or Latin alphabet graphic frame, respectively, indicating the order of the letters: the same graphic frame set represents a word, and different graphic frame sets form a code word. Different kinds of graphic boxes make up a simplified code word.
从右向左书写的语言三单词码词输入方式三单词码词码 a.前组单词前前简码 c iMm
Figure imgf000033_0001
圆 ΞΘ Language three-word code word input method written from right to left Three-word code word code a. Before group of words before short code c iMm
Figure imgf000033_0001
Round ΞΘ
^^简码 鴨 ^^ Short code duck
③②① Δ Α Δ000Ξ0ΦΦΦΦ Ο ΦΔ0  ③②① Δ Α Δ000Ξ0ΦΦΦΦ Ο ΦΔ0
单词码词码： 单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入一个单词； 多二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词。 按照单词 在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 后组码； 前组码： 单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分。 按照前组码、 后组码， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码； a.前组全码 b.前组单词前简码 隠 SQQSEQ SQQSaQA A AQ J Word code word code: Two word code word code; single two word code: one two word code word to enter one word; multiple two word code: one two word code word to enter multiple words or several two word codes Enter multiple words. According to the position of the word in the code word, the order is divided into: the first group code and the last group code; the first group code: the two word code before the word code; the last group code: the two word code after the word; What the shortcode simplifies is part of the full code. According to the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined; a. The whole group code b . The short code before the word in the former group 组 SQQSEQ SQQSaQA A AQ J
c.前组后简码 Δ Α Δ SQQSSQ SQQaaEA SQQSQQ d i简码 n A n圆 固 ΏΘΞΘ Δ βc. Short code Δ Α Δ SQQSSQ SQQaaEA SQQSQQ d i short code n A n round solid ΏΘΞΘ Δ β
imm
Figure imgf000033_0002
Δ Α ΔΘΜΞΘΒΞΜΞ Δ Α Δ ' ' A A A Q Θ國 國 画 T/CN2003/000721 imm
Figure imgf000033_0002
Δ Α ΔΘΜΞΘΒΞΜΞ Δ Α Δ '' AAAQ Θ Chinese painting T / CN2003 / 000721
g.后组单词前后简码 g. Shortcodes before and after the group of words
h.后组单词前后简码 A Θ隱 隱 Α Δ國 h. Short codes before and after the group of words A Θ hidden hidden Α Δ country
Δ 画 讓 國 Q BQQSSQ  Δ Painting Let Country Q BQQSSQ
加码:字母与单词输入码合称加码; a.前加码：字母在前面的加码 Plus code: the letter and the word input code are collectively called plus code; a. Before plus code: the letter is plus code in front
b.后加码： 字母在后面的加码 Δ 0 © G AQQ Q c.前后加码： 字母在前后的加码 o Λ no b. Post-addition: Letters are added at the back Δ 0 © G AQQ Q c. Pre- and post-codes: Letters are added before and after o Λ no
字母码^] ； 前组前简码 ^ ^ { >^J Letter code ^]; Short code before group ^ ^ { > ^ J
A隱 Δ 圆 0 0 Ξ隱 Q  A hidden Δ circle 0 0 Ξ hidden Q
在拼音文字中阿拉伯语 （波 ， 码词素为单词、 字母、 码词码是单词、 字母， 即阿拉伯语 （波斯语）语码词码， 其键盘用国际通用标准键盘： 码元为 26个英文字母。 字母是本国语字母， 或本国语字母对应的拉丁字母。 码词码按照单词个数分为： 三单词 码词码、 二单词码词码、 一单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 多单词码词码。 按照要输入单 词个数分为： 单单词码、 多单词码。 单单词码：  In Pinyin, Arabic (wave, code morphemes are words, letters, code words are words, letters, that is, Arabic (Persian) code words, the keyboard uses the international standard keyboard: the code element is 26 English Letters. Letters are the native alphabet, or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet. Codeword codes are divided according to the number of words: three-word codeword code, two-word codeword code, one-word codeword code, four-word codewordcode Multi-word code Word code. According to the number of words to be entered, it is divided into: single-word code, multi-word code. Single-word code:
个码词输入多个单词， 或几个码词输入多个单词
Figure imgf000034_0001
Enter multiple words for each codeword, or enter multiple words for several codewords
Figure imgf000034_0001
前组码、 中组码、 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面的码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的码词 码； 后组码： 单词在后面的码词码。按照码词码是否简化和简化的顺序，码词码可分为简 码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码、 前后简码。 简码： 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码： 对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码： 对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后 简码： 对前面、 后面的单词简化的简码； 全码： 没有简化的码词码。 三单词码词码： 单 词个数为三个的码词码； 单三单词码： 一个三单词码词输入一个单词； 多三单词码： 一 个三单词码词输入多个单词， 或几个三单词码输入多个单词。按照单词在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 中组码、 后组码。 前组码： 单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码： 单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的三单词码词码。 按照简码所简化的 是全码的一部分。 按照前组码、 中组码、 后组码可组合出三种码- 方形框口、菱形框 角形框 / 圆形框 分别表示本国语字母或拉丁字母图形框的数 字， 表示字母的顺序： 同一种图形框集表'示一个单词， 不同种图形框集组成一个码单词。 不同种图形框组成一个简化的码单词。 First group code, middle group code, and last group code. The first group code: the code word code in front of the word; the middle group code: the code word code in the middle of the word; the last group code: the code word code in the back of the word. According to whether the codeword code is simplified and simplified, the codeword code can be divided into short code and full code; short code is further divided into: front short code, post short code, front and back short codes. Shortcode: Simplified codeword code for the full code; Pre-shortcode: Simplified shortcode for the previous word; Post-shortcode: Simplified shortcode for the subsequent words; Pre- and post-code: For the front and back Simplified shortcode for words; Full code: No simplified codeword code. Three-word code words: Three-word code words; single three-word codes: one three-word code words enter one word; multiple three-word codes: one three-word code words enter multiple words, or several three-word codes Enter multiple words for the word code. According to the position of the word in the codeword, the sequence is divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The first group code: the three-word code word with the word in the front; the middle group code: the three-word code word with the word in the middle; the last group code: the three-word code with the word after. Simplified by the shortcode is part of the full code. Three types of codes can be combined according to the front group code, middle group code, and rear group code-square frame mouth, diamond frame angle frame / round frame represent the numbers of the national alphabet or the Latin alphabet graphic frame, respectively, indicating the order of the letters: the same This kind of graphic frame set represents a word, and different kinds of graphic frame sets form a code word. Different kinds of graphic boxes make up a simplified code word.
从右向左书写的语言三单词码词输入方式三单词码词码 a.前组单词前前简码 Language three-word code word input method written from right to left Three-word code word code
四单词码词^
Figure imgf000034_0002
Four-word code word ^
Figure imgf000034_0002
单词码词码： 单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入 个单词； 多二单词码： 一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词 按照单词 在码词中的位置， 顺序分为： 前组码、 后组码； 前组码： 单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码： 单词在后面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分。按照前组码、 后组码， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码； a.前组全码 N2003/000721 Word code word code: Code word code with two words; Single or two word code: One two word code word enter a word; Multiple two word code: One two word code word Enter multiple words or several two word codes Word input multiple words according to the position of the word in the code word, the order is divided into: the first group code, the last group code; the first group code: the word in front of the two word code word code; the last group code: the word in the next two words Code word code; simplified by the short code is part of the full code. According to the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined; a. The entire group code N2003 / 000721
Figure imgf000035_0001
Figure imgf000035_0001

Claims

权利要求 Rights request
1、 一种语言码输入法， 键盘釆用国际标准键盘， 码元为 26个英文字母， 其特征是： 用字、 词、 单词、 短语、 字母和拼音字母来输入字、 词、 单词短语、 字母的语言码， 用 语言本身的字、 词、 单词或短语来编码， 来输入语言、 文字； 对于表意文字， 包括汉语、 曰语和韩语， 实现一键一字、 一码元一字； 语言码最小单位是码字码和码元字， 码字码 组成码词码或码语码， 三字码词码称为三字码字码或三字码语码， 码语码也叫码字码， 也叫码词码， 或码字母码； 码词素也叫码语素或码字素； 对于拼音文字， 最小编码单位 是码单词码， 也叫码元单词； 码单词码组成码词组码或码语码； 三单词码词码称为三单 词码语码， 码单词码也叫码词组码、 码语码或码字码； 码单词素也叫码语素、 码字母素 或码假名素； 语言码统一表意文字、 拼音文字， 统一了键盘输入、 扫描输入、 手写输入 和语言输入即不同的语言、 文字、 不同的输入方式， 用统一的语言码进行编码和输入， 便于世界范围内不同语种、 不同环境、 不同终端设备的人机交流； 语言码， 即码词码， 用码词来输入组成码词中的码词素； 码词可以是字、 词、 单词、 字母、 短语或短句， 码 词素可以是字、 词、 单词、 字母、 短语或短句， 用码词要输入的文字或语言可以是字、 词、 单词、 短语、 短句或码词对应的字、 词、 单词、 短语或短句， 这个码词叫做本码词 或本词， 是以一的一字一码、 一词一码或一语一码； 按照要输入的码词码素的个数， 分 为： 单码词素码和多码词素码； 对于单码词素码， 一个码词输入一个码词素； 对于多码 词素码， 一个码词输入多个码词素或几个码词输入多个码词素； 按照码词素在码词中的 位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指码词素在前面的码词码； 中组码是指码词素在中间的码词码； 后组码是指码词素在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是 否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 可分为简码和全码； 简码又分可 为前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全码进行简化了的码词码； 前简码是指对前 面的码词素简化了的简码； 后简码是指对后面的码词素简化了的简码； 前后简码是指对 前面及后面的码词素简化了的简码； 全码是指没有简化的码词码； 码词码可以是字母、 字、 单词或假名； 码词素可以是字母、 字、 单词或假名； 码词码按照语种、 语系可以分 为： 阿尔巴尼亚语码词码、 阿拉伯语码词码、 阿泽里语 （拉丁） 码词码、 阿泽里语（西 里尔）码词码、 爱沙尼亚语码词码、 巴斯克语码词码、 白俄罗斯语码词码、 保加利亚语 码词码、 冰岛语码词码、 波兰语码词码、 波斯语码词码、 朝鲜语码词码、 韩国语码词码、 鞑靼语码词码、 丹麦语码词码、 德语码词码、 俄语码词码、 法罗语码词码、 法语码词码、 芬兰语码词码、 弗里斯兰语码词码、 哈萨克语码词码、 荷兰语码词码、 加利西亚语码词 码、 加泰罗尼亚语码词码、 捷克语码词码、 克罗地亚语码词码、 拉脱维亚语码词码、 立 陶宛语码词码、 罗马尼亚语码词码、 马来语码词码、 马其顿语码词码、 南非荷兰语码词 码、 挪威语码词码 （博克马尔语码词码） 、 挪威语码词码 （尼诺斯克语码词码） 、 葡萄 牙语码词码、 F1语码词码、瑞典语码词码、塞尔维亚语（拉丁）码词码、塞尔维亚语（西 ¾尔）码词码、 斯洛伐克语码词码、 斯洛文尼亚语码词码、 塞尔维加亚-克罗地亚语码词 码、 斯瓦希里语码词码、 土耳其语码词码、 乌尔都语码词码、 乌克兰语码词码、 乌兹别 克语 （拉丁）码词码、 乌兹别克语 （西里尔）码词码、 西班牙语码词码、 希伯来语码词 码、希腊语码词码、匈牙利语码词码、意大利语码词码、 印度尼西亚语码词码、英语（澳 大利亚）码词码、 英语（加拿大）码词码、 英语（美国）码词码、 越南语、 藏语码词码、 蒙古语码词码、 维吾尔语码词码、 满语码词码、 汉藏语系码词码、 印欧语系码词码、 萨 莫狄语系码词码、 阿尔太语系码词码、 闪语语系码词码、 达罗毗荼语系码词码、 南亚语 系码词码、 南岛语系码词码、 古亚细亚诸语言码词码、 苏丹语系码词码、 班图语系码词 码、 柯伊散语系码词码、 美洲印第安语码词码； 码词码可分为表形文字码词码和拼音文 字码词码； 码词码按照应用领域可分为键盘输入码词码、 非键盘输入码词码； 码词码按 照码词素可分为字母码词码、 字码词码、 单词码词码、 词码词码和假名码词码； 码词码 按照码词素的个数可分为： 三码词码， 二码词码、 一码词码、 多码词码、 四码词码和五 码词码； 三码词码是指码词素个数为三个的码词码， 三码词码可分为单三码词素码和多 三码词素码， 单三码词素是指一个三码词输入一个码词素， 多三码词码是指一个三码词 输入多个码词素或几个码词输入多个码词素； 码词码按照码词素在码词中的位置和顺序 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指码词素在前面的三码词码； 中组码是指 码词素在中间的三码词码； 后组码是指码词素在后面的三码词码； 按照简码所简化的是 全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后组码的形式， 可组合出其中实用的三种码； a. 前组前简码、 b.中组前简码和 c.后组前简码；二码词码是指码词素个数为二个的码词码； 单二码词素是指可用一个二码词输入一个码词素； 多二码词素是指可用一个二码词输入 多个码词素或几个二码词输入多个码词素； 按照码词素在码词中的位置和顺序分为： 前 组码和后组码； 前组码是指码词素在前的二码词码； 后组码是指码词素在后面的二码词 码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合出其中 实用的八种码： a.前组全码、 b.前组前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组前后简码、 e.全组 全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由附加字母与码词码组 合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前 面的加码， 后加码是指字母在后面的加码， 前后加码是指字母在前面和后面的加码。 1. A language code input method. The keyboard uses an international standard keyboard. The code element is 26 English letters. It is characterized by: using words, words, words, phrases, letters, and pinyin to enter words, words, word phrases, The language code of the alphabet is encoded by the words, words, words or phrases of the language to enter the language and text. For ideographic characters, including Chinese, Japanese, and Korean, one key, one word, one code, and one word are implemented. Language The minimum unit of the code is a codeword code and a codeword word. The codeword code forms a codeword code or codeword code. The three-word codeword code is called a three-word codeword or three-word codeword. The codeword code is also called a codeword. Code, also called code word code, or code letter code; code morpheme is also called code morpheme or code morpheme; for Pinyin text, the minimum coding unit is code word code, also called code word; code word code forms code phrase code or Code word code; Three word code word code is called three word code code, code word code is also called code phrase code, code word code or code word code; code word morpheme is also called code morpheme, code letter or code kana; Language code unified ideograms, spelling Phonetic text, unified keyboard input, scan input, handwriting input, and language input, that is, different languages, texts, and different input methods, are encoded and entered with a unified language code, which is convenient for different languages, environments, and terminals around the world Human-machine communication of the device; Language code, ie code word code, uses code words to enter code morphemes in the code words; code words can be words, words, words, letters, phrases, or short sentences, and code morphemes can be words, Words, words, letters, phrases, or short sentences. The text or language to be entered with code words can be words, words, words, phrases, short sentences, or code words corresponding to words, words, words, phrases, or short sentences. This code The word is called this code word or this word, which is based on one word, one code, one word, one code, or one word, one code. According to the number of codewords to be entered, it is divided into: single-code morpheme code and multi-code Morpheme codes; for single-code morpheme codes, one codeword enters one code morpheme; for multi-code morpheme codes, one codeword enters multiple code morphemes or several codewords enters multiple code morphemes; according to codewords The position and order in the codeword can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the codeword code with the code morpheme in front; the middle group code refers to the code with the codeword morpheme in the middle Word code; The last group code refers to the code word code with the code morpheme behind; according to whether the code word code is simplified and in the simplified order, the code word code can be divided into: short code and full code; can be divided into short code and full code; Shortcodes can be divided into shortcodes before, shortcodes, and shortcodes before and after; shortcodes are codeword codes that simplify the full code; former shortcodes are shortcodes that simplify the previous code morphemes; The short code refers to the simplified code for the subsequent code morphemes; the front and back short codes refer to the simplified code for the preceding and following code morphemes; the full code refers to the code words without simplification; the code word codes can be letters , Word, word or kana; code morphemes can be letters, words, words or kana; code word codes can be divided according to language and language family: Albanian code word code, Arabic code word code, Azeri (Latin) code Word code, Azeri (Cyrillic) word code, Estonian code Code, Basque code word code, Belarusian code word code, Bulgarian code word code, Icelandic code word code, Polish code word code, Persian code word code, Korean code word code, Korean code word code , Slang code word code, Danish code word code, German code word code, Russian code word code, Faroese code word code, French code word code, Finnish code word code, Frisian code word code, Kazakh code word code, Dutch code word code, Galician code word code, Catalan code word code, Czech code word code, Croatian code word code, Latvian code word code, Lithuanian Code word code, Romanian code word code, Malay code word code, Macedonian code word code, Afrikaans code word code, Norwegian code word code (Bokmal code word code), Norwegian code word code ( Ninosk code word code), Portuguese code word code, F1 code word code, Swedish code word code, Serbian (Latin) code word code, Serbian (Western) code word code, Slovak Code word code, Slovenian code word code, Sale Gaya-Croatian code word code, Swahili code word code, Turkish code word code, Urdu code word code, Ukrainian code word code, Uzbek (Latin) code word code, Uzbek ( (Cyrillic) code word code, Spanish code word code, Hebrew code word code, Greek code word code, Hungarian code word code, Italian code word code, Indonesian code word code, English (Australia) code Word code, English (Canada) code word code, English (US) code word code, Vietnamese, Tibetan code word code, Mongolian code word code, Uyghur code word code, Manchu code word code, Sino-Tibetan language family Codeword code, Indo-European codeword code, Samodic codeword code, Altai codeword code, Flash language codeword code, Dharavida codeword code, South Asian codeword code, South Island Language code word code, Ancient Asian language code word code, Sudanese code word code, Bantu code word code, Kwai prose code word code, American Indian code word code; Code word code can be divided into tabular text Code Word Code and Pinyin Code word code; Code word code can be divided into keyboard input code word code and non-keyboard input code word code according to the application field; code word code can be divided into letter code word code, code word code, word code word code according to the code morpheme , Word code word code and kana code word code; code word code can be divided according to the number of code morphemes: three code word code, two code word code, one code word code, multiple code word code, four code word code and five Three-code morpheme refers to three-code morpheme codes. Three-code morpheme codes can be divided into single three-code morpheme codes and multiple three-code morpheme codes. Single three-code morpheme refers to one three-code morpheme. Enter a code morpheme for a word. Multiple three-code morpheme refers to a three-code word to enter multiple code morphemes or several code words to enter multiple code morphemes. Code word codes can be divided according to the position and order of code morphemes in the code words. : The first group code, the middle group code and the last group code; the former group code refers to the three-code word code with the code morpheme in front; the middle group code refers to the three-code word code with the code morpheme in the middle; the latter group code refers to the code morpheme The three-word word code in the back; what is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, according to the previous group code, the middle group code and the last group code Form, which can be combined into three practical codes; a. Pre-code for the first group, b. Pre-code for the middle group, and c. Pre-code for the back group; two-code word code means that the number of code morphemes is two Codeword code; single-codeword morpheme means that one codeword can be used to enter one codeword morpheme; multiple codeword morpheme means that one codeword can be used to input multiple codeword morphemes or several codeword words to enter multiple codeword morphemes; The position and order of morphemes in code words are divided into: the first group code and the second group code; the first group code refers to the two-code word code with the code morpheme first; the last group code refers to the two-code word code with the code morpheme behind; Simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code. According to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined: a. The former group full code, b. The former group short code, c. Short codes before the group, d. Short codes before the group, e. Full codes of the whole group, f. Short codes before the group, g. Short codes after the group and h. Short codes before and after the group; plus codes are by additional letters The code combined with the code word code can be divided into: a. Pre-code, b. Post-code, and c. Pre- and post-code; pre-code refers to the letter in front of the code, followed by The code refers to the plus of the letter at the back, and the plus and minus means the plus of the letter at the front and back.
2. 根据权利要求 1所述的语言码输入法， 其特征是： 对于表意文字的汉语， 码词素 可以是字和拼音字母； 码词码可以是字、 词和拼音字母， 即汉语码词码、 汉语码字码或 汉语码语码， 实现一字一键、 一码元一字或一字一码， 键盘采用国际通用标准键盘； 码 元为 26个英文字母； 码词码按照字个数可分为三字码词码、 二字码词码、 四字码词码、 多字码词码、 一字码词码和五字码字码； 码词码按照要输入的字个数可分为： 单字码和 多字码； 单字码是指一个码词输入一个字的码词码； 多字码是指一个码词输入多个字或 几个码词输入多个字的码词码； 码词码按照字在码词中的位置和顺序分为： 前组码、 中 组码、 后组码； 前组码是指字在前面的码词码； 中组码是指字在中间的码词码； 后组码 是指字在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和 全码； 可分为简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 前简码是指对前 面的字简化的简码； 后简码是指对后面的字简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面、 后面的 字简化的简码； 全码是指没有简化的码词码； 三字码词码是指字个数为三个的码词码； 三字码词码可分为： 单三字码和多三字码； 单三字码是指一个三字码词输入一个字的码 词码； 多三字码是指一个三字码词输入多个字或几个三字码词输入多个字的码词码； 按 照字在码词中的位置和顺序， 多三字码可分为前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指字 在前面的三字码词码； 中组码是指字在中间的三字码词码； 后组码是指字在后面的三字 码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后组码， 可组合出 三种码： a.前组字简码、 b.中组字前简码 c.后组字前简码； 二字码词码是指字个数为二 个的码词码； 单二字码是指一个字码词输入一个字的码词码； 多二字码是指一个二字码 词输入多个字或几个字码词输入多个字的码词码； 按照字在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分 为， 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指字在前面的二字码词码； 后组码是指字在后面的二字 码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合出 其中实用的八种码； a、 前组全码、 b、 前组前简码、 C、 前组前后简码、 d、 前组前后简 码、 e、 后组全码、 f、 后组前简码、 g、 后组后简码和 h、 后组前后简码； 加码是由附加 字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加 码是指字母在前面的加码， 后加码是指字母在后面的加码， 前后加码是指字母在前面和 后面的加码； 单字码可组成多字码即词码； 二字词码是由单字码 +单字码组成的词码； 三 字词码是由单字码 +单字码 +单字码组成的； 四字词码是由单字码 +单字码 +单字码 +单字码 组成的词码； 多字词码是由多个单字码相加而成； 四字码词码是指码词为四个字的码词 码； 前组前简码是指输入四字码词码的第一个字并且分别取四个字的第一个拼音字母为 码的四字码词码； 字母码词码均为前组前简码； 以下七种优化方案适用于表意文字和拼 音文字以及各个语种大范围世界各语种用统一语言码方案； 中范围， 适用于中、 韩、 日 和越南 （字喃）语用统一语言码方案； 小范围， 适用于港、 澳、 台和新加波等地的繁体 字或简体字用统一语言码编码方案； 内码与外码统一用语言码编码方案； 计算机语言与 人文语言用统一编码方案； 实现一键一字、 一码元一字， 字替换成单词、 韩文字、 日文 字； 一级方案： 二字 （单词）数字语言码， 使用前组全码， 汉语输入方式， 特点是： 一 字一码， 输入字的二字码叫本码， 本词、 主码和字林无重码， 可以防止" zh和 Z "、 " ch 和 c" 、 " sh和 s " 以及 " eng和 ong"之间的混淆， 具体方法是： ①用二字前组全码作 码打前一个字， （1 ) 用单字码； （2 ) 用多字码即词码： a、 用二字词码， 即单字码 +单 字码， b、 用三字词码， 即单字码 +单字码 +单字码， c、 用四字词码， 即单字码 +单字码 + 单字码 +单字码， d、 用多字词码； ②用二字前组全码打前一个字， 然后用二字后组全码 + 数字 1作码打后一字； 用二字全码作码打这两个字； ③用二字前组全码 +数字 1作码打前 一字， 用二字后组全码 +数字 2作码打后一字； 用二字全码作码打这两个字； 二级方案： 二字 （单词） 简化数字语言码， 使用前组后简码、 后组前简码， 其中汉语， 特点是重码 用数字区分， 重码数不超过 10个， 无须翻屏； 一字一码， 无重码， 可以防止" zh和 z "、 " ch和 c"、 " sh和 s " 以及 " eng和 ong"之间的混淆； 具体方法是： （1 )用单字码； ( 2 )多字码即词码： a、 用二字词码， 即单字码 +单字码， b、 用三字词码， 即单字码 +单 字码 +单字码， c、 用四字词码， 即单字码 +单字码 +单字码 +单字码， d、 用多字词码； 三 级方案： 二字 （单词） 阴差阳错语言码简称二字输入法， 使用前组前简码， 即前组前后 简码、 后组后简码和前后组前后简码， 其中汉语， 特点是一字一码， 要输入的字只打第 一个字母， 不输入的字 （区分码）打全码， 无重码， 可以防止 " zh和 z " 、 "ch和 c " 、 " sh和 s "以及 "eng和 ong"之间的混淆； 四级方案： 三字 （单词）千理声似语言码， 简称一字输入法、 三字输入法、 千理输入法、 语言输入法， 声似输入法； 使用前三组前 简码、 前组前后简码和单简码， 汉语输入特点： ①输入字不用按空格键； ②一字千理声 似语言码共 25个， 二字千理声似语言码共 25 X 25=625个； ③一键一字、 一码元一字， 码元字以及码字码中的字又可称为虚似字贯彻一键一字， 只打不显示， 用码字码来编故 事， 易于学易于记忆； ④利用声母第一个字母相同， 发音相似的特性， ⑤最小单位是码 元字， 即由码词素、 码语素和码元字组成码语， 组成码词， 输入字母， 三字码词码或四 字码词码可称为码语码， ⑥实现整段、 整句或整篇输入； ⑦拆词； ⑧码元单词 （对于拼 音文字） ： （1 )用单字码： （2 )用多字码即词码； a、 用二字词码， 即单字码 +单字码； b、 用三字词码， 即单字码 +单字码 +单字码； c、 用四字词码， 即单字码 +单字码 +单字码 + 单字码； d、 用多字词码； 五级方案： 四字千理声似语言码简称四字输入法， 使用四前组 前简码、 不常用字编码、 手机输入、 数字键盘输入、 小键盘输入、 鼠标键盘输入； 具体 方法是： （1 )用单字码； （2 )用多字码即词码； a、 用二字词码， 即单字码 +单字码； b、 用三字词码， 即单字码 +单字码 +单字码； c、 用四字词码， 即单字码 +单字码 +单字码 +单 字码； d、 多字词码； 六级方案： 二字（单词）字母语言码， 使用字母码词码， 特种输入、 小键盘输入、 手机输入、 鼠标键盘输入； 与三字 （单词） 千理声似语言码结合； 七级方 案： 五字千理声似语言码简称五字输入法， 使用五前组前简码， 具体方法是： （1 )用单 字码; ( 2 ) 用多字码即词码： a、 用二字词码， 即单字码 +单字码； b、 用三字词码， 即 单字码 +单字码 +单字码； c、 用四字词码， 即单字码 +单字码 +单字码 +单字码； d、 用多字 词码； 一输一码： 一个码素输入一个待输入素； 一输多码： 一个码素输入多个待输入素； 多输一码： 多个码素输入一个待输入素； 多输少码： 多个码素输入较少待输入素； 多输 多码： 多个码素输入同样多个待输入素； 可多输更多码： 多个码素输入更多个待输入素； 语言码分为音语言码和形语言码； 音语言码是指打每一个码字素的第一个拼音字母； 形 语言码是指打每一个码字素的第一笔画， 打每一个码字素的第一个字根或部首； 实现用 少于 26个键， 即少于 26个笔画、 少于 26的字根或少于 26的部首表达汉字编码。 2. The language code input method according to claim 1, characterized in that: for ideographic Chinese, code morphemes can be words and pinyin letters; code word codes can be words, words and pinyin letters, that is, Chinese code word codes , Chinese code word code or Chinese code code, realize one word one key, one code element one word or one word one code, the keyboard adopts the international standard keyboard; the code element is 26 English letters; the code word code is based on the number of words It can be divided into three-character code, two-character code, four-character code, multi-character code, one-character code, and five-character code; the code-word code can be according to the number of characters to be input. Divided into: single-word code and multi-word code; single-word code refers to the code word code of one code word to enter one word; multi-word code refers to the code word code of one code word to enter multiple words or several code words The code word code is divided according to the position and order of the word in the code word: the former group code, the middle group code, the last group code; the former group code refers to the code word code in front; the middle group code refers to the word in the middle Code word code; the latter group code refers to the code word code behind the word; whether the code word code is simplified and simplified In the order of change, codeword codes can be divided into: shortcodes and full codes; can be divided into shortcodes and full codes; shortcodes are further divided into: front shortcodes, back shortcodes and front and back shortcodes; the front shortcode refers to the pair Simplified short code of the previous word; Simplified short code refers to the simplified code of the following words; Pre and post short codes refer to the simplified code of the preceding and following words; Full code refers to the code words without the simplified code; The word code word code refers to a code word code with three characters; the three word code word code can be divided into: single three word code and multiple three word code; single three word code refers to a three word code word The multi-word code refers to a three-word code word that enters multiple words or several three-word code words to enter multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the code word, the three-word code The code can be divided into the first group code, the middle group code and the last group code; the former group code refers to the three-character code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-character code word code in the middle; the latter group code is Refers to the three-character code word behind; according to the simplified code is a part of the full code, according to the former group code, the middle group code and the latter group code, three types of codes can be combined: a. Group shortcode, b. Short before the middle group c. Short before the last group of words; two-word code word code refers to two code words; single two-word code refers to a code word Enter a codeword code for one word; Multiple two-word code refers to a two-word codeword for entering multiple words or several codeword words for entering multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the codeword, you can Divided into: the first group code and the last group code; the former group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group code refers to the two-word code word code in the back; according to the short code, the full code is simplified According to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined; a, the former group full code, b, the former group short code, C, the former group short code, d, before Short code before and after group, e, full code after group, f, short code before group, g, short code after group and h, short code before and after group; plus code is a combination of additional letters and code word codes The plus code can be divided into: a. Pre-code, b. Post-code and c. Pre- and post-code; pre-code refers to the letter in front of the code, and post-code means the letter in the code. It refers to the letter in front of overweight and The following plus code; single-word code can be composed of multi-word code or word code; two-word word code is composed of single-word code + single-word code; three-word word code is composed of single-word code + single-word code + single-word code; four-word The word code is a word code consisting of a single word code + a single word code + a single word code + a single word code; a multi-word word code is a combination of multiple single word codes; a four-word code word code is a code of four words Word code; The pre-code of the previous group refers to the four-word code that enters the first word of the four-word code and takes the first pinyin letter of the four characters as the code; Former short code; The following seven optimization schemes are applicable to ideographic and pinyin characters and a wide range of unified language code schemes in various languages and languages in the world; Medium range, applicable to Chinese, Korean, Japanese, and Vietnamese (word ran) unified language Code scheme; small range, suitable for Hong Kong, Macao, Taiwan, Singapore and other places with traditional language or simplified characters using a unified language code encoding scheme; internal and external codes with a unified language code encoding scheme; computer language and human language with a unified encoding Solution; One key, one word, one symbol One word, the word is replaced with a word, a Korean character, a Japanese character; a first-level solution: a two-character (word) numeric language code, using the previous full code, a Chinese input method, which is characterized by: one character one code, two characters of the input character The code is called this code, and the word, main code, and word forest have no heavy codes, which can prevent the confusion between "zh and Z", "ch and c", "sh and s", and "eng and ong". The specific method is: ① Use the full code of the two-character group as the code to type the previous word. (1) Use a single-word code; (2) Use a multi-word code, that is, a word code: a. Use a two-word word code, that is, a single-word code + a single-word code, b, Use a three-character code, that is, a single-character code + a single-word code + a single-word code, c. Use a four-character code, that is, a single-word code + a single-word code + a single-word code + a single-word code, d, use a multi-word code; ② Use a two-word code Type the full word of the first group, and then type the next word with the full code of the two characters + the number 1; Type the last two characters of the two code with the full code; ③ Use the full code of the first two characters + the number 1 Make the code the first character, use the two characters after the full code + the number 2 as the code to make the last character; use the two characters to code the two characters; two-level solution: two characters (words) simplified Numeric language codes use the first group of short codes and the second group of short codes. Among them, the Chinese character is that the recodes are distinguished by numbers, and the number of recodes is not more than 10, and there is no need to turn the screen. One word, one code, without recodes, can prevent "zh And z "," ch and c "," sh and s ", and" eng and ong "; the specific methods are: (1) using single-word codes; (2) multi-word codes, that is, word codes: a, using Two-character code, namely single-character code + single-character code, b. Three-character code, that is single-character code + single-character code + single-character code, c . Four-character code, that is, single-character code + single-character code + single-character code + single-character code , D. Use multi-character word codes; Three-level scheme: Two-character (word) yin and yang wrong language code abbreviated two-word input method, using the previous group of short codes, that is, the previous group of short codes, the rear group of short codes, and The front and back groups of short codes, among them Chinese, are characterized by one word and one code. The word to be entered is only the first letter. The word that is not entered (differential code) is full code. There is no double code. It can prevent "zh and z", Confusion between "ch and c", "sh and s", and "eng and ong"; four-level scheme: three-character (word) sounds like language codes Abbreviated one-character input method, three-character input method, Qianli input method, language input method, sound input method; using the first three sets of front shortcodes, the front and back shortcodes and single shortcodes, Chinese input features: ① input characters No need to press the space bar; ② A total of 25 one-character sound-like language codes, a total of 25 X 25 = 625 one-character sound-like language codes; ③ One-key one-word, one-character, one-word, code-word and The characters in the codeword code can also be called imaginary words. One key and one word are implemented. Only type is not displayed. Use the codeword to compose the story, which is easy to learn and easy to remember. ④ Use the same initials of the initials and similar pronunciation ⑤ The minimum unit is a codeword, that is, a codeword consisting of a code morpheme, a code morpheme, and a codeword to form a codeword. Entering letters, three-word codewords or four-word codewordcodes can be called codeword codes, ⑥ Realize whole paragraph, whole sentence or whole input; ⑦ split words; ⑧ code meta-words (for Pinyin text): (1) using single-word codes: (2) using multi-word codes that are word codes; a, using two-word word codes , Namely single-word code + single-word code; b, using three-word word code, that is, single-word code + single-word code + single-word code; c. Use four-character code, that is, single-character code + single-character code + single-character code + single-character code; d. Use multi-character code; Five-level solution: Four-character sound-like sound language code abbreviation four-character input method, using four before Group short code, uncommon word code, mobile phone input, numeric keypad input, keypad input, mouse and keyboard input; the specific methods are: (1) use a single word code; (2) use a multi-word code, that is, a word code; a, use Two-character word code, that is, single-word code + single-word code; b. Three-word word code, that is, single-word code + single-word code + single-word code; c. Four-word word code, that is, single-word code + single-word code + single-word code + single-word code D. Multi-character word code; Six-level plan: Two-character (word) letter language code, use letter code word code, special input, keypad input, mobile phone input, mouse keyboard input; and three-word (word) Qian Lisheng Combination of language-like codes; Seven-level solution: Five-character sound-like language code for short-term five-word input method, using five groups of pre-codes. The specific methods are: (1) using single-word codes; (2) using multi-word codes. Word code: a. Use two-word word code, that is, single-word code + single-word code; b, use three-word code Code, i.e. code word + + code word code word; C, with the four code word, i.e. code word code word + + + code word code word; D, with multiword Word code; one input one code: one code element enters one to be input; one input multiple code: one code element enters multiple to be input elements; one more input one code: multiple code elements enter one to be input element; more input less Code: Multiple code elements input less to be input; Multiple input multiple codes: Multiple code elements input the same multiple to be input elements; More codes can be input more: Multiple code elements to enter more input elements; Language The code is divided into a phonetic language code and a shape language code; the phonetic language code refers to the first pinyin letter of each codeword; the shape language code refers to the first stroke of each codeword to type each codeword The first radical or radical of a prime; to realize the encoding of Chinese characters with less than 26 keys, that is, less than 26 strokes, less than 26 radicals, or less than 26 radicals.
3、根据权利要求 1所述的语言码输入法， 其特征是： 对于表意文字中的日语， 采用 日语码词码、 日语码字码、 日语码语码、 日语假名码和日语罗马字码， 实现一字一码、 一键一字和一码元一字； 其键盘采用国际标准键盘， 码元为 26个英文字母； 码词素可以 是日语汉字、 日语假名或日语罗马字； 码词码可以是日语汉字、 日语假名或日语罗马字； 码词码按照码词素个数分为： 三码词码、 二码词码、 四码词码、 一码词码和多码词码； 码词码按照码词素分为： 日语汉字码词码、 日语假名码词码、 日语罗马字码词码； 日语 汉字码词码可以用来输入汉字、 假名或罗马字； 日语假名码词码可以用来输入汉字、 假 名或罗马字； 日语罗马字码词码可以用来输入汉字、 假名或罗马字； 按照要输入的码词 素个数可分为： 单码词素码和多码词互码； 单码词素码是指一个码词输入一个码词素； 多码词素码是指一个码词输入多个码词素或向个码词输入多个码词素， 按照码词素在码 词中的位置和顺序可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指码词素在前面的码词 码； 中组码是指码词素在中间的码词码； 后组码是指码词素在后同的码词码； 按照码词 码是否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 可分为简码和全码； 简码又' 分可为前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对 前面的码词素简化的简码； 后简码是指对后面的码词素简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前 面、 后面的码词素简化的简码； 全码是指没有简化的码词码； 日语汉字码词码可分为假 名码词码和罗马字码词码； 三码词码可分为： 三日语汉字码词、 三假名码词码和三罗马 字码词码； 三日语汉字码词码是指日语汉字个数为三个的码词码； 三日语汉字码词码可 分为： 单三日语汉字码和多三日语汉字码； 单三日语汉字码是指用一个日语三字码词输 入一字的日语汉字码； 多三日语汉字码是指一个日语汉字输入多个字几个日语汉字码词 输入多个字的日语汉字码； 按照日语汉字在码词中的位置和顺序， 分为前组码、 中组码 和后组码； 前组码是指日语汉字在前面的三日语汉字码词码； 中组码是指日语汉字在中 间的三日语汉字码词码； 后组码是指字在后在的三日语汉字码词码； 按照简码所简化的 是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、中组码和后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码： 三日语字（三 假名、 三罗马字） 码词码、 四日语字 （假名、 罗马字）码词码和二日语汉字码词码； 三 日语字 (三假名、 三罗马字） 码词码可分为： 前组 （日语字、 假名、 罗马字）前简码、 中组 （FI语字、 假名、 罗马字）前简码和后组 （日语字、 假名、 罗马字）前简码； 四日 语字 （假名、 罗马字） 码词码； 二日语汉字码词码是指日语汉字个数为二个的码词码， 可分为单二日语汉字码和多二日语汉字码； 单二日语汉字码是指一个日语二字码词输入 一个字的二日语汉字码词码； 多二日语汉字码是指一个日语汉字码词输入多个字或多个 日语汉字码词输入多个字的二日语汉字码词码； 按照日语汉字在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指字在前面的二字码词码； 后组码是指字在后面的 二字码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组 合出其中实用的八种码， 二日语 （字， 假名， 罗马字） 码词码： a.前组全码、 b.前组单 词前简码、 c.前组前后简码、 d.前组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后 组单词后简码和 h.后组单词前后简码； 加码是由附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加 码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码 是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别在前面和后面的加码； 单字码可组成多 字码即词码； 二字词码是由单字码 +单字码组成的词码； 三字词码是由单字码 +单字码 +单 字码组成的； 四字词码是由单字码 +单字码 +单字码 +单字码组成的词码； 多字词码是由多 个单字码组成的词码； 四字码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码。 3. The language code input method according to claim 1, wherein: for Japanese in ideographic characters, Japanese code word code, Japanese code word code, Japanese code language code, Japanese kana code, and Japanese Roman code are used, Realize one word, one code, one key, one word, and one character per word. Its keyboard adopts international standard keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters. The code morpheme can be Japanese Kanji, Japanese Kana, or Japanese Roman characters. The code can be It is a Japanese Kanji, Japanese Kana, or Japanese Roman character; Codeword code is divided into three codeword codes, two codeword codes, four codeword codes, one codeword code, and multicode wordcodes according to the number of codeword morphemes; codeword code According to the code morphemes: Japanese Kanji code word code, Japanese kana code word code, Japanese Roman code word code; Japanese Kanji code word code can be used to enter Chinese characters, kana or Roman characters; Japanese kana code word code can be used to enter Chinese characters, kana or roman characters; Japanese roman code word codes can be used to input Chinese characters, kana or roman characters; according to the number of code morphemes to be entered, they can be divided into: single code morpheme codes and multicode word mutual codes; single A morpheme code refers to a codeword entering a code morpheme; a multi-code morpheme code refers to inputting multiple code morphemes into a codeword or entering multiple code morphemes into a codeword, and can be separated according to the position and order of the codeword in the codeword The former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the code word code with the code morpheme in front; the middle group code refers to the code word code with the code morpheme in the middle; the latter group code means the code morpheme in the middle The same codeword code; according to whether the codeword code is simplified and in the simplified order, the codeword code can be divided into: short code and full code; can be divided into short code and full code; short code can be divided into the previous short code , The short code and the short code before and after; the short code refers to the codeword code that simplifies the full code; the front shortcode means the short code that simplifies the previous code morpheme; the short code means the simplification of the code morpheme to the subsequent code Shortcodes; front and back shortcodes are shortcodes that simplify the front and back code morphemes; full codes are codewords that are not simplified; Japanese Kanji codeword codes can be divided into kana code word codes and roman code word codes; Three code word codes can be divided into: three Japanese kanji code words, three kana code word codes, and three roman code words ; Three Japanese Kanji code word codes refer to three Japanese Kanji code words; Three Japanese Kanji code word codes can be divided into: Single three Japanese Kanji codes and multiple three Japanese Kanji codes; Single three Japanese Kanji codes refer to Use one Japanese three-character code word to input one-character Japanese kanji code; Multi-three Japanese kanji code refers to one Japanese kanji to enter multiple characters, several Japanese kanji code words to enter multiple characters, Japanese kanji code; follow the Japanese kanji in the code word The position and order in the group are divided into the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code; the former group code refers to the three Japanese characters in the front of the Japanese Kanji code; the middle group code refers to the three Japanese characters in the middle of the Japanese Kanji Code word code; The last group code refers to the three-Japanese Kanji code word code after the word; The simplified code is a part of the full code, and can be combined according to the form of the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code. Three types of codes: three Japanese characters (three kana, three Roman characters) code word codes, four Japanese characters (kana, Roman characters) code word codes and two Japanese Kanji code word codes; three Japanese characters (three kana, three roman characters) ) Code words can be divided into: the former group (day Chinese characters, Kana, Roman characters) Pre-short code, Middle group (FI word, Kana, Roman) Pre-code and Post-code (Japanese, Kana, Roman) Pre-code; Four Japanese characters (Kana, Roman) ) Code word code; Two Japanese Kanji code word codes refer to two codeword codes of Japanese Chinese characters, which can be divided into single two Japanese kanji codes and multiple two Japanese kanji codes; single two Japanese kanji codes refer to one Japanese two Character code words: Enter two Japanese Kanji code word codes for one character. Multiple Japanese Kanji code refers to two Japanese Kanji code words for one Japanese Kanji code word or multiple Japanese Kanji code words. The position and order of Japanese Chinese characters in code words can be divided into: the first group code and the second group code; the former group code refers to the two-character code word before the word; the latter group code refers to the two-character code after the word Word code; according to the simplified code is a part of the full code, according to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, you can combine eight practical codes, two Japanese (word, kana, roman) code word code: a. Full code before group, b. Short code before group word, c. Before Pre and post short codes, d. Pre and post short codes, e. Post full codes, f. Post short codes, g. Post short codes and h. Post short codes; plus codes are added by The combination of letters and codewords can be divided into: a. Pre-code, b. Post-code, and c. Pre-code and pre-code; pre-code means the letter in front of the code; post-code means the letter in the code behind ; Pre- and post-adding means that the letters are added in front and behind respectively; Single word codes can be composed of multiple The word code is the word code; the two word word code is a word code consisting of single word code + single word code; the three word word code is composed of single word code + single word code + single word code; the four word word code is single word code + single word code + One-word code + one-word code; a multi-word word code is a word code consisting of multiple one-word codes; a four-word code word: the former short code; the alphabet code word code: the previous short code.
4、 根据权利要求 1所述的语言码输入法， 其特征是： 在对于表意文字中的韩语， 采 用韩语 （朝鲜语） 码词码、 韩语码字码、 韩语码语码、 韩语字母码和韩语拉丁字母码； 实现一字一码、 一键一字和一字一码元， 其键盘采用国际标准键盘， 码元为 26个英文字 母， 码词素可以是韩语汉字、 韩语字母、 韩语 （朝鲜语） 拉丁字母； 码词码可以是韩语 汉字、韩语字母和韩语罗马字母： 码词码按照码词素个数可分为： 三码词码、 二码词码、 四码词码、 一码词码和多码词码； 码词码按照码词素可分为： 韩语汉字码词码、 韩语字 母码词码和韩语罗马字母码词码； 韩语汉字码词码可以用来输入韩语汉字、 韩语字母和 韩语罗马字母； 韩语字母码词码可以用来输入韩语汉字、 韩语字母和韩语罗马字母； 韩 语（朝鲜语） 罗马字母码词码可以用来输入韩语汉字、 韩语字母和韩语罗马字母； 按照 要输入的码词素个数可分为： 单码词素码和多码词互码； 单码词素码是指一个码词输入 一个码词素； 多码词素码是指一个码词输入多个码词素或向个码词输入多个码词素； 按 照码词素在码词中的位置和顺序可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指码词素 在前面的码词码； 中组码词是指码词素在中间的码词码； 后组码是指码词素在后同的码 词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 可分为简码 和全码； 简码又可分为前简码、后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的码词素简化的简； 后简码是指对后面的码词素简化的简码； 前后简 码是指对前面和后面的码词素简化的简码； 全码是指没有简化的码词码； 韩语汉字码词 码可分为： 韩语字母码词码和韩语罗马字码词码； 三码词码可分为： 三韩语汉字码词、 三韩语字母码词码和三罗马字码词码； 三韩语汉字码词码是指韩语汉字个数为三个的码 词码； 三韩语汉字码词码可分为： 单三韩语汉字码和多三韩语汉字码； 单三韩语汉字码 是指一个韩语三字码词输入一字的码词码； 多三韩语汉字码是指一个韩语汉字输入多个 字或几个韩语汉字码词输入多个字的码词码； 按照韩语汉字在码词中的位置和顺序可分 为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指韩语汉字在前面的三韩语汉字码词码； 中组码是指韩 语汉字在中间的三韩语汉字码词码； 后组码是指字在后的三韩语汉字码词码； 按照简码 所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码： 三 韩语字 （韩语字母、 韩语拉丁字母）码词码、 四韩语字码词码和二韩语汉字码词码： 三 韩语字 （韩语字母、 韩语拉丁字母）码词码可分为： 前组韩语字 （韩语字母、 韩语拉丁 字母）前简码、 b、 中组韩语字（韩语字母、韩语拉丁字母）前简码和 c、后组韩语字（韩 语字母、 韩语拉丁字母） 前简码； 四韩语字码词码； 二韩语汉字码词码是指韩语汉字个 数为二个的码词码；单二韩语汉字码是指一个韩语二字码词输入一个字的二韩语汉字码; 多二韩语汉字码是指一个韩语汉字码词输入多个字或多个韩语汉字码词输入多个字的二 韩语汉字码； 按照韩语汉字在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码 是指字在前面的二字码词码； 后组码是指字在后面的二字码词码； 按照简码所简化的是 全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 后组码的形式， 可以组合出其中实用的八种二韩语字 （韩 语字母、 韩语拉丁字母） 码词码： a.前组全码、 b.前组前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组 前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由附 加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前 加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别在 前面和后面的加码； 单字码可组成多字码即词码； 二字词码是由单字码 +单字码组成的词 码； 三字词码是由单字码 +单字码 +单字码组成的； 四字词码是由单字码 +单字码 +单字码 + 单字码组成的词码； 多字词码是由多个单字码组成的词码； 四字码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； 4. The language code input method according to claim 1, wherein: for Korean in ideographic characters, Korean (Korean) code word code, Korean code word code, Korean code word code, Korean alphabet code and Korean Latin alphabet code; realizes one word, one code, one key, one word, and one word and one code element. Its keyboard adopts international standard keyboard. The code element is 26 English letters. The code morphemes can be Korean Chinese characters, Korean letters, Korean (Korea Language) Latin letters; codeword codes can be Korean Chinese characters, Korean letters, and Korean Roman letters: Codeword codes can be divided into three codeword codes, two codeword codes, four codeword codes, and one codeword according to the number of codeword morphemes. Codes and multi-code word codes; Code word codes can be divided into code words: Korean Chinese code word code, Korean alphabet code word code, and Korean Roman code word code; Korean Chinese code word code can be used to enter Korean Chinese characters, Korean letters And Korean Roman alphabets; Korean alphabet codewords can be used to enter Korean characters, Korean alphabets, and Korean Roman alphabets; Korean (Korean) Roman alphabet codewords can be used to enter Korean Chinese characters, Korean letters, and Korean Roman letters; According to the number of code morphemes to be entered, they can be divided into: single-code morpheme codes and multi-code word mutual codes; single-code morpheme codes refer to one code word and one code morpheme; multi-code morpheme codes It refers to inputting multiple code morphemes or multiple code morphemes into a code word. According to the position and order of code morphemes in the code words, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code and the latter group code; the former group The code refers to the code word code with the code morpheme in front; the middle group code word refers to the code word code with the code morpheme in the middle; the latter group code refers to the code word code with the code morpheme in the middle; whether the code word code is simplified and simplified The code word code can be divided into: short code and full code; can be divided into short code and full code; short code can be divided into front short code, post short code and front and back short code; short code refers to the full code Simplified codeword code; Pre-short code refers to the simplified code morpheme of the previous code; Post-short code refers to the simplified code simplification of the code morpheme of the following code; Pre- and short-code code refers to the simplification of the code morpheme of the front and back Short code; full code means no simplified code word code; Korean Chinese code word code can be divided : Korean letter code word code and Korean roman code word code; three code word codes can be divided into: three Korean character code words, three Korean letter code word codes and three Roman code word codes; three Korean character code word codes The number of Korean Chinese characters is three codeword codes; the three Korean character codeword codes can be divided into: single three Korean character codes and multiple three Korean character codes; single three Korean character codes refer to one Korean three-character code word Multi-Korean Chinese character code refers to the codeword code where one Korean character enters multiple characters or several Korean character codewords enter multiple characters; according to the position and order of Korean characters in the codeword, it can be divided into: The first group code and the last group code; the first group code refers to the three Korean character code words in front of the Korean character; the middle group code refers to the three Korean character code word codes in the middle of the Korean character; the last group code refers to the word after Three-Korean Chinese character code word code; according to the simplified code is a part of the full code, according to the form of the first group code, the middle group code and the last group code, three codes can be combined: three Korean characters (Korean letters, Korean Latin alphabet) code word code, four Korean code words Code and two Korean characters code word code: three Korean characters (Korean alphabet, Korean Latin alphabet) code word codes can be divided into: the first group of Korean characters (Korean alphabet, Korean Latin alphabet) before the short code, b, the middle group of Korean characters ( Korean letters, Korean Latin letters) before the short code and c, after the group of Korean characters (Korean letters, Korean Latin letters) before the short code; four Korean character code word code; two Korean Chinese character code word code means that the number of Korean Chinese characters is two Codes of single Chinese characters; Single-Korean Chinese character codes refer to two Korean Chinese character codes of one Korean character word; Multiple-Korean Chinese character codes refer to one Korean Chinese character code word to input multiple characters or multiple Korean Chinese character codes Enter the two-Korean Chinese character code of the word; according to the position and order of the Korean Chinese character in the code word, it can be divided into: the former group code and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; The last group code refers to the two-character code word followed by the word; according to the simplified code, it is a part of the full code, and according to the form of the first group code and the last group code, eight practical two Korean characters can be combined ( Korean letters, Korean Latin characters ) Code word code: a. Full code before group, b. Short code before group, c. Short code before group, d. Short code before group, e. Full code group after, f. Short group code before , G. Post group short code and h. Post group short code before and after; plus code is a combination of additional letters and code word codes, plus code can be divided into: a. Before plus code, b. Plus code and c. Before and after Plus code; the plus code refers to the letter in front of the code; the latter code means the letter to the code in the back; the plus code means the letter in the front and the code respectively; the single-word code can form a multi-word code, which is a word code; a two-word code Is a word code consisting of a single word code + a single word code; a three word word code is composed of a single word code + a single word code + a single word code; a four word word code is a word code consisting of a single word code + single word code + single word code + single word code Multi-word word code is a word code composed of multiple single-word codes; Four-word code words: the former short code before the group; Letter code word code: short code before the previous group;
5、 根据权利要求 1所述的语言码输入法， 其特征是： 对于拼音文字， 码词素为单词 和字母； 码词码为单词和字母； 码词码可以用来输入单词和字母， 即拼音文字码词码， 码词码又叫码单词码、 码语码和码字母码； 实现一单词一码、 一码元一单词或一键一单 词； 其键盘釆用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母； 字母是本国语或本国语字母对 应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码 词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 按照要输入单词的个数， 码词码可分为： 单单词 码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个码词 输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序可分 为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词在中 间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 可分为简码和全码； 简码又分可为前简码、 后简码和前后 简码； 简码是指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面、 后面的单词进行简化 的简码； 全码是指没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三 单词码词码可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一 个单词的三单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入 多个单词的三单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 多三单词码可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三 单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部 分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中 组单词前简码和 c.后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词的个数为二个的码词码； 二 单词码词码可分为： 单二单词码和多二单词码； 单二单词码是指一个二单词码输入一个 单词的码词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单词码词输入多 个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 多二单词码可分为： 前组码和后组 码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合出其中实用 的八种码： a.前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组前后简码、 d.前组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组单词前后简码； 加码是由附加 字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加 码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别在前 面和后面的加码； 四 （五）单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码；  5. The language code input method according to claim 1, wherein: for pinyin text, code morphemes are words and letters; code word codes are words and letters; code word codes can be used to input words and letters, that is, pinyin Text code word code, code word code is also called code word code, code language code and code letter code; realize one word, one code, one symbol, one word, or one key, one word; the keyboard uses an international universal keyboard, and the code element is 2 6 English letters; The letters are the Latin letters corresponding to the native language or the native language letters; The codeword codes can be divided according to the number of words: three-word codeword code, two-word codeword code, four-word codeword code, one word Code word code and multi-word code word code; According to the number of words to be entered, the code word code can be divided into: single word code and multi-word code; single word code refers to a code word to enter a word code word code; multiple The word code refers to the codeword code where one codeword enters multiple words or several codewords enter multiple words; according to the position and order of the words in the codeword, it can be divided into: the front group code, the middle group code and the last group code ; The former group code refers to the single The codeword code in the front; the codeword in the middle group refers to the codeword code with the word in the middle; the code in the latter group refers to the codeword code with the word in the back; according to whether the codeword code is simplified and in the simplified order, the codeword code can be divided into : Short code and full code; can be divided into short code and full code; short code can be divided into front short code, post short code and front and back short code; short code refers to the code word code that simplifies the full code; The code refers to the simplified code that simplifies the previous word; the short code refers to the simplified code that simplifies the following words; the front and back short codes refer to the simplified code that simplifies the previous and following words; the full code means no Simplified code word code; Three word code word code refers to a code word code with three words; Three word code word codes can be divided into: single three word codes and multiple three word codes; single three word codes refer to one Enter a three-word code for one word for a three-word code word; A multi-three-word code refers to a three-word code for a three-word code word to enter multiple words or several three-word codes to enter multiple words; according to the position of the word in the code word And order, the three-word code can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group The first group code refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the second group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word ； What is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code. According to the form of the former group code, the middle group code and the latter group code, three kinds of codes can be combined: a. Before the group of words before the short code, b. Before the group of words Shortcodes and c. Shortcodes before the next group of words; Two-word code word codes refer to two-word codes; two-word code word codes can be divided into: single-two-word codes and multiple-two-word codes; A single two-word code refers to a two-word code that enters a single word code; a multiple two-word code refers to a two-word code word that enters multiple words or several two-word code words to enter multiple words; according to The position and order of the words in the code word, the two-word code can be divided into: the first group code and the second group code; the first group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the second group code refers to the word in the back Two-word code word code; what is simplified according to the short code is part of the full code, according to the previous group code and The form of the group code can be combined into eight practical codes: a. Full code before the group, b. Short code before the group of words, c. Short code before and after the group, d. Short code before and after the group, e. Full code of the back group, f. Short code of the back group, g. Short code of the back group words, and h. Short code of the back group words; plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes. The plus code can be divided into : A. Pre-code, b. Post-code, and c. Pre-code and post-code; Pre-code refers to the code plus in front of the letter; Post-code code refers to the plus code in the back of the letter; (5) Word code: short code before the group; letter code: short code before the group;
6、 根据权利要求 1或 5所述的语言码输入法， 其特征是： 对于拼音文字中的英语， 码词素为単词或字母； 码词码是单词或字母即英语码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母； 字母是本国语或本国语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词 个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码 词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码 词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单 词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 码词码可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组 码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单 词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码; 简码又可分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简 码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后 简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码 是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单 词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输 入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词码；按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 三单词码可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照 简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； （1 )三单词码词输入方式： ①单 词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c.后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码 是指单词个数为 2个的码词码；单二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词的码词 码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 多二单词码可分为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是 指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简 化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f. 后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由附加字母与码词码组合而 成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的 加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别在前面和后面的加码； 包 括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前加码； 四单词码词码： 前组 前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； 6. The language code input method according to claim 1 or 5, characterized in that: for English in Pinyin text, the code morpheme is a slang word or a letter; the code word code is a word or letter, that is, an English code word code; and a keyboard thereof Use international keyboard, the code element is 2 6 English letters; the letters are Latin letters corresponding to the native language or the national language letters; the code word code can be divided into three word code word code, two word code word code, Four-word code word code, one-word code word code, and multi-word code word code; Code word codes can be divided according to the number of words to be entered: single-word code and multi-word code; single-word code refers to one code word and one word Multi-word code refers to the code word code where one code word enters multiple words or several code words enters multiple words; According to the position and order of words in the code word, the code word codes can be divided into: Group code, middle group code and last group code; the first group code refers to the code word code of the word in front; the middle group code refers to the code word code of the word in the middle; the last group code refers to the code word code of the word after; According to whether the code word code is simplified and the order of simplification The codeword codes can be divided into: shortcodes and full codes; shortcodes can be divided into: shortcodes before, shortcodes, and shortcodes before and after; shortcodes are codeword codes that simplify the full code; Refers to the simplified code that simplifies the previous word; Post-simplified code refers to the simplified code that simplifies the following words; Pre- and post-code refers to the simplified code that simplifies the preceding and following words; Full-code means that there is no simplified Code word code It refers to a three-word code word code; three-word code word code can be divided into single three-word code and multiple three-word code; single three-word code refers to a three-word code word into a three-word code; Multiple three-word codes refer to three-word codes where one three-word code word enters multiple words or several three-word codes enter multiple words; according to the position and order of the words in the code words, the three-word codes can be divided into: The first group code refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the second group code refers to the three word code in the middle Word code Word code; The simplified code is a part of the full code, and three types of codes can be combined according to the form of the front group code, the middle group code, and the rear group code; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard and follow the mainstream. Standard correspondence; (1) Three-word code word input method: ① Word input code: a. Pre-code for the first group of words, b. Pre-code for the middle group of words, and c. Pre-code for the next group of words; two-word code The code is a code word code with two words; the single-two word code means one Enter a codeword code for one word for each two-word codeword; A multiword codeword refers to a codeword code for multiple words or several two-word codewords for multiple words; a word in the codeword The position and order of the two-word code can be divided into: the former group code and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group code refers to the two-word code word code in the back word ; The simplified code is a part of the full code, and according to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined: a. The previous group full code, b. The previous group of words before the short code, c. short codes before and after the group, d short codes before and after the group, e. full codes after the group, f. short codes before the group, g. short codes after the group and h. short codes before and after the group; plus code It is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes. Codes can be divided into: a. Pre-code, b. Post-code, and c. Pre- and post-code; pre-code refers to the letter in front of the code; post-code means the letter in the The following plus code; before and after plus code refers to the letter in front and after the plus code respectively; including: ing plus code, er plus Code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in code before; four-word code word code: short code before the group; letter code word: short code before the group;
对于拼音文字中的阿尔巴尼亚语， 码词素为单词或字母； 码词码是单词或字母， 即 阿尔巴尼亚语码词码； 其键盘釆用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国 语或本国语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词. 码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可 分为： 单单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码 是指一个码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位 置和顺序， 多单词码可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词 码； 中组码是指单词在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是 否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又可分为： 前简码、 后简码 和前后简码； 简码是指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的 简码； 后简码是指对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词进 行简化的简码； 全码是指没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词 码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词 输入一个单词的三单词码词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三 单词码输入多个单词的三单词码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三 单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部 分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； （1 )三单词码词输入方式； ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前 简码； b.中组单词前简码和 c.后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码 词码； 单二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码词码； 多二单词码是指 一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码词码； 按照单 词在码词中的位置和顺序， 多二单词码可分为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前 面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码 的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码； a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加 码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码 是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母 码词码： 前组前简码； For Albanian in Pinyin, the code morpheme is a word or letter; the code word code is a word or letter, that is, the Albanian code word code; the keyboard uses an international universal keyboard, the code element is 26 English letters, and the letter is this Latin letters corresponding to Mandarin or native Mandarin letters; Codeword codes can be divided into three-word codeword words, two-word words. Codeword codes, four-word codeword codes, one-word codeword codes, and multi-word codewords according to the number of words. Codes; codeword codes can be divided into single word codes and multiple word codes according to the number of words to be entered; single word codes refer to codeword codes in which one codeword enters one word; multiword codes refer to one codeword in which multiple words are entered. Enter the codeword code of multiple words for several words or several codewords. According to the position and order of words in the codeword, multi-word codes can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to The codeword code in front of the word; the middle code refers to the codeword in the middle of the word; the latter code refers to the codeword in the back of the word; according to whether the codeword code is simplified and in the simplified order, the codeword code can be divided For: Shortcodes and Full Codes Shortcodes can be further divided into: shortcodes before, shortcodes, and shortcodes before and after; shortcodes are codeword codes that simplify the full code; former shortcodes are shortcodes that simplify the previous word; The code refers to the simplified short code for the following words; the front and back short codes refer to the simplified short code for the preceding and following words; the full code refers to the codeword code without simplification; the three-word code wordcode refers to the word The number is three codeword codes; three-word codeword codes can be divided into: single-three-word codes and multiple-three-word codes; single-three-word codes refer to a three-word codeword that enters a single-word three-word codeword; multiple The three-word code refers to a three-word code word that enters multiple words or several three-word codes that enter multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the code word, it is divided into: the first group code, middle Group code and last group code; The first group code refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the last group code refers to the three-word code word in the back Code; simplified according to the short code is part of the full code, according to the previous group Three types of codes can be combined in the form of the middle group code and the last group code. The letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard and follow the mainstream common standard correspondence. (1) Three-word code word input method; ① Word input code: a. The short code before the first group of words; b. The short code before the middle group of words and c. The short code before the second group of words; the two-word code word code refers to a code word code with two words; the single-two word code refers to a Two-word code word Enter a two-word code word of a word; Multiple two-word code refers to a two-word code word that inputs multiple words or several two-word code words that input multiple words. According to the word in For the position and order of the code words, the two-word code can be divided into: the first group code and the second group code; the first group code refers to the two-word code word before the word; the second group code refers to the second word after the word Code word code; according to the simplified code is a part of the full code, according to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined; a. The former group of full code, b. short code before the group of words, c. short code before the group, d. short code before and after the group, e. full code after the group, f. short code before the group, g. short code after the group and h. Short code before and after the group; plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes. The plus code can be divided into: a. pre-code, b. post-code and c. pre-code; The post-addition refers to the addition of the letter at the back; the pre- and post-addition refers to the addition of the letter before and after the letter; including: ing plus, er plus, est plus, ly plus, ed plus and in before; four-word code Word code: short code before the group; letter code: short code before the group;
对于拼音文字中的阿泽里语（拉丁字母， 西里尔字母） ， 码词素为单词或字母； 码 词码是单词或字母， 即阿泽里语码词码， 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文 字母； 字母是本国语或本国语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单 词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照 要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的 码词码； 多单词码是指一个码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照 单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前 面的码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照 码词码是否简化以及简化的顺序， 可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又可分为： 前简码、 后简 码和前后简码； 简码是指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化 的简码； 后简码是指对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词 简化的简码； 全码是指没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入 一个单词的三单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输 入多个单词的三单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和 后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词 码； 后组码是指单词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照 前组码、 中组码和后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流 通用标准对应关系； （1 )三单词码词输入方式； ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b. 中组单词前简码和 c.后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单 二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单 词码词输入多个单词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码词码； 按照单词在码词 中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组 码和后组码的形式， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码 和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加 码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的 加码； 前后加码是指字母分别在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加 码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前 简码；  For Azeri (Latin, Cyrillic) in Pinyin, the code morpheme is a word or letter; the code word code is a word or letter, that is, the Azeri code word code, and its keyboard uses an international universal keyboard. The element is 2 6 English letters; the letters are the Latin letters corresponding to the native language or the native language letters; the codeword codes can be divided into three words: two words, two words, four words, One-word code word code and multi-word code word code; The code word code can be divided according to the number of words to be entered: single-word code and multi-word code; single-word code refers to a code word to enter a word code word code; multiple The word code refers to the code word code in which one code word enters multiple words or several code words enters multiple words. According to the position and order of words in the code word, it can be divided into: front group code, middle group code, and rear group The first group code refers to the codeword code of the word in front; the middle group code refers to the codeword code of the word in the middle; the second group code refers to the codeword code of the word after; whether it is simplified and simplified according to the codeword code The sequence can be divided into: And full code; shortcodes can be further divided into: shortcodes before, shortcodes, and shortcodes before and after; shortcodes are codeword codes that simplify the fullcodes; shortcodes are shortcodes that simplify the preceding words Code; the short code refers to the simplified code of the following words; the front and back short codes refers to the simplified code of the preceding and following words; the full code refers to the codeword code without simplification; the three-word code wordcode is Refers to three-word code words; three-word code words can be divided into: single three-word code and multiple three-word code; single three-word code refers to a three-word code word into a three-word code; A multi-three-word code refers to a three-word code that inputs multiple words or several three-word codes to input multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the code word, it can be divided into: the former group code, middle Group code and last group code; The first group code refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the last group code refers to the three-word code word in the back The code simplified according to the short code is part of the full code. The form of group code, middle group code and back group code can be combined into three types of codes; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard, and obey the mainstream universal standard correspondence; (1) Three-word code word input method; ① Word input code: a. before the group of words before the short code, b. before the group of words before the short code and c. after the group of words before the short code; two-word code word code refers to the number of words 2 code word code; single two-word code is Refers to a two-word code word to enter a two-word code word code; Multiple two-word code refers to a two-word code word to enter multiple words or several two-word code words to enter multiple words of two-word code word; The position and order of the words in the codeword can be divided into: the first group code and the second group code; the first group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the last group code refers to the two-word code word in the back word The code simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code. According to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined: a. The previous group full code, b. The previous group of words before the short code , C. Short code before and after group, d. Short code before and after group word, e. Full code after group f. short codes before the group, g. short codes after the group of words and h. short codes before and after the group; plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes, plus code can be divided into: a. before plus code, b. Post-addition and c. Pre- and post-addition; Pre-addition refers to the addition of letters in front; Back-addition refers to the addition of letters in front and back; Including: ing-addition and er-addition , Est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in before plus code; Four-word code word code: short code before the group; letter code word code: short code before the group;
对于拼音文字中的爱沙尼亚语， 码词素为单词或字母； 码词码是单词或字母； 码词 码可以用来输入单词和字母， 即爱沙尼亚语码词码； 其键盘釆用国际通用标准键盘， 码 元为 26个英文字母， 字母是本国语字母或本国语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词 个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码 词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码 词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单 词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前 组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后 面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为简码和全码； 简码又 可分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指 对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是 指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单 词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码 是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多 个单词或几个三单词码词输入多单词的三单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 多 三单词码可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照 简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应关系， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； 三单词码词输入方式， ①单 词输入码： a.前组单词前简码 、 b.中组单词前简码和 c.后组单词前简码； 二单词码词 码是指单词个数为二个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入一个单词的二单 词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词的 二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指单 词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的 是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码： a.前组 全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前后简码 、 e.后组全码、 f.后组 前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由附加字母与码词码组合而成的 编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing 加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； For Estonian in Pinyin, code morphemes are words or letters; code word codes are words or letters; code word codes can be used to enter words and letters, that is, Estonian code word codes; their keyboards use international standard keyboards, The code element is 26 English letters, and the letters are the native alphabet or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet. The codeword code can be divided into three words: two words, two words, and four words. , One-word code word code and multi-word code word code; The code word code can be divided according to the number of words to be entered: single-word code and multi-word code; single-word code refers to a code word to enter a word code word code; A multi-word code refers to a code word code in which one code word enters multiple words or several code words enters multiple words. According to the position and order of words in the code word, it can be divided into: front group code, middle group code, and after Group code The group code refers to the code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the code word code in the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and the simplified order, the code Word codes can be divided into short codes and full codes; short codes can also be divided into: front short codes, post short codes, and front and back short codes; short codes refer to code word codes that simplify the full code; the former short codes refer to Simplified shortcodes for previous words; Simplified shortcodes for simplified words; Simplified shortcodes for simplified words for preceding and following words; Full codes for codewords without simplified codes ; Three-word code word code refers to three-word code words; Three-word code word codes can be divided into: single three-word code and multiple three-word code; single three-word code refers to a three-word code word input A three-word code for one word; a multi-three-word code refers to a three-word code that enters multiple words or a few three-word code words and enters a multi-word three-word code; according to the position and order of the words in the code word, more than three Word codes can be divided into: front group code, middle group code and after group code; The code refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; Part of the full code, three types of codes can be combined according to the form of the front group code, the middle group code, and the back group code; the correspondence between letters and keys on the keyboard is subject to the mainstream universal standard correspondence; the three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a. Before the short word of the group of words, b. Before the short word of the group of words and c. Before the short word of the next group of words; two-word code word code refers to the code word code of two words; Single two-word code refers to a two-word code where one two-word code word enters one word; Multiple two-word code refers to a two-word code where one two-word code word enters multiple words or several two-word code words enter multiple words; According to the position and order of the words in the codeword, it can be divided into: the first group code and the second group code; the first group code refers to the two-word code word before the word; the last group code refers to the two-word code after the word Word code; simplified by the short code is part of the full code According to the form of the front group code and the back group code, eight practical codes can be combined: a. The full code of the previous group, b. The short code of the previous group of words, c. The short code of the previous group, d. The previous group Short code before and after the word, e. Full code after the group, f. Short code before the group, g. Short code after the group of words and h. Short code before and after the group; plus code is a combination of additional letters and code word codes Coding and plus code can be divided into: a. Pre-code, b. Post-code and c. Pre-code and post-code; pre-code refers to the code plus in front of the letter; post-code refers to the code plus in the back; And subsequent plus codes; including: ing plus code, er plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code, and in plus code; four-word code word code: pre-group short code; alphabet code word code: pre-group short code;
对于拼音文字中的巴斯克语， 码词素为单词或字母； 码词码是单词或字母， 即巴斯 克语码词码； 其键盘釆用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国 语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单 单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个 码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码；按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 多单词码可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码 是指单词在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及 简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码 是指对后面的单词进行简化的简码；前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词进行简化的简码; 全码是指没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词 码可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的 三单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词 的三单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 字 母与键盘上各键对应关系， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； （1 )三单词码词输入方式， ① 单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c.后组单词前简码； 二单词码词 码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入一个单词的二单 词码词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单词码词输入多个单 词的二单词码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码和后组码； 前组 码数字单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单词码词码； 按照前组 码和后组码的形式， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码； a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码 和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加 码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的 加码； 前后加码是指字母分别在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加 码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前 简码； For Basque in Pinyin, the code morpheme is a word or letter; the code word is a word or letter, that is, the Basque code word code; the keyboard uses an international universal keyboard, and the code element is 2 6 English letters, letters It is the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native language or native alphabet; The codeword code can be divided into three words: three-word code, two-word code, four-word code, one-word code, and multi-word code. Codewords; Codewordcodes can be divided according to the number of words to be entered: single-word code and multiple-word codes; single-word codes refer to a codeword that enters a word; multiple-word codes refer to a codeword that enters multiple words Enter the codeword code of multiple words for several words or several codewords. According to the position and order of words in the codeword, multiword codes can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code is It refers to the codeword code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the codeword code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the codeword code in the back of the word; according to whether the codeword code is simplified and the simplified order, the codeword code can be Divided into: short code and full code; short code is divided For: pre-short code, post-short code, and pre- and post-short codes; short code refers to the code word code that simplifies the full code; pre-short code refers to the short code that simplifies the previous word; post-short code refers to the back The simplified shortcodes of the words; the shortcodes before and after refers to the simplified shortcodes of the words before and after; the full code refers to the codeword code without simplification; the three-word codewordcode means that the number of words is three Code word code; Three word code word code can be divided into: single three word code and multiple three word code; single three word code refers to a three word code word to enter a three word code; multiple three word code refers to a three word code Word code: Enter multiple words or several three-word codes. Enter three-word codes of multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the code words, they can be divided into: the front group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. Correspondence with the keys on the keyboard, subject to the mainstream universal standard correspondence; (1) Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a. The pre-code of the previous group of words, b. The pre-code of the middle group of words, and c. The short code before the next group of words; the two-word code is the number of words Two codeword codes; a single two-word code refers to a two-word codeword that enters a word in a two-word codeword; a multiple-two-word code refers to a two-word codeword that enters multiple words or several two-word codewords Enter the two-word code word code of multiple words; according to the position and order of the words in the code word, it can be divided into: the former group code and the latter group code; the former group code The two-word code word code in front of the code number word; the last group code refers to the two word code word code in the back of the word; according to the form of the first group code and the second group code, eight practical codes can be combined; a. Full code in front group, b. Short code in front group, c. Short code in front group, d. Short code in front group, e. Full code in back group, f. Short code in front group, g. Back group The short code after the word and h. The short code before and after the group; plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes. The plus code can be divided into: a. Pre-code, b. Post-code and c. Pre-code; Refers to the plus of the letter in front; The plus of the post means the plus of the letter in the back; the plus and minus means the plus of the letter in front and behind respectively; including: ing plus, er plus, est plus, ly plus, e d plus, and in Pre-code; Four-word code: Code before the previous group; Letter code: Code before the previous group;
对于拼音文字中的白俄罗斯语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即白 俄罗斯语码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或 本国语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词 码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一 个码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺 序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指 单词在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化 的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码 是指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指 对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是 指没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分 为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词 码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单 词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是 指单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单 词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和 后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； ( 1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c. 后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二 单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几 个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前 组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单 词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合 出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前 后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由 附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别 在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前 加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码；  For Belarusian in Pinyin, code morphemes are words and letters; code word codes are words and letters, that is, Belarusian code word codes; its keyboard uses international keyboards, and the code element is 26 English letters, and the letters are national languages. Or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; the codeword code can be divided into three word codeword codes, two word codeword codes, four word codeword codes, one word codeword codes, and multiword code wordcodes according to the number of words; Codeword codes can be divided into single word codes and multiple word codes according to the number of words to be input; single word codes refer to the codeword codes for one codeword and one word; multiword codes refer to the multiple words or codewords for one codeword. Enter several codeword codewords for several codewords; according to the position and order of the words in the codewords, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the code in front of the word Word code; the middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the code word code in the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and the order of simplification, the code word code can be divided into: short code and Full code Divided into: before short code, after short code and before and after short code; short code refers to the code word code to simplify the full code; before short code refers to the short code to simplify the previous word; after short code refers to the Simplified short codes for the following words; short codes before and after refer to the simplified codes for the preceding and following words; full codes refer to the code words without simplification; three-word codes are three words Code word code; Three word code word code can be divided into: single three word code and multiple three word code; single three word code refers to a three word code word to enter a three word code; multiple three word code refers to a three word code Enter multiple words or several three-word codes into a three-word code of a word code. According to the position and order of words in the code word, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code. The group code refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; simplified according to the short code It is part of the full code. In the form of group codes, three types of codes can be combined; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard, and obey the mainstream common standard correspondence; (1) three-word code word input method, ① word input code: a. The previous short code of the group of words , B. The short code before the middle group of words and c. The short code before the second group of words; the two-word code word code refers to the code number of two words; the single-two word code refers to a two-word code word enter one A two-word code of a word; A multi-word code refers to a two-word code where one two-word code word enters multiple words or several two-word code words enter multiple words; according to the position and order of the words in the code word, it can be divided into For the first group code and the last group code; the first group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the second group code refers to the two-word code word code in the back word; the full code is simplified according to the short code In one part, according to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined: a. The former group full code, b. The former group of short codes, c. The former group of short codes, d. Short code before and after group of words, e. Full code after group, f. Short code before group, g. Word after group Post-code and h. Post-group code before and after; code is a combination of additional letters and codeword code, code can be divided into: a. Pre-code, b. Post-code and c. Pre-code; Refers to the plus of the letter in the front; The plus refers to the plus of the letter at the back; the plus and minus refers to the plus of the letter in front and back respectively; including: ing plus, er plus, est plus, ly plus, ed plus, and in plus Four-word code word code: short code before the group; letter code word code: short code before the group;
对于拼音文字中的保加利亚语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即保 加利亚语码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或 本国语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词 码、 四单词码词码、一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一 个码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺 序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指 单词在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化 的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码 是^对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指 对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是 指没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分 为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词 码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单 词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是 指单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单 词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和 后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系；For Bulgarian in Pinyin, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code words are words and letters, that is, the Bulgarian code word codes; the keyboard uses an international keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters, and the letters are national languages. Or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; the codeword codes can be divided into three-word codeword codes, two-word codewordcodes, four-word codewordcodes, one-wordcodewordcodes and multi-wordcodewordcodes according to the number of words; Codeword codes can be divided into single word codes and multiple word codes according to the number of words to be input; single word codes refer to the codeword codes for one codeword and one word; multiword codes refer to the multiple words or codewords for one codeword. Several codewords Enter the codeword code of multiple words; according to the position and order of the words in the codeword The order can be divided into: the first group code, the middle group code and the last group code; the former group code refers to the code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the word The following codeword codes; According to whether the codeword codes are simplified and in the simplified order, the codeword codes can be divided into: shortcodes and full codes; shortcodes are further divided into: shortcodes before, shortcodes, and shortcodes before and after; The code is ^, which is a simplified codeword code for the full code; the front shortcode is the shortcode that simplifies the previous word; the shortcode is the shortcode that simplifies the subsequent words; the front and back shortcodes are the front And the following simplified words; full code means no simplified code word code; three-word code word code refers to three code words; three-word code word codes can be divided into: single three words Code and multiple three-word code; single three-word code refers to a three-word code word to enter a three-word code; multiple three-word code refers to a three-word code word to enter multiple words or several three-word codes to enter multiple The three-word code of a word; according to the position and order of the words in the code word, it can be divided into The first group code, the middle group code and the last group code; the first group code refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the last group code refers to the word in the back The three-word code word code; according to the simplified code is a part of the full code, according to the form of the first group code, the middle group code and the last group code, three types of codes can be combined; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard, obey Correspondence between mainstream common standards;
( 1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c. 后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二 单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几 个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前 组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单 词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合 出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前 后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由 附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别 在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前 加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； (1) Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a. Short code before the group of words, b. Short code before the group of words, and c. Short code before the group of words; two-word code means the word The number of two codeword codes is single; the two-word code refers to a two-word codeword inputting a two-word code; the multi-word code refers to a two-word codeword inputting multiple words or several two-word codes. Enter the two-word code of multiple words according to the position and order of the words in the code word, which can be divided into: the former group code and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group The code refers to the two-word code behind the word; according to the simplified code, it is a part of the full code. According to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined: a . Full code, b. Short code before the group of words, c. Short code before the group, d. Short code before and after the group, e. Full code after the group, f. Short code before the group, g. After group of words Shortcodes and h. Shortcodes before and after the group; pluscode is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes. The pluscode can be divided into: a. , B. Post-addition and c. Pre- and post-addition; pre-addition refers to the addition of the letter in front; post-addition refers to the addition of the letter at the back; front-end addition refers to the addition of the letter in front and back respectively; Plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in code; four-word code word code: short code before the group; letter code word: short code before the group;
对于拼音文字中的冰岛语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即冰岛语 码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国语字 母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单 词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词 码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个码词 输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可 分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词在 中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全 码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后面的 单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没有简 化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三 '单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三 单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词码； 按 照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 多三单词码可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码 是指单词在^面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指 单词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码 和后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关 系； （1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码.、 b.中组单词前简码 和 c.后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一 个二单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词 或几个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二 单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组 合出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词 前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是 由附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别 在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前 加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； For Icelandic in Pinyin, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code words are words and letters, that is, Icelandic code word codes; the keyboard is an international keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters, and the letters are national languages. Or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; the codeword code can be divided into three word codeword codes, two word codeword codes, four word codeword codes, one word codeword codes, and multiword code wordcodes according to the number of words; Codeword codes can be divided into single word codes and multiple word codes according to the number of words to be input; single word codes refer to the codeword codes for one codeword and one word; multiword codes refer to the multiple words or codewords for one codeword. Enter several codeword codewords for several codewords; according to the position and order of the words in the codewords, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the code in front of the word Word code; the middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the code word code in the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and the order of simplification, the code word code can be divided into: short code and Full code; short code is divided into: former short code Short code and short code before and after; short code refers to the code word code that simplifies the full code; pre-short code refers to the short code that simplifies the previous word; post short code refers to the simplification of the subsequent word Code; short-code before and after refers to the simplified code of the preceding and following words; full code refers to the codeword code without simplification; three-word code wordcode refers to the codeword code of three words; three-word code Word codes can be divided into: single three 'word code and multiple three word code; single three word code refers to a three word code word to enter a single word; multiple three word code refers to a three word code word to enter multiple Word or several three-word codes Enter the three-word codes of multiple words; According to the position and order of the words in the code words, the multiple three-word codes can be divided into: the front group code, the middle group code and the last group code; the front group code It refers to the three-word code word code of the word on the ^ face; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code of the word in the middle; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word code of the word behind; according to the short code, it is simplified Part of the full code, in the form of the first group code, the middle group code and the last group code Three types of codes can be combined; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard and obey the mainstream universal standard correspondence; (1) three-word code word input methods, ① word input code: a. The first short code of the previous group of words, b. The short code before the middle group of words and c. The short code before the second group of words; the two-word code word code refers to a code word code with two words; the single-two word code means one Enter a two-word code for one word for each two-word code word; A multi-word code refers to a two-word code for one two-word code word to enter multiple words or several two-word code words to enter multiple words; according to the word in the code word The position and order can be divided into: the first group code and the second group code; the first group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the last group code refers to the two-word code word code in the back word; according to the short code Simplified is a part of the full code. According to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined: a. Full group before the code, b. Short group before the word, c. Previous group Post shortcode, d. Short words before and after the group, e. Full words after the group, f. Short codes before the group, g. Short words after the group and h. Short letters before and after the group; plus codes are by additional letters The code combined with the code word code can be divided into: a. Pre-code, b. Post-code, and c. Pre- and post-code; pre-code refers to the letter in front of the code; post-code means the letter in the code behind; Pre- and post-adding means that the letters are added in front and behind respectively; including: ing plus, er plus, es t plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in code before; four-word code word code: short code before group; letter code word: short code before group;
对于拼音文字中的波兰语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即波兰语 码词码； 其键盘釆用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国语字 母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单 词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词 码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个码词 输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可 分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词在 中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全 码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后面的 单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没有简 化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三 单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三 单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词码； 按 照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在 前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面 的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后组码的 形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； （1 )三 单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c.后组单 词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二单词码 词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单 词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码和 后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单词码词 码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合出其中 实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由附加字母 与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是 指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别在前面和 后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前加码； 四 单词码词码： 组 简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码；  For Polish in Pinyin text, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code word codes are words and letters, that is, the Polish code word codes; the keyboard uses an international universal keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters. Latin letters corresponding to Mandarin or native Mandarin letters; Codeword codes can be divided according to the number of words: three-word codeword code, two-word codeword code, four-word codeword code, one-word codeword code, and multi-word codewordcode ; Code word code can be divided according to the number of words to be input: single word code and multi word code; single word code refers to a code word to enter a word code word; multi word code refers to a code word to enter multiple words Enter the codeword code of multiple words or several codewords; According to the position and order of the words in the codeword, it can be divided into: the first group code, the middle group code and the last group code; the former group code refers to the word in front Code word code; the middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the code word code at the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and in the simplified order, the code word code can be divided into: short code And full code; shortcodes are divided into: Shortcodes, shortcodes, and before and after shortcodes; shortcodes are codeword codes that simplify the full code; pre-shortcodes are shortcodes that simplify the preceding word; post-shortcodes are subsequent words Simplified shortcodes; front and back shortcodes are simplified shortcodes of the preceding and following words; full codes are codeword codes that are not simplified; three-word codeword codes are codeword codes with three words; Three-word code words can be divided into: single-three-word codes and multiple-three-word codes; single-three-word codes refer to a three-word code that inputs a single word; multiple-three-word codes refer to a three-word code input Multiple words or several three-word codes Enter the three-word codes of multiple words; according to the position and order of the words in the code words, they can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to The first three-word code word of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code of the middle of the word; the last group code refers to the three-word code word code of the word behind; the full code is simplified according to the short code One part, according to the shape of the former group code, the middle group code and the last group code Three types of codes can be combined; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard, and obey the mainstream universal standard correspondence; (1) three-word code word input methods, ① word input code: a. Before the group of words before the short code, b. The short code before the middle group of words and c. The short code before the second group of words; the two-word code word code refers to the code word code with 2 words; the single-two word code refers to the two-word code word Word code; Multiple two-word code refers to a two-word code where one two-word code word enters multiple words or several two-word code words enter multiple words; According to the position and order of words in the code word, it can be divided into: Group code and last group code; the first group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group code refers to the two-word code word code in the back of the word; what is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, according to The form of the former group code and the latter group code can be combined into eight practical codes among them: a. Full group code before, b. Short group code before the word, c. Short group code before the group, d. Before and after group word Shortcode, e. Full code after group, f. Short code before group, g. Short code after group h. Short code before and after the group; plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes. The plus code can be divided into: a. pre-code, b. post-code and c. pre-code; The last plus refers to the plus of the letter at the back; the before and after plus refers to the plus of the letter before and after the letter; including: ing plus, er plus, est plus, ly plus, ed plus and in before plus; four-word code Word code: group short code; letter code: short code before the group;
对于拼音文字中的鞑靼语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即鞑靼语 码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国语字 母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单 词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词 码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个码词 输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 多 单词码可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是 指单词在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简 化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简 码是指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是 指对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码 是指没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可 分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单 词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三 单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码 是指单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指 单词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码 和后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关 系； （1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码 和 c.后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一 个二单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词 或几个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 多二单 词码可分为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单 词在后面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的 形式， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码： a.前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简 码； 加码是由附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码 是指字母分别在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加 码和 in加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； For slang in Pinyin text, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code word codes are words and letters, that is, slang code word codes; the keyboard is an international universal keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters. The letters are The native alphabet or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; The codeword code can be divided into three words: three-word code, two-word code, four-word code, one-word code, and multi-word code Code; Code word code can be divided into: single word Code and multi-word code; single-word code refers to a code word that enters one word; multi-word code refers to a code word that enters multiple words or several code words to enter multiple words; code-by-word In the position and order of code words, multi-word codes can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the word in the middle Code word code; The last group code refers to the code word code behind the word; According to whether the code word code is simplified and in the simplified order, the code word code can be divided into: short code and full code; short code is divided into: , After shortcode and before and after shortcode; shortcode refers to the codeword code that simplifies the full code; before shortcode refers to the shortcode that simplifies the previous word; after shortcode refers to the simplification of the subsequent words Shortcodes; front and back shortcodes are simplified shortcodes of the front and back words; full codes are codeword codes that are not simplified; three-word codewordcodes are codeword codes with three words; three words Code word codes can be divided into: single three word codes and multiple three word codes; single three word codes are Refers to a three-word code word to enter a three-word code of a word; Multiple three-word code refers to a three-word code word to enter multiple words or several three-word codes to input multiple words of a three-word code; according to the word in the code word The position and order can be divided into: front group code, middle group code and back group code; the former group code refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word The latter group code refers to the three-word code word code behind the word; according to the simplified code, it is a part of the full code, and according to the form of the former group code, the middle group code and the latter group code, three kinds of codes can be combined; The letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard, subject to the mainstream common standard correspondence; (1) Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a. The pre-code of the previous group of words, b. The pre-code of the middle group of words, and c. The short code before the next group of words; the two-word code word code refers to the code number of two words; the single-two word code refers to a two-word code word into a two-word code; the multi-word code refers to One two-word code word Enter multiple words or several two-word codes Enter the two-word code of multiple words according to the position and order of the words in the code word. The two-word code can be divided into: the former group code and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the two-word code word in front of the word The last group code refers to the two-word code word code followed by the word; according to the simplified code, it is a part of the full code. According to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined: a. Full code in the front group, b. Short code in the front group, c. Short code in the front group, d. Short code in the front group, e. Full code in the back group, f. Short code in the front group, g. The short words after the last group and h. Short letters before and after the group; plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes, and the code can be divided into: a. Before plus code, b. Plus code and c. Plus code; Pre-addition refers to the addition of the letter in front; post-addition refers to the addition of the letter to the back; front-to-back addition refers to the addition of the letter to the front and the rear respectively; including: ing plus, er plus, est plus, ly plus, ed plus and in plus code; four-word code word code: short code before the group; letter code word: short code before the group
对于拼音文字中的丹麦语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即丹麦语 码词码； 其键盘釆用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国语字 母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单 词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词 码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个码词 输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可 分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词在 中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全 码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后面的 单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没有简 化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三 单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三 单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词码； 按 照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 多三单词码可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码 是指单词在前面的三 词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指 单词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码 和后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关 系； 三单词码词输入方式①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c.后 组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二单 词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个 二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 多二单词码可 分为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后 面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前 组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前 后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指 字母分别在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码 和 in前加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； For Danish in Pinyin text, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code word codes are words and letters, that is, the Danish code word codes; the keyboard uses an international universal keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters. The letters are the original Latin letters corresponding to Mandarin or native Mandarin letters; Codeword codes can be divided according to the number of words: three-word codeword code, two-word codeword code, four-word codeword code, one-word codeword code, and multi-word codewordcode ; Code word code can be divided according to the number of words to be input: single word code and multi word code; single word code refers to a code word to enter a word code word; multi word code refers to a code word to enter multiple words Enter the codeword code of multiple words or several codewords; According to the position and order of the words in the codeword, it can be divided into: the first group code, the middle group code and the last group code; the former group code refers to the word in front Code word code; the middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the code word code at the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and in the simplified order, the code word code can be divided into: short code And full code; shortcodes are divided into: former shortcodes Short code and short code before and after; short code refers to the code word code that simplifies the full code; pre-short code refers to the short code that simplifies the previous word; post short code refers to the simplification of the subsequent word Code; short-code before and after refers to the simplified code of the preceding and following words; full code refers to the codeword code without simplification; three-word code wordcode refers to the codeword code of three words; three-word code Word codes can be divided into: single three-word codes and multiple three-word codes; single three-word codes refer to a three-word code word to enter a single word; multiple three-word codes refer to a three-word code word to enter multiple words Or several three-word codes. Enter the three-word codes of multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the code words, the three-word codes can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. The former group code is It refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the full code simplified according to the short code Part, in the form of the former group code, the middle group code and the last group code Three kinds of codes may be combined; keys corresponding to the letters on the keyboard, the main subject to common standards correspondence Department; Three-word code word input method ① Word input code: a. Before the group of words before the short code, b. Before the group of words before the short code and c . After the group of words before the short code; two-word code word code refers to the number of words Two codeword codes; single two-word code refers to a two-word codeword inputting a single word; multiple two-word code refers to a two-word codeword inputting multiple words or several two-word codewords inputting Two-word codes of multiple words; According to the position and order of the words in the code words, the two-word codes can be divided into: the former group code and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; The last group code refers to the two-word code word code behind the word; according to the simplified code, it is a part of the full code. According to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined: a. Full code in front group, b. Short code in front group, c. Short code in front group, d. Short code in front group, e. Full code in back group, f. Short code in front group, g. Back group The short code after the word and the short code before and after the h. The plus code is a combination of additional letters and the code word code. The plus code can be divided into : A. Pre-code, b. Post-code and c. Pre-code and post-code; pre-code refers to the code plus before the letter; post-code refers to the code plus after the letter; pre-code refers to the code plus and minus the letter respectively; including : Ing plus code, er plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in front plus code; four-word code word code: short code before the group; letter code code: short code before the group;
对于拼音文字中的德语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即德语码词 码； 其键盘釆用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国语字母对 应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码 词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词码和 多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个码词输入 多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 多单词 码可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单 词在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的 顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是 指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对 后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指 没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词 码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指 单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词 在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后 组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； For German in Pinyin text, code morphemes are words and letters; code word codes are words and letters, that is, German code word codes; the keyboard uses an international universal keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters, and the letters are national languages or The Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; The codeword code can be divided into three words: two-word code, two-word code, four-word code, one-word code and multi-word code; Word codes can be divided according to the number of words to be entered: single word codes and multi-word codes; single word codes refer to the code words of one code word and one word; multi-word codes refer to the multiple words or several words of a code word. Each codeword enters the codeword code of multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the codeword, the multiword code can be divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code; the former group code refers to the word in front The middle group code refers to the codeword code with the word in the middle; the latter group code refers to the codeword code with the word to the back; according to whether the codeword code is simplified and in the simplified order, the codeword code can be divided into: Code and full code; short code is divided : Before short code, after short code and before and after short code; short code refers to the code word code that simplifies the full code; before short code refers to the short code that simplifies the previous word; after short code refers to the following Simplified shortcodes for words; Shortcodes before and after refer to simplified shortcodes for the preceding and following words; full codes are codewords without simplified codewords; three-word codewordcodes are codewords with three words Three-word codes can be divided into: single-three-word codes and multiple-three-word codes; single-three-word codes refer to a three-word code that enters one word; multiple-three-word codes refer to a three-word code Enter multiple words or several three-word codes. Enter three-word codes for multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the code words, they can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code It refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; Part of the code, according to the first group code, the middle group code and the last group code Form, may be a combination of three kinds of codes; keys corresponding to the letters on the keyboard, the main subject to common standards corresponding relation;
( 1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c. 后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二 单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几 个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前 组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单 词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合 出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 0.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前 后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由 附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别 在前面和后面的加码; 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前 加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； (1) Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a. Short code before the group of words, b. Short code before the group of words, and c. Short code before the group of words; two-word code means the word The number of two codeword codes is single; the two-word code refers to a two-word codeword inputting a two-word code; the multi-word code refers to a two-word codeword inputting multiple words or several two-word codes. Enter the two-word code of multiple words according to the position and order of the words in the code word, which can be divided into: the former group code and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group The code refers to the two-word code behind the word; according to the simplified code, it is a part of the full code. According to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined: a. Full code, b. Short code before the group of words, 0. short code before the group, d. Short code before and after the group, e. Full code after the group, f. Short code before the group, g. Shortcodes and h. Shortcodes before and after the group; plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes, plus code can be divided into: a. Pre-code, b. Post-code and c. Pre-code and post-code; Pre-code refers to the code plus in front of the letter; Post-code code means the plus code in the back of the letter; Pre-code means the code plus and minus in the letter respectively; including: ing plus code, er plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in before plus code; Four-word code word code: previous group short code; letter code word code: previous group short code;
对于拼音文字中的俄语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码 Γέ^词和字母， 即俄语码词 码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国语字母对 应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码 词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词码和 多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个码词输入 多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 多单词 码可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单 词在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码 '词码是否简化以及简化的 顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是 指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对 后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指 没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词 码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 多三单词码可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组 码是指单词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准 对应关系； （1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词 前简码和 c.后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码 是指一个二单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多 个单词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在 后面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码： a.前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前 组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前 后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指 字母分别在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码 和 in前加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； For Russian in Pinyin text, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code word code Γέ ^ words and letters, that is, the Russian code word code; its keyboard uses the international universal keyboard, the code element is 26 English letters, the letters are national languages or Native letter pairs The corresponding Latin alphabets; Codeword codes can be divided into three-word codeword codes, two-word codewordcodes, four-word codewordcodes, one-word codewordcodes and multi-wordcodewordcodes according to the number of words; codewordcodes according to The number of words to be entered can be divided into: single-word code and multi-word code; single-word code refers to the code word code of one code word to enter one word; multi-word code means the code word to enter multiple words or several code words Enter the codeword code of multiple words; According to the position and order of the words in the codeword, the multiword code can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the codeword in front of the word The middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the code word code in the back of the word; according to whether the code 'word code is simplified and the order of simplification, the code word code can be divided into: short code and Shortcodes are divided into: shortcodes before, shortcodes, and shortcodes before and after; shortcodes are codeword codes that simplify the full code; former shortcodes are shortcodes that simplify the previous word; Post-shortcodes are shortcodes that simplify the following words; Simplified shortcodes of the front and back words; full code refers to the codeword code without simplification; three-word codeword code refers to the codeword code with three words; three-word codewordcode can be divided into: single three Word code and multiple three-word code; single three-word code refers to a three-word code word that inputs a single word; multiple three-word code refers to a three-word code word that inputs multiple words or several three-word codes Three-word codes of three words; According to the position and order of the words in the code words, the three-word codes can be divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code; the first group code refers to the three-word code in front of the word Word code; The middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; what is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, according to the previous group code, The form of the middle group code and the latter group code can be combined into three codes; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard, and follow the mainstream common standard correspondence; (1) three-word code word input method, ① word input code: a. Front Short words before group words, b. Short words before group words, and c .The short word before the next group of words; the two-word code word code refers to the code number of two words; the single-two word code refers to a two-word code word into a two-word code; the multi-word code is Refers to a two-word code word that inputs multiple words or several two-word code words that input multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the code word, it can be divided into: the first group code and the second group code; The group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group code refers to the two-word code word code in the back of the word; what is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, according to the first group code and the last group code Form, which can be combined into eight practical codes: a. Full code before the group, b. Short code before the group of words, c. Short code before the group, d. Short code before and after the group, e. Full group after Code, f. Short code before group, g. Short code group after word and h. Short code group before and after code; plus code is a combination of additional letters and code word code, plus code can be divided into: a. Before Adding code, b. Adding code and c. Adding code before and after; Adding code means adding the letter in front; Adding code means adding the letter in the back Code; plus and minus means the plus and minus of the letter respectively before and after; including: ing plus, er plus, est plus, ly plus, ed plus and in before plus code; four-word code word code: pre-group short code; letter code Word code: short code before the group;
对于拼音文字中的法罗语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即法罗语 码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国语字 母对应的拉丁字母； 码词'码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单 词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词 码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个码词 输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可 分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词在 中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全 码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后面的 单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没有简 化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三 单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三 单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词码； 按 照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 多三单词码可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码 是指单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指 单词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码 和后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关 系； （1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码 和 c.后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一 个二单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词 或几个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 多二单 词码可分为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单 词在后面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的 形式， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码： a.前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简 码； 加码是由附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码 是指字母分别在前面和后面的加码；包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加 码和 in前加码； 四单词码词码为前组前简码； 字母码词码为前组前简码； For Faroese in Pinyin, the code morphemes are words and letters; the codeword codes are words and letters, that is, the Faroese codeword codes; the keyboard is an international universal keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters. The letters are The native alphabet or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; the code word code can be divided into three word code words, two word code words, four word code words, one word code words, and multiple word codes. Codewords; Codewordcodes can be divided according to the number of words to be entered: single-word code and multiple-word codes; single-word codes refer to a codeword that enters a word; multiple-word codes refer to a codeword that enters multiple words Enter the codeword code of multiple words for several words or several codewords. According to the position and order of words in the codeword, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the word in the The first code word code; the middle code code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the second code code refers to the code word code at the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and in the simplified order, the code word code can be divided into: Shortcodes and full codes; shortcodes are further divided into: , After shortcode and before and after shortcode; shortcode refers to the codeword code that simplifies the full code; before shortcode refers to the shortcode that simplifies the previous word; after shortcode refers to the simplification of the subsequent words Shortcodes; front and back shortcodes are simplified shortcodes of the front and back words; full codes are codeword codes that are not simplified; three-word codewordcodes are codeword codes with three words; three words Code word codes can be divided into: single three-word codes and multiple three-word codes; single three-word codes refer to a three-word code word to enter a single word; multiple three-word codes refer to a three-word code word to enter multiple Word or several three-word codes Enter the three-word codes of multiple words; According to the position and order of the words in the code words, the multiple three-word codes can be divided into: the front group code, the middle group code and the last group code; the front group code It refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to The three-word code behind the word; according to the simplified code, it is a part of the full code. According to the form of the first group code, the middle group code and the last group code, three codes can be combined; letters and keys on the keyboard Correspondence, subject to the mainstream universal standard correspondence; (1) Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a. Before the group of words before the short code, b. Before the group of words before the short code and c. After the group of words before the short code ; Two-word code word code refers to the code number of two words; Single-two word code refers to a two-word code word to enter a two-word code; Multiple two-word code refers to a two-word code word to enter Multiple words or several two-word code words Enter the two-word codes of multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the code words, the multi-word codes can be divided into: the former group code and the latter group code; the former group code is Refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group code refers to the two-word code word code in the back of the word; simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, according to the form of the first group code and the last group code, you can Combining eight practical codes: a. Full group before, b .Before group of shortcodes, c.Before group of shortcodes, d.Before groups of shortcodes before and after, e.Full group after codes, f.Before groups of short codes, g. After groups of words shortcodes and h . The short code before and after the group; plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword code, plus code can be divided into: a. Pre-code, b. Post-code and c. Pre-code; the pre-code refers to the letter in front Plus code; plus code refers to the plus code at the back of the letter; plus and minus code refers to the plus code at the front and back of the letter respectively; including: ing plus code, er plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in front plus code; four-word plus code The code is the short code of the previous group; the letter code is the short code of the previous group;
对于拼音文字中的法语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即白俄罗斯 语码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国语 字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四 单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单 词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个码 词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词 在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺 序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后 面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没 有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词 '码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指 单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词 在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后 组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； For French in Pinyin text, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code word codes are words and letters, that is, Belarusian code word codes; the keyboard is an international universal keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters, and the letters are national languages or The Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; The codeword code can be divided into three words: two-word code, two-word code, four-word code, one-word code and multi-word code; Word codes can be divided according to the number of words to be entered: single word codes and multi-word codes; single word codes refer to the code words of one code word and one word; multi-word codes refer to the multiple words or several words of a code word. Each codeword enters the codeword code of multiple words; according to the position and order of the words in the codeword, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the codeword in front of the word The middle group code refers to the codeword code of the word in the middle; the latter group code refers to the codeword code of the word at the back; according to whether the codeword code is simplified and the order of simplification, the codeword code can be divided into: short code and full Shortcodes are divided into: Shortcode before, shortcode and before and after shortcode; shortcode refers to the codeword code that simplifies the full code; preshortcode refers to the shortcode that simplifies the previous word; postcode refers to the following words Simplified shortcodes; front and back shortcodes are simplified shortcodes of the preceding and following words; full codes are codeword codes that are not simplified; three-word codeword codes are codeword codes with three words Three-word codes can be divided into: single-three-word codes and multiple-three-word codes; single-three-word codes refer to a three-word code to enter a single-word three-word code; multiple-three-word codes refer to a three-word code word Enter multiple words or several three-word codes. Enter three-word 'codes of multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the code words, they can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code It refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; Part of the code, according to the previous group code, middle group code and last group code Type, three kinds of codes may be combined; each key on the keyboard corresponding to the letters, the main subject to common standards corresponding relation;
( 1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c. 后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二 单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几 个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前 组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单 词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合 出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前 后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由 附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别 在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前 加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； 对于拼音文字中的芬兰语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即芬兰语 码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国语字 母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单 词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词 码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个码词 输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可 分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词在 中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全 码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后面的 单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没有简 化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三 单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三 单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词码； 按 照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在 前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面 的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后组码的 形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； （1 )三 单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c.后组单 词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二单词码 词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单 词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码和 后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单词码词 码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合出其中 实用的八种码： a.前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由附加字母 与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是 指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别在前面和 后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前加码； 四 单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； (1) Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a. Short code before the group of words, b. Short code before the group of words, and c. Short code before the group of words; two-word code means the word The number of two codeword codes is single; the two-word code refers to a two-word codeword inputting a two-word code; the multi-word code refers to a two-word codeword inputting multiple words or several two-word codes. Enter the two-word code of multiple words according to the position and order of the words in the code word, which can be divided into: the former group code and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group The code refers to the two-word code behind the word; according to the simplified code, it is a part of the full code. According to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined: a. Full code, b. Short code before the group of words, c. Short code before the group, d. Short code before and after the group, e. Full code after the group, f. Short code before the group, g. After group of words Shortcodes and h. Shortcodes before and after the group; pluscode is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes. The pluscode can be divided into: a. , B. Post-addition and c. Pre- and post-addition; pre-addition refers to the addition of the letter in front; post-addition refers to the addition of the letter at the back; front-end addition refers to the addition of the letter at the front and back respectively; Plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in code; four-word code word code: short code before the group; letter code word: short code before the group; For Finnish in Pinyin, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code words are words and letters, that is, the Finnish code word codes; the keyboard is an international universal keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters, and the letters are national languages. Or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; the codeword code can be divided into three word codeword codes, two word codeword codes, four word codeword codes, one word codeword codes, and multiword code wordcodes according to the number of words; Codeword codes can be divided into single word codes and multiple word codes according to the number of words to be input; single word codes refer to the codeword codes for one codeword and one word; multiword codes refer to the multiple words or codewords for one codeword. Enter several codeword codewords for several codewords; according to the position and order of the words in the codewords, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the code in front of the word Word code; the middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the code word code in the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and the order of simplification, the code word code can be divided into: short code and Full code; short code is divided into: former short code Short code and short code before and after; short code refers to the code word code that simplifies the full code; pre-short code refers to the short code that simplifies the previous word; post short code refers to the simplification of the subsequent word Code; short-code before and after refers to the simplified code of the preceding and following words; full code refers to the codeword code without simplification; three-word code wordcode refers to the codeword code of three words; three-word code Word codes can be divided into: single three-word codes and multiple three-word codes; single three-word codes refer to a three-word code word to enter a single word; multiple three-word codes refer to a three-word code word to enter multiple words Or several three-word codes Enter the three-word codes of multiple words; According to the position and order of the words in the code words, it can be divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code; the former group code refers to the word in front The middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; what is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, according to The form of the former group code, the middle group code and the last group code can be combined Three kinds of codes; Letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard, and obey the mainstream universal standard correspondence; (1) Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a. Before the short word of the group of words, b. Before the short word of the group of words Code and c. Short code before the next group of words; two-word code word code refers to a code word code with two words; single-two word code refers to a two-word code word into a two-word code; more than two A word code refers to a two-word code where one two-word code word enters multiple words or several two-word code words enter multiple words; according to the position and order of the words in the code word, it can be divided into: the first group code and the second group The first group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the second group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; what is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, according to the first group code and the subsequent code The form of the group code can be combined into eight practical codes: a. The full code of the previous group, b. The short code of the previous group of words, c. The short code of the previous group, d. The short code of the previous group of words, e. Full code in the back group, f. Short code in the back group, g. Short code in the back group and h. Short code in the back group; The code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes, and the code can be divided into: a. Pre-code, b. Post-code, and c. Pre- and post-code; pre-code refers to the letter in front of the code; post-code means the letter Adding code at the back; Adding code before and after refers to the adding of the letters before and after the letter respectively; including: ing plus code, er plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in before plus code; Four-word code word code: pre-group short code ; Letter code word code: before the short code before the group;
对于拼音文字中的弗里斯兰语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即弗 里斯兰语码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或 本国语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词 码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一 个码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺 序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指 单词在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化 的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码 是指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指 对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是 指没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分 为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词 码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单 词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是 指单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单 词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和 后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系；For the Frisian language in Pinyin text, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code word codes are words and letters, that is, the Frisian code word codes; the keyboard uses an international universal keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters. The alphabet is the native alphabet or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; The codeword code can be divided into three words: three-word code, two-word code, four-word code, one-word code, and multiple words. Codeword code; Codeword code can be divided into: single word code and multiple word code; single word code refers to the codeword code for one codeword to enter one word; multiword code means the codeword input for one word Multiple words or several code words Enter the code word code of multiple words; according to the position and order of words in the code word, it can be divided into: front group code, middle group code, and last group code; the former group code refers to the word The codeword code in the front; the codeword in the middle group refers to the codeword code with the word in the middle; the code in the latter group refers to the codeword code with the word in the back; according to whether the codeword code is simplified and in the simplified order, the codeword code can be divided into : Short code and full code; short code is divided into Shortcode before, shortcode and before and after shortcode; shortcode refers to the codeword code that simplifies the full code; preshortcode refers to the shortcode that simplifies the previous word; postcode refers to the following words Simplified shortcodes; front and back shortcodes are simplified shortcodes of the preceding and following words; full codes are codeword codes that are not simplified; three-word codeword codes are codeword codes with three words Three-word codes can be divided into: single-three-word codes and multiple-three-word codes; single-three-word codes refer to a three-word code to enter a single-word three-word code; multiple-three-word codes refer to a three-word code word Enter multiple words or several three-word codesEnter three words for multiple words Word code; According to the position and order of words in the code word, it can be divided into: the first group code, the middle group code and the last group code; the former group code refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to The three-word code word with the word in the middle; the last group code refers to the three-word code with the word behind; the part simplified by the short code is a part of the full code, according to the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. Form, which can be combined into three codes; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard, and follow the correspondence relationship of the mainstream universal standards;
( 1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c. 后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二 单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几 个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前 组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单 词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合 出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前 后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由 附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别 在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing 加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前 加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； (1) Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a. Short code before the group of words, b. Short code before the group of words, and c. Short code before the group of words; two-word code means the word The number of two codeword codes is single; the two-word code refers to a two-word codeword inputting a two-word code; the multi-word code refers to a two-word codeword inputting multiple words or several two-word codes. Enter the two-word code of multiple words according to the position and order of the words in the code word, which can be divided into: the former group code and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group The code refers to the two-word code behind the word; according to the simplified code, it is a part of the full code. According to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined: a . Full code, b. Short code before the group of words, c. Short code before the group, d. Short code before and after the group, e. Full code after the group, f. Short code before the group, g. After group of words Shortcodes and h. Shortcodes before and after the group; pluscode is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes. The pluscode can be divided into: a. , B. Post-addition and c. Pre- and post-addition; pre-addition refers to the addition of letters in front; post-addition refers to the addition of letters in front and back; Plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in code; four-word code word code: short code before the group; letter code code: short code before the group;
对于拼音文字中的哈萨克语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即哈萨 克语码词码； 其键盘釆用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国 语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单 单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个 码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码；按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 多单词码可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码 是指单词在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及 简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码 是指对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全 码是指没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码 可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三 单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的 三单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组 码是指单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是 指单词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是^码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组 码和后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应 关系； （1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简 码和 c.后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指 一个二单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单 词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分 为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面 的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可 以组合出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组 单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加 码是由附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后 加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字 母分别在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； For Kazakh in Pinyin, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code words are words and letters, that is, Kazakh code word codes; the keyboard uses an international universal keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters. Latin letters corresponding to Mandarin or native Mandarin letters; Codeword codes can be divided according to the number of words: three-word codeword code, two-word codeword code, four-word codeword code, one-word codeword code, and multi-word codewordcode ; Code word code can be divided according to the number of words to be input: single word code and multi word code; single word code refers to a code word to enter a word code word; multi word code refers to a code word to enter multiple words Enter multiple codeword codes for several words or several codewords; according to the position and order of words in the codewords, multiword codes can be divided into: front group code, middle group code, and last group code; the former group code refers to the word The codeword code in the front; the codeword in the middle group refers to the codeword code with the word in the middle; the code in the latter group refers to the codeword code with the word in the back; according to whether the codeword code is simplified and in the simplified order, the codeword code can be divided into : Short code and full code; short code is divided For: pre-short code, post-short code, and pre- and post-short codes; short code refers to the code word code that simplifies the full code; pre-short code refers to the short code that simplifies the previous word; post-short code refers to the back Simplified shortcodes for the words; Pre- and post-shortcodes are simplified shortcodes for the preceding and following words; Full-code is a codeword code without simplification; Three-word codewordcode is a code with three words Word codes; Three-word codes can be divided into: single-three-word codes and multiple-three-word codes; single-three-word codes refer to a three-word code that enters a single word; multiple-three-word codes refer to a three-word code Enter multiple words or several three-word codes for codewords. Enter three-word codes for multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the codewords, they can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group The code refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; ^ Part of the code, according to the shape of the former group code, the middle group code and the latter group code Three types of codes can be combined; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard, and obey the mainstream universal standard correspondence; (1) three-word code word input methods, ① word input code: a. The previous group of short codes, b. Group of words before the short code and c. Group of words before the short code; two-word code word code refers to the number of two code word code; single two-word code refers to a two-word code word two words into a word Codes; multiple two-word codes refer to two-word codes where one two-word code word enters multiple words or several two-word code words enter multiple words; according to the position and order of words in the code words, they can be divided into: the previous group The first group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the second group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; what is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code. The form of the group code and the back group code can be combined into eight practical codes: a. Full code before the group, b. Short code before the group of words, c. Short code before the group, d. Code, e. Full group after the group, f. Short group before the group, g. Short group after the word and h. Group after Post-code; plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes, plus code can be divided into: a. Pre-code, b. Post-code and c. Pre- and post-code; pre-code refers to the letter in front of the code; Adding code refers to the letter after the letter; adding code before and after means the word The parent code is added in front and back respectively; including: ing plus code, er plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in plus code; four-word code word code: short code before the group; letter code code before: Short Code;
对于拼音文字中的荷兰语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即荷兰语 码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国语字 母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单 词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词 码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个码词 输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可 分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词在 中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全 码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后面的 单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没有简 化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三 单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三 单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词码； 按 照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可 4为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在 前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面 的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后组码的 形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； （1 )三 单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c.后组单 词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二单词码 词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单 词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码和 后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单词码词 码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合出其中 实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由附加字母 与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是 指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别在前面和 后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前加码； 四 单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码；  For Dutch in Pinyin, code morphemes are words and letters; code word codes are words and letters, that is, Dutch code word codes; the keyboard is an international keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters, and the letters are national languages. Or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; the codeword code can be divided into three word codeword codes, two word codeword codes, four word codeword codes, one word codeword codes, and multiword code wordcodes according to the number of words; Codeword codes can be divided into single word codes and multiple word codes according to the number of words to be input; single word codes refer to the codeword codes for one codeword and one word; multiword codes refer to the multiple words or codewords for one codeword. Enter several codeword codewords for several codewords; according to the position and order of the words in the codewords, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the code in front of the word Word code; the middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the code word code in the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and the order of simplification, the code word code can be divided into: short code and Full code; short code is divided into: Shortcodes, shortcodes, and before and after shortcodes; shortcodes are codeword codes that simplify the full code; pre-shortcodes are shortcodes that simplify the preceding word; post-shortcodes are subsequent words Simplified shortcodes; front and back shortcodes are simplified shortcodes of the preceding and following words; full codes are codeword codes that are not simplified; three-word codeword codes are codeword codes with three words; Three-word code words can be divided into: single-three-word codes and multiple-three-word codes; single-three-word codes refer to a three-word code that inputs a single word; multiple-three-word codes refer to a three-word code input Multiple words or several three-word codes Enter the three-word codes of multiple words; according to the position and order of the words in the code words, 4 can be: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to The first three-word code word of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code of the middle of the word; the last group code refers to the three-word code word code of the word behind; the full code is simplified according to the short code One part, according to the shape of the former group code, the middle group code and the last group code Three types of codes can be combined; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard, and obey the mainstream universal standard correspondence; (1) three-word code word input methods, ① word input code: a. The previous group of short codes, b. Group of words before the short code and c. Group of words before the short code; two-word code word code refers to the number of two code word code; single two-word code refers to a two-word code word two words into a word Codes; multiple two-word codes refer to two-word codes where one two-word code word enters multiple words or several two-word code words enter multiple words; according to the position and order of words in the code words, they can be divided into: the previous group The first group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the second group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; what is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code. The form of the group code and the back group code can be combined into eight practical codes: a. Full code before the group, b. Short code before the group of words, c. Short code before the group, d. Code, e. Full group after the group, f. Short group before the group, g. Short group after the word and h. Short code before and after the group; plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes. The plus code can be divided into: a. pre-code, b. post-code and c. pre-code; The last plus refers to the plus of the letter at the back; the before and after plus refers to the plus of the letter before and after the letter; including: ing plus, er plus, est plus, ly plus, ed plus and in before plus; four-word code Word code: short code before the group; letter code: short code before the group;
所述拼音文字加利西亚语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即加利西 亚语码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国 语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单 单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个 码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码；按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 多单词码可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码 是指单词在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及 简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码 是指对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全 码是指没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码 可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三 单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的 三单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组 码是指单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是 指单词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组 码和后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应 关系； （1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简 码和 c.后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指 一个二单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单 词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分 为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面 的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式，'可 以组合出其中实用的八种码： a.前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组 单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加 码是由附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后 加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字 母分别在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前加码； 四单词码词码为前组前简码； 字母码词码为前组前简码； In the Galician phonetic alphabet, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code word codes are words and letters, that is, the Galician code word codes; the keyboard uses an international universal keyboard, and the code element is 2 6 English letters, letters It is the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native language or native alphabet; The codeword code can be divided into three words: three-word code, two-word code, four-word code, one-word code, and multi-word code. Codewords; Codewordcodes can be divided according to the number of words to be entered: single-word code and multiple-word codes; single-word codes refer to a codeword that enters a word; multiple-word codes refer to a codeword that enters multiple words Enter the codeword code of multiple words for several words or several codewords. According to the position and order of words in the codeword, multiword codes can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code is It refers to the codeword code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the codeword code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the codeword code in the back of the word; according to whether the codeword code is simplified and the simplified order, the codeword code can be Divided into: short code and full code; short code is divided For: pre-short code, post-short code, and pre- and post-short codes; short code refers to the code word code that simplifies the full code; pre-short code refers to the short code that simplifies the previous word; post-short code refers to the back Simplified shortcodes for the words; Pre- and post-shortcodes are simplified shortcodes for the preceding and following words; Full-code is a codeword code without simplification; Three-word codewordcode is a code with three words Word code It can be divided into: single three-word code and multiple three-word code; single three-word code refers to a three-word code word that inputs a single word; multiple three-word code refers to a three-word code word that inputs multiple words or several words Three three-word codes Enter three-word codes of multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the code words, it can be divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code; the former group code refers to the three words in the front. Word code word code; Middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; Back group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; What is simplified according to the short code is part of the full code, according to the previous group Three types of codes can be combined in the form of codes, middle group codes and back group codes. Letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard and obey the mainstream universal standard correspondence. (1) Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a The first group of words before the short code, b. The middle group of words before the short code and c. The second group of words before the short code; the two-word code word code refers to the number of two code word code; the single two-word code refers to One two-word code word Enter the two-word code of one word; many second words The code refers to a two-word code word that inputs multiple words or several two-word code words that input multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the code word, it can be divided into: the first group code and the second group code The former group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; what is simplified according to the short code is part of the full code, according to the former group code and the latter group Code form, 'can be combined into eight practical codes: a. Full code before the group, b. Short code before the group of words, c. Short code before the group, d. Short code before and after the group of words, e. Full code in the back group, f. Short code in the back group, g. Short code in the back group and h. Short code in the back group; plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes. The plus code can be divided into: a. Pre-code, b. Post-code and c. Pre-code and post-code; Pre-code refers to the code plus in front of the letter; Post-code code refers to the plus code in the back of the letter; ing plus code, er plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in front plus code; four-word code word code Jane code before the group before; letter code word before the code is simple code set before;
对于拼音文字中的加泰罗尼亚语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即 加泰罗尼亚语码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国 语或本国语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词 码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可 分为： 单单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码 是指一个码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位 置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组 码是指单词在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以 及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码 是指对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全 码是指没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码 可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三 单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的 三单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组 码是指单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是 指单词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组 码和后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应 关系； （1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简 码和 c.后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指 一个二单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单 词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分 为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面 的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可 以组合出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组 单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加 码是由附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后 加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字 母分别在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； For Catalan in Pinyin text, code morphemes are words and letters; code word codes are words and letters, that is, Catalan code word codes; the keyboard uses an international keyboard, and the code element is 2 6 English letters, where the letters are Latin letters corresponding to the native language or native language; Codeword codes can be divided into three words: three-word codeword code, two-word codeword code, four-word codeword code, one-word codeword Codes and multi-word codes; Code-word codes can be divided according to the number of words to be entered: Single-word codes and multi-word codes; Single-word codes refer to the code-word codes of one code-word into one word; Multi-word codes refer to Enter multiple code words or several code words into one codeword. According to the position and order of the words in the codeword, it can be divided into: front group code, middle group code, and last group code. The code refers to the codeword code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the codeword code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the codeword code in the back of the word; according to whether the codeword code is simplified and the simplified order, the codeword The codes can be divided into: short codes and full codes; For: pre-short code, post-short code, and pre- and post-short codes; short code refers to the code word code that simplifies the full code; pre-short code refers to the short code that simplifies the previous word; post-short code refers to the back Simplified shortcodes for the words; Pre- and post-shortcodes are simplified shortcodes for the preceding and following words; Full-code is a codeword code without simplification; Three-word codewordcode is a code with three words Word codes; Three-word codes can be divided into: single-three-word codes and multiple-three-word codes; single-three-word codes refer to a three-word code that enters a single word; multiple-three-word codes refer to a three-word code Enter multiple words or several three-word codes for codewords. Enter three-word codes for multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the codewords, they can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group The code refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; Part of the full code, according to the previous group code, middle group code and last group code Three types of codes can be combined; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard and obey the mainstream universal standard correspondence; (1) the three-word code word input method, ① the word input code: a. The previous group of short codes, b. The short code before the middle group of words and c. The short code before the second group of words; the two-word code word code refers to the code word code with 2 words; the single-two word code refers to the two-word code word Word code; Multiple two-word code refers to a two-word code where one two-word code word enters multiple words or several two-word code words enter multiple words; According to the position and order of words in the code word, it can be divided into: Group code and last group code; the first group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group code refers to the two-word code word code in the back of the word; what is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, according to The form of the former group code and the latter group code can be combined into eight practical codes: a . Full group code before, b. Short code before the group of words, c. Short code before the group, d. Before and after the group of words Shortcode, e. Full group after the group, f. Short group before the group, g. Short group after the word and h. Jane code before and after; plus The code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes, and the code can be divided into: a. Pre-code, b. Post-code, and c. Pre- and post-code; pre-code refers to the letter in front of the letter; post-code means the letter Adding code at the back; Adding code before and after refers to the adding of the letters before and after the letter; including: ing plus code, er plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in before plus code; Four-word plus code ; Letter code word code: before the short code before the group;
对于拼音文字中的捷克语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即捷克语 码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国语字 母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单 词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词 码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个码词 输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可 分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词在 中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全 码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后面的 单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没有简 化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三 单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三 单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词码； 按 照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在 前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面 的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后组码的 形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； （1 )三 单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c.后组单 词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二单词码 词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单 词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码和 后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单词码词 码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合出其中 实用的八种码： a.前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由附加字母 与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是 指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别在前面和 后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前加码; 四 单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码；  For the Czech language in Pinyin, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code word codes are words and letters, that is, the Czech code word codes; the keyboard is an international universal keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters, and the letters are national languages. Or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; the codeword code can be divided into three word codeword codes, two word codeword codes, four word codeword codes, one word codeword codes, and multiword code wordcodes according to the number of words; Codeword codes can be divided into single word codes and multiple word codes according to the number of words to be input; single word codes refer to the codeword codes for one codeword and one word; multiword codes refer to the multiple words or codewords for one codeword. Enter several codeword codewords for several codewords; according to the position and order of the words in the codewords, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the code in front of the word Word code; the middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the code word code in the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and the order of simplification, the code word code can be divided into: short code and Full code; short code is divided into: Shortcodes, shortcodes, and before and after shortcodes; shortcodes are codeword codes that simplify the full code; pre-shortcodes are shortcodes that simplify the preceding word; post-shortcodes are subsequent words Simplified shortcodes; front and back shortcodes are simplified shortcodes of the preceding and following words; full codes are codeword codes that are not simplified; three-word codeword codes are codeword codes with three words; Three-word code words can be divided into: single-three-word codes and multiple-three-word codes; single-three-word codes refer to a three-word code that inputs a single word; multiple-three-word codes refer to a three-word code input Multiple words or several three-word codes Enter the three-word codes of multiple words; according to the position and order of the words in the code words, they can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to The first three-word code word of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code of the middle of the word; the last group code refers to the three-word code word code of the word behind; the full code simplified according to the short code One part, according to the shape of the former group code, the middle group code and the last group code Three types of codes can be combined; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard, and obey the mainstream universal standard correspondence; (1) three-word code word input methods, ① word input code: a. Before the group of words before the short code, b. The short code before the middle group of words and c. The short code before the second group of words; the two-word code word code refers to the code word code with 2 words; the single-two word code refers to the two-word code word Word code; Multiple two-word code refers to a two-word code where one two-word code word enters multiple words or several two-word code words enter multiple words; According to the position and order of words in the code word, it can be divided into: Group code and last group code; the first group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group code refers to the two-word code word code in the back of the word; what is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, according to The form of the front group code and the back group code can be combined into eight practical codes: a. The full group of the previous group, b. The short group of the previous group of words, c. The short group of the previous group of words, d. Shortcode, e. Full code after group, f. Short code before group, g. Short code after group and h. Short code before and after the group; plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes. The plus code can be divided into: a. pre-code, b. post-code and c. pre-code; The post-addition refers to the addition of the letter at the back; the pre- and post-addition refers to the addition of the letter before and after the letter; including: ing plus, er plus, est plus, ly plus, ed plus and in before plus; four-word code Word code: short code before the group; letter code: short code before the group;
对于拼音文字中的克罗地亚语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即克 罗地亚语码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或 本国语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词 码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一 个码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺 序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指 单词在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化 的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码 是指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指 对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是 指没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分 为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词 码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单 词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是 指单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单 词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和 后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系；For Croatian in Pinyin, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code words are words and letters, that is, the Croatian code word codes; the keyboard uses an international keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters, and the letters are national languages. Or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; the codeword code can be divided into three word codeword codes, two word codeword codes, four word codeword codes, one word codeword codes, and multiword code wordcodes according to the number of words; Codeword codes can be divided into single word codes and multiple word codes according to the number of words to be input; single word codes refer to the codeword codes for one codeword and one word; multiword codes refer to the multiple words or codewords for one codeword. Enter several codeword codewords for several codewords; according to the position and order of the words in the codewords, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the code in front of the word Word code; the middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the code word code in the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and the order of simplification, the code word code can be divided into: short code and Full code Before the short code, the simple code and simple code before and after; simple code to simplify the code refers to the code word for the full code; the former refers to the simple code word in front of the simplified short code; refers to the simple code Simplified short codes for the following words; Pre- and post-short codes are simplified short codes for the preceding and following words; full codes are code words without simplified codes; three-word codes are three-word words. Three-word codes can be divided into: single-three-word codes and multiple-three-word codes; single-three-word codes refer to a three-word code that enters a three-word code; multiple-three-word codes refer to a Enter multiple words or several three-word codes for three-word codes. According to the position and order of words in the code words, they can be divided into: front group code, middle group code, and last group code. The first group code refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; simplified according to the short code It is a part of the full code. According to the form of the former group code, the middle group code and the latter group code, three types of codes can be combined; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard, and obey the mainstream universal standard correspondence relationship;
( 1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c. 后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二 单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几 个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前 组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单 词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合 出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前 后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由 附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别 在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前 加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； (1) Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a. Short code before the group of words, b. Short code before the group of words, and c. Short code before the group of words; two-word code means the word The number of two codeword codes is single; the two-word code refers to a two-word codeword inputting a two-word code; the multi-word code refers to a two-word codeword inputting multiple words or several two-word codes. Enter the two-word code of multiple words according to the position and order of the words in the code word, which can be divided into: the former group code and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group The code refers to the two-word code behind the word; according to the simplified code, it is a part of the full code. According to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined: a. Full code, b. Short code before the group of words, c. Short code before the group, d. Short code before and after the group, e. Full code after the group, f. Short code before the group, g. After group of words Shortcodes and h. Shortcodes before and after the group; plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes, plus code can be divided into: a. Pre-code, b. Post-code and c. Pre-code and pre-code; Pre-code refers to the code plus in front of the letter; Post-code code refers to the plus code in the back of the letter; ing plus code, er plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in before plus code; Four-word code word code: previous group short code; letter code word code: previous group short code;
对于拼音文字中的拉脱维亚语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即拉 脱维亚语码词码； 其键盘釆用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或 本国语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词 码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一 个码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺 序， 多单词码可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中 组码是指单词在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化 以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简 码； 简码是指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后 简码是指对后面的单词进行简化的简码；前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码; 全码是指没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词 码可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的 三单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词 的三单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前 组码是指单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码 是指单词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中 组码和后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， '服从主流通用标准对 应关系； （1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前 简码和 c.后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是 指一个二单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个 单词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可 分为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后 面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前 组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前 后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指 字母分别在 面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码 和 in前加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； For Latvian in Pinyin, code morphemes are words and letters; code word codes are words and letters, that is, Latvian code word codes; the keyboard uses an international universal keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters. Latin letters corresponding to Mandarin or native Mandarin letters; Codeword codes can be divided according to the number of words: three-word codeword code, two-word codeword code, four-word codeword code, one-word codeword code, and multi-word codewordcode ; Code word code can be divided according to the number of words to be input: single word code and multi word code; single word code refers to a code word to enter a word code word; multi word code refers to a code word to enter multiple words Enter the codeword code of multiple words or several codewords; According to the position and order of the words in the codeword, the multiword code can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the word The codeword code in the front; the codeword in the middle group refers to the codeword code with the word in the middle; the code in the latter group refers to the codeword code with the word in the back; according to whether the codeword code is simplified and in the simplified order, the codeword code can be divided into : Short code and full code; It is also divided into: short code before, short code before and after; short code refers to the code word code that simplifies the full code; front short code refers to the short code that simplifies the previous word; post short code refers to Simplified short codes for the following words; front and back short codes are simplified short codes for the preceding and following words; full codes are code words without simplified codes; three-word codes are three words Three-word codes can be divided into: single-three-word codes and multiple-three-word codes; single-three-word codes refer to a three-word code that enters a three-word code; multiple-three-word codes refer to a Enter multiple words or several three-word codes for three-word codes. According to the position and order of words in the code words, they can be divided into: front group code, middle group code, and last group code. The first group code refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; simplified according to the short code Is a part of the full code, according to the previous group code, the middle group code and the last group code Three types of codes can be combined; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard, and 'follow the mainstream universal standard correspondence; (1) the three-word code word input method, ① the word input code: a. The previous group of short codes, b The short code before the middle group of words and c. The short code before the second group of words; the two-word code word code refers to the code number of two words; the single-two word code refers to a two-word code word input a word Two-word codes; Multiple two-word codes refer to two-word codes where one two-word code word enters multiple words or several two-word code words enter multiple words; According to the position and order of words in the code words, they can be divided into: The former group code and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group code refers to the two-word code word code in the back of the word; the simplified code is a part of the full code, According to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, Eight practical codes can be combined: a. Full code before the group, b. Short code before the group of words, c. Short code before the group, d. Short code before and after the group of words, e. Full code after the group, f. short codes before the group, g. short codes after the group of words and h. short codes before and after the group; plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes, plus code can be divided into: a. before plus code, b. Back-up and c. Back-to-back coding; Front-to-back coding refers to the letter's front-end coding; Back-to-back coding refers to the letter's back-to-front and back-to-back code adding; , Est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in before plus code; Four-word code word code: short code before the group; letter code word code: short code before the group;
对于拼音文字中的立陶宛语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即立陶 宛语码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国 语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单 单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个 码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码；按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 多单词码可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码 是指单词在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及 简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码 是指对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全 码是指没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码 可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三 单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的 三单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组 码是指单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是 指单词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组 码和后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应 关系； （1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简 码和 c.后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指 一个二单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单 词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分 为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面 的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可 以组合出其中实用的八种码： a.前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组 单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加 码是由附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后 加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字 母分别在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码；  For Lithuanian in Pinyin, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code words are words and letters, that is, the Lithuanian code word codes; the keyboard uses an international universal keyboard, and the code element is 2 6 English letters, and the letters are national languages. Or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; the codeword code can be divided into three word codeword codes, two word codeword codes, four word codeword codes, one word codeword codes, and multiword code wordcodes according to the number of words; Codeword codes can be divided into single word codes and multiple word codes according to the number of words to be input; single word codes refer to the codeword codes for one codeword and one word; multiword codes refer to the multiple words or codewords for one codeword. Enter several codeword codewords for several codewords; according to the position and order of the words in the codewords, multi-word codes can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the word in the The first code word code; the middle code code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the second code code refers to the code word code at the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and in the simplified order, the code word code can be divided into: Short code and full code; It is also divided into: short code before, short code before and after; short code refers to the code word code that simplifies the full code; front short code refers to the short code that simplifies the previous word; post short code refers to Simplified short codes for the following words; Pre- and post-short codes are simplified short codes for the preceding and following words; full codes are code words without simplified codes; three-word codes are three-word words. Three-word codes can be divided into: single-three-word codes and multiple-three-word codes; single-three-word codes refer to a three-word code that enters a three-word code; multiple-three-word codes refer to a Enter multiple words or several three-word codes for three-word codes. According to the position and order of words in the code words, they can be divided into: front group code, middle group code, and last group code. The first group code refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; simplified according to the short code Is a part of the full code, according to the previous group code, middle group code and In the form of the back group code, three types of codes can be combined; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard, and follow the mainstream universal standard correspondence; (1) three-word code word input method, ① the word input code: Code, b. Short code before the middle group of words and c. Short code before the second group of words; two-word code word code refers to a code word code with two words; single-two word code refers to a two-word code word input A two-word code for one word; A multiple-two-word code refers to a two-word code that enters multiple words or several two-word code words into a two-word code; according to the position and order of the words in the code word, Divided into: the first group code and the last group code; the first group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the last group code refers to the two-word code word code in the back of the word; the full code simplified according to the short code According to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, one of the eight practical codes can be combined: a. The former group full code, b. The former group short code, c. The former short code, d. Short code before and after the group of words, e. Full code after the group, f. Short code before the group, g. Shortcodes after words and h. Shortcodes before and after the group; plus code is a combination of additional letters and code word codes. The plus codes can be divided into: a. Pre-code, b. Post-code and c. Pre-code; Refers to the plus of the letter in the front; post plus refers to the plus of the letter at the back; plus and minus refers to the plus of the letter in front and behind respectively; including: ing plus, er plus, est plus, ly plus, ed plus, and in before Plus code; four-word code: short code before the group; letter code: short code before the group;
所述拼音文字中罗马尼亚语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即罗马 尼亚语码词码； 其键盘釆用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， ·字母是本国语或本 国语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单 单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个 码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码；按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词 在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺 序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后 面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没 有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词 码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； '前组码是指 单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词 在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后 组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系；In the phonetic alphabet of Romanian, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code word codes are words and letters, that is, the Romanian code word codes; the keyboard uses an international universal keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters. The letters are The native alphabet or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; The codeword code can be divided into three words: three-word code, two-word code, four-word code, one-word code, and multi-word code Codes; codeword codes can be divided into single word codes and multiple word codes according to the number of words to be entered; single word codes refer to codeword codes in which one codeword enters one word; multiword codes refer to one codeword in which multiple words are entered. Enter the codeword code of multiple words for a word or several codewords; according to the position and order of the words in the codeword, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the word in front The middle group code refers to the codeword code in which the word is in the middle; the latter group code refers to the codeword code in which the word follows; according to whether the codeword code is simplified and the simplified order In order, codeword codes can be divided into: shortcodes and full codes; shortcodes are further divided into: front shortcodes, back shortcodes and front and back shortcodes; shortcodes are codeword codes that simplify the full code; before shortcodes Refers to the simplified code that simplifies the previous word; Post-simplified code refers to the simplified code that simplifies the following words; Pre- and post-code refers to the simplified code that simplifies the preceding and following words; Full-code means that there is no simplified Code word code; Three word code word code refers to a code word code with three words; Three word code word codes can be divided into: single three word code and multiple three word code; single three word code refers to a three word Enter a three-word code for one word for a codeword; Multiple three-word codes refer to a three-word code for a three-word codeword for multiple words or several three-word codes for multiple words; According to the position and order of words in the codeword , Can be divided into: front group code, middle group code and back group code; 'the front group code refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group The code refers to the three-word code following the word; what is simplified according to the short code is the full code Part of the three groups of codes can be combined according to the form of the front group code, the middle group code and the back group code; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard, and obey the mainstream general standard correspondence relationship;
( 1 ) '三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c. 后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二 单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几 个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前 组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单 词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合 出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前 后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由 附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别 在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前 加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； (1) 'Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a. Short code before the group of words, b. Short code before the group of words, and c. Short code before the words of the second group; Two-word code word code; single-two word code refers to a two-word code word that enters one word; two-word code refers to a two-word code word that enters multiple words or several second words Codeword Enter the two-word code of multiple words; according to the position and order of the words in the codeword, it can be divided into: the first group code and the last group code; the former group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; The group code refers to the two-word code word code following the word; according to the simplified code, it is a part of the full code. According to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined: a. Before Group full code, b. Front group short code, c. Front group short code, d. Front group front and back code, e. Back group full code, f. Back group front code, g. Back group word The short code and the short code before and after the h. The plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes. The plus code can be divided into a. Pre-code, b. Post-code and c. Pre-code and pre-code; Pre-code refers to the code plus in front of the letter; Post-code code refers to the plus code in the back of the letter; ing plus code, er plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in before plus code; Four-word code word code: previous group short code; letter code word code: previous group short code;
所述拼音文字中马来语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即马来语码 词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国语字母 对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词 码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词码 和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个码词输 入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分 为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词在中 间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全 码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后面的 单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没有简 化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三 单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三 单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词码； 按 照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在 前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面 的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后组码的 形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； （1 )三 单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c.后组单 词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二单词码 词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单 词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码和 后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单词码词 码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合出其中 实用的八种码： a.前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由附加字母 与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是 指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别在前面和 后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前加码； 四 单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； In the Malay language, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code word codes are words and letters, that is, the Malay code word codes; the keyboard is an international keyboard, and the code elements are 26 English letters. The letters are The native alphabet or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; The codeword code can be divided into three words: three-word code, two-word code, four-word code, one-word code, and multi-word code Codes; codeword codes can be divided into single word codes and multiple word codes according to the number of words to be entered; single word codes refer to codeword codes in which one codeword enters one word; multiword codes refer to one codeword in which multiple words are entered. Enter the codeword code of multiple words for a word or several codewords. According to the position and order of the words in the codeword, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the word in front The middle group code refers to the codeword code with the word in the middle; the latter group code refers to the codeword code with the word to the back; according to whether the codeword code is simplified and in the simplified order, the codeword code can be divided into: Short codes and full codes; short codes are divided into: Short code and short code before and after; short code refers to the code word code that simplifies the full code; pre-short code refers to the short code that simplifies the previous word; post short code refers to the simplification of the subsequent word Code; short-code before and after refers to the simplified code of the preceding and following words; full code refers to the codeword code without simplification; three-word code wordcode refers to the codeword code of three words; three-word code Word codes can be divided into: single three-word codes and multiple three-word codes; single three-word codes refer to a three-word code word to enter a single word; multiple three-word codes refer to a three-word code word to enter multiple words Or several three-word codes Enter the three-word codes of multiple words; According to the position and order of the words in the code words, it can be divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code; the former group code refers to the word in front The middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; what is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, according to The form of the former group code, the middle group code and the last group code can be combined The code corresponds to each key on the keyboard, and obeys the mainstream common standard correspondence; (1) Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a. Before the group of words before the short code, b. Before the group of words before the short code And c. Short code before the next group of words; two-word code word code refers to a code word code with two words; a single-two word code refers to a two-word code word into a two-word code; more than two words The code refers to a two-word code where a two-word code word enters multiple words or several two-word code words enter a plurality of words; according to the position and order of the words in the code word, it can be divided into: the former group code and Back group code; The first group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; The latter group code refers to the two-word code word code in the back of the word; What is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, according to the previous group code And the last group of codes, you can combine eight practical codes among them: a. The first group of full codes, b. The previous group of short codes, c. The previous group of short codes, d. The previous group of words before and after, e. Full code of the back group, f. Short code of the back group, g. Short code of the back group of words and h. Short code of the back group; Plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes. For: a. Pre-code, b. Post-code, and c. Pre-code and pre-code; pre-code refers to the code plus before the letter; post-code refers to the code plus after the letter; pre-code means the code plus and minus the letter respectively; Including: ing plus code, er plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in before plus code; Four-word code word code: short code before group; letter code word code: previous group code;
对于拼音文字中的马其顿语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即马其 顿语码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国 语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单 单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个 码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码；按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词 在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺 序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后 面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没 有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词 码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指 单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词 在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后 组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； For Macedonian in Pinyin, code morphemes are words and letters; code word codes are words and letters, that is, Macedonian code word codes; its keyboard uses international keyboards, and the code element is 26 English letters, and the letters are national languages. Or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; the codeword code can be divided into three word codeword codes, two word codeword codes, four word codeword codes, one word codeword codes, and multiword code wordcodes according to the number of words; Codeword codes can be divided into single word codes and multiple word codes according to the number of words to be input; single word codes refer to the codeword codes for one codeword and one word; multiword codes refer to the multiple words or codewords for one codeword. Enter several codeword codewords for several codewords; according to the position and order of the words in the codewords, it can be divided into: the front group code, the middle group code, and the last group code; the former group code refers to the code in front of the word Word code; the middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the code word code in the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and the order of simplification, the code word code can be divided into: short code and Full code Shortcode before, shortcode and before and after shortcode; shortcode refers to the codeword code that simplifies the full code; preshortcode refers to the shortcode that simplifies the previous word; postcode refers to the following words Simplified shortcodes; front and back shortcodes are simplified shortcodes of the preceding and following words; full codes are codeword codes that are not simplified; three-word codeword codes are codeword codes with three words Three-word codes can be divided into: single-three-word codes and multiple-three-word codes; single-three-word codes refer to a three-word code to enter a single-word three-word code; multiple-three-word codes refer to a three-word code word Enter multiple words or several three-word codes. Enter three-word codes for multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the code words, they can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code. The former group code is It refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the full code simplified according to the short code Part of the pre-group code, middle-group code, and post-group code Type, three kinds of codes may be combined; each key on the keyboard corresponding to the letters, the main subject to common standards corresponding relation;
( 1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c. 后组单词前简码; 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二 单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几 个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前 组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单 词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合 出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前 后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由 附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别 在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前 加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； (1) Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a. Short code before the group of words, b. Short code before the group of words, and c. Short code before the group of words; two-word code means the word The number of two codeword codes is single; the two-word code refers to a two-word codeword inputting a two-word code; the multi-word code refers to a two-word codeword inputting multiple words or several two-word codes. Enter the two-word code of multiple words according to the position and order of the words in the code word, which can be divided into: the former group code and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group The code refers to the two-word code behind the word; according to the simplified code, it is a part of the full code. According to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined: a. Full code, b. Short code before the group of words, c. Short code before the group, d. Short code before and after the group, e. Full code after the group, f. Short code before the group, g. After group of words Shortcode and h. Shortcodes before and after the group; plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes, plus code can be divided into: a. Pre-coding, b. Post-coding and c. Pre- and post-coding; Pre-coding refers to the letter coding in front of the letter; Post-coding refers to the letter coding in the back of the letter; , Er plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in before plus code; Four-word code word code: previous group short code; letter code word code: previous group short code;
对于拼音文字中的南非荷兰语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即南 非荷兰语码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或 本国语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词 码、 四单词码词码、一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一 个码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺 序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指 单词在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化 的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码 是指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指 对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是 指没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分 为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词 码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单 词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是 指单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单 词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和 后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； ( 1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c. 后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二 单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几 个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前 组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单 词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合 出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前 后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由 附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别 在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前 加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； For Afrikaans in Pinyin, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code words are words and letters, that is, the Afrikaans code word codes; the keyboard is an international universal keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters. The letters are The native alphabet or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; The codeword code can be divided into three words: three-word code, two-word code, four-word code, one-word code, and multi-word code Codes; codeword codes can be divided into single word codes and multiple word codes according to the number of words to be entered; single word codes refer to codeword codes in which one codeword enters one word; multiword codes refer to one codeword in which multiple words are entered. Enter the codeword code of multiple words for a word or several codewords; according to the position and order of the words in the codeword The order can be divided into: the first group code, the middle group code and the last group code; the former group code refers to the code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the word The following codeword codes; According to whether the codeword codes are simplified and in the simplified order, the codeword codes can be divided into: shortcodes and full codes; shortcodes are further divided into: shortcodes before, shortcodes, and shortcodes before and after; The code refers to a simplified code word code that simplifies the full code; the front short code refers to a short code that simplifies the previous word; the last short code refers to a short code that simplifies the subsequent word; the front and back short codes refer to the front And the following simplified words; full code means no simplified code word code; three-word code word code refers to three code words; three-word code word codes can be divided into: single three words Code and multiple three-word code; single three-word code refers to a three-word code word to enter a three-word code; multiple three-word code refers to a three-word code word to enter multiple words or several three-word codes The three-word code of a word; according to the position and order of the words in the code word, it can be divided into : The first group code, the middle group code and the last group code; the first group code refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the last group code refers to the word in the middle The following three-word codes are codewords. The simplified code is a part of the full code. According to the form of the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code, three types of codes can be combined. The letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard. Obey the corresponding correspondences of the mainstream standards; (1) Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a. Pre-code for the first group of words, b. Pre-code for the middle group of words, and c. Pre-code for the next group of words; Word code word code refers to two word code words; single two word code refers to a two word code word into a two word code; multiple two word code refers to a two word code word to enter multiple Word or several two-word code words Enter the two-word code of multiple words; according to the position and order of the words in the code word, it can be divided into: the first group code and the last group code; the former group code refers to the first two words of the word Word code word code; the latter group code refers to the word code behind the two word code; Simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code. According to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined: a . Full group before the code, b. Short group before the word in the previous group, c Short code before and after group, d short code before and after group, e. Full code after group, f. Short code before group, g. Short code after group and h. Short code before and after group; plus is Coding consisting of additional letters and codewords, plus code can be divided into: a. Pre-code, b. Post-code, and c. Pre- and post-code; pre-code refers to the letter in front of the code; post-code means the letter in the back The plus and minus codes refer to the plus and minus of the letters respectively; including: ing plus code, er plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in before plus code; Four-word plus code: short code before group; letters Code word code: short code before group;
所述拼音文字中挪威语 （博克马尔语） ， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字 母， 即挪威语 （博克马尔语）码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字 母， 字母是本国语或本国语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词 码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要 输入单词个数可分为： 单单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码 词码； 多单词码是指一个码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单 词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面 的码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码 词码是否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后 简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简 化的简码； 后简码是指对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单 词简化的简码； 全码是指没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词 码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词 输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词 码输入多个单词的三单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组 码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词 码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从 主流通用标准对应关系； （1 )三单词码词输入方式，①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c.后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词 码词输入多个单词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位 置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码 是指单词在后面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后 组码的形式， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组 后简码、 d.前组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后 组前后简码； 加码是由附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b. 后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly 加码、 ed加码和 in前加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； 对于拼音文字中的挪威语 （尼诺斯克语） ， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和 字母， 即挪威语 （尼诺斯克语）码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文 字母， 字母是本国语或本国语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单 词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照 要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的 码词码； 多单词码是指一个码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照 单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前 面的码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照 码词码是否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行 简化的简码； 后简码是指对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的 单词简化的简码； 全码是指没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码 词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码 词输入一个单词的三单词码； '多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单 词码输入多个单词的三单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中 组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单 词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从 主流通用标准对应关系； （1 )三单词码词输入方式，①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c.后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词 码词输入多个单词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位 置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码 是指单词在后面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后 组码的形式， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组 后简码、 d.前组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后 组前后简码； '加码是由附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b. 后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly 加码、 ed加码和 in前加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； 对于拼音文字中的葡萄牙语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即葡萄 牙语码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国 语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单 单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个 码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码；按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词 在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺 序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后 面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没 有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词 码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指 单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词 在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后 组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系；In the Pinyin text, Norwegian (Bokmal), the code morpheme is a word and a letter; the codeword code is a word and a letter, that is, the Norwegian (Bokmal) codeword code; the keyboard uses an international universal keyboard, and the code element is 2 6 English letters, the letters are the Latin letters corresponding to the native language or the native language; Code words can be divided into three words: two words, two words, four words, one word Code word code and multi-word code word code; Code word code can be divided according to the number of words to be entered: single word code and multi word code; single word code refers to a code word to enter a word code word code; multiple word code It refers to a codeword code where one codeword is used to input multiple words or several codewords are used to input multiple words. According to the position and order of words in the codeword, it can be divided into: the front group code, the middle group code, and the rear group code; The first group code refers to the codeword code of the word in front; the middle group code refers to the codeword code of the word in the middle; the last group code refers to the codeword code of the word after; according to whether the codeword code is simplified and the simplified order, Code word codes can be divided into: Shortcodes are divided into: shortcodes before, shortcodes, and shortcodes before and after; shortcodes are codeword codes that simplify the full code; former shortcodes are shortcodes that simplify the previous word; The post-short code refers to the simplified code that simplifies the following words; the front and back short codes refers to the simplified code that simplifies the preceding and following words; the full code refers to the code word code without simplification; the three-word code word code refers to the word There are three codeword codes; three-word codeword codes can be divided into: single-three-word codes and multiple-three-word codes; single-three-word codes refer to a three-word code that enters a three-word code; more than three The word code refers to a three-word code that inputs multiple words or several three-word codes that input multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the code word, it can be divided into: front group code, middle group code And the next group code; the first group code refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the second group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; Simplified according to the short code is part of the full code, according to the previous group code, medium Three types of codes can be combined in the form of codes and back group codes; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard and obey the mainstream universal standard correspondence; (1) three-word code word input methods, ① word input codes: a. Words in the previous group The pre-shortcode, b. The pre-short code of the middle group of words, and c. The pre-short code of the second group of words; the two-word code word code refers to a code word code with two words; Single two-word code refers to a two-word code where one two-word code word enters one word; Multiple two-word code refers to a two-word code where one two-word code word enters multiple words or several two-word code words enter multiple words; According to the position and order of the words in the codeword, it can be divided into: the first group code and the second group code; the first group code refers to the two-word code word before the word; the last group code refers to the two-word code after the word Word code; The simplified code is a part of the full code, and according to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined: a. The former group full code, b. The former group of words before the short group Code, c. Short code before and after group, d. Short code before and after group, e. Full code after group, f. Short code before group, g. Short code after group and h. Short code before and after ; Plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword code, plus code can be divided into: a. Before the code, b. After the code and c. Before and after the code; before the code means the letter in front of the code; after the code means Letters are added at the back; plus and minus means the letters are added at the front and the back respectively; including: ing Plus code, er plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in code before; four-word code word code: the previous group short code; letter code word code: the previous group short code; for the Norwegian (Nepal (Norsk), code morphemes are words and letters; code word codes are words and letters, that is, Norwegian (Nynorsk) code word codes; its keyboard uses international universal keyboard, the code element is 2 6 English letters The letter is the native alphabet or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; the codeword code can be divided into three words: three-word code, two-word code, four-word code, one-word code, and more Word code word code; Code word code can be divided according to the number of words to be entered: single word code and multi word code; single word code refers to a code word to enter a word code word code; multi word code refers to a code word Enter multiple words or several code words. Enter code words for multiple words. According to the position and order of words in the code words, they can be divided into: front group code, middle group code, and last group code. The former group code refers to The word code in front of the word; The code word code with the word in the middle; the back group code refers to the code word code with the word behind; according to whether the code word code is simplified and in the simplified order, the code word code can be divided into: short code and full code; short code is divided into : Before short code, after short code and before and after short code; short code refers to the code word code that simplifies the full code; before short code refers to the short code that simplifies the previous word; after short code refers to the following Simplified shortcodes for words; Shortcodes before and after refer to simplified shortcodes for the preceding and following words; full codes are codewords without simplified codewords; three-word codewordcodes are codewords with three words Three-word codes can be divided into: single-three-word codes and multiple-three-word codes; single-three-word codes refer to a three-word code that enters a single word; 'multi-three-word codes refer to a three-word code Enter multiple words or several three-word codes for codewords. Enter three-word codes for multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the codewords, they can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group The code refers to the three-word code in front of the word; the middle code refers to the word in the The three-word code between the words; the last group code refers to the three-word code behind the word; what is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, according to the form of the first group code, the middle group code and the last group code, Three types of codes can be combined; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard, and obey the mainstream universal standard correspondence; (1) three-word code word input method, ① word input code: a. The previous group of short codes, b. The middle group Pre-word short code and c. Pre-short code of the next group of words; Two-word code word code refers to a code word code with 2 words; Single-two word code refers to a two-word code that enters a word into a two-word code Multi-two-word code refers to a two-word code where one two-word code word enters multiple words or several two-word code words enter multiple words; According to the position and order of words in the code word, it can be divided into: the previous group code And the next group code; the former group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; what is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, according to the previous group Code and post-group code, which can be combined into practical eight Code: a. Full code before the group, b. Short code before the group of words, c. Short code before the group of words before, d. Short code before and after the words of group before, e. Full code before the group of groups, f. Short code before the group of groups, g. short code after the group of words and h. short code before and after the group; 'plus code is a combination of additional letters and code word code, plus code can be divided into: a. pre-code, b. post-code and c. Pre- and post-code: Pre-code refers to the plus of the letter in front; Post-code refers to the plus of the letter at the back; Pre- and post-code refers to the plus of the letter before and after the letter; ed plus code and in code; four-word code word code: the previous group short code; letter code word code: the first group short code; for Portuguese in pinyin text, the code morpheme is the word and letter; the code word code is the word And the letter, that is, the Portuguese code word code; its keyboard uses the international universal keyboard, the code element is 26 English letters, the letter is the native language or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the national language letter; the code word code can be divided according to the number of words: Three-word code word code, Two-word code word code, Four-word code word code A code word and the code word multiple word code word code; code word according to the number of input code words can be divided into: single Word code and multi-word code; single-word code refers to a code word that enters a word; multi-word code refers to a code word that enters multiple words or several code words to enter multiple words; The position and order of the words in the code words can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the code word in the middle of the word The last group code refers to the codeword code behind the word; according to whether the codeword code is simplified and in the simplified order, the codeword code can be divided into: short code and full code; short code is further divided into: before short code, after Shortcodes and shortcodes before and after; shortcodes are shortcodes that simplify the full code; front shortcodes are shortcodes that simplify the previous word; last shortcodes are shortcodes that simplify the subsequent words ; The front and back short codes refer to the simplified short codes of the front and back words; the full code refers to the code words without simplified code; the three word code word codes refer to the code words with three words; the three word code words Codes can be divided into: single three word codes and multiple three word codes; single three word codes refer to one Enter a three-word code for one word for a three-word code word; A multi-three-word code refers to a three-word code for a three-word code word to enter multiple words or several three-word codes to enter multiple words; according to the position of the word in the code word And the order can be divided into: the first group code, the middle group code and the last group code; the former group code refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; The group code refers to the three-word code word code behind the word; according to the simplified code, it is a part of the full code. According to the form of the first group code, the middle group code and the last group code, three types of codes can be combined; letters and Each key on the keyboard corresponds to the corresponding relationship of the mainstream universal standards;
( 1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c. 后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二 单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几 个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 多二单词码 可分为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在 后面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前 组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前 后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指' 字母分别在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码 和 in前加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； (1) Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a. Short code before the group of words, b. Short code before the group of words, and c. Short code before the group of words; two-word code means the word The number of two codeword codes is single; the two-word code refers to a two-word codeword inputting a two-word code; the multi-word code refers to a two-word codeword inputting multiple words or several two-word codes. Enter the two-word code of multiple words according to the position and order of the words in the code word. The two-word code can be divided into: the former group code and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the two-word code word in front of the word The last group code refers to the two-word code word code followed by the word; according to the simplified code, it is a part of the full code. According to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined: a. Full code before the group, b. Short code before the group of words, c. Short code before the group before, d. Short code before and after the group of words, e. Full code before the group of groups, f. Short code before the group of groups, g. After the group of words after the short code and h. After the group of short codes before and after; plus code is a combination of additional letters and code word code, plus code It can be divided into: a. Pre-code, b. Post-code and c. Pre- and post-code; pre-code refers to the letter plus in the front; post-code refers to the letter plus in the back; pre-code means the 'letter in front and back respectively Include: ing plus code, er plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in before plus code; four-word code word code: previous group short code; letter code word code: previous group short code;
对于拼音文字中的瑞典语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即瑞典语 码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国语字 母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单 词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词 码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个码词 输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可 分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词在 中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全 码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后面的 单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没有简 化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三 单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三 单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词码； 按 照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在 前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面 的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后组码的 形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； （1 )三 单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c.后组单 词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二单词码 词输入一个单 i司的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单 词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码和 后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单词码词 码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合出其中 实用的八种码： a.前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由附加字母 与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是 指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别在前面和 后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前加码； 四 单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； For Swedish in Pinyin, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code words are words and letters, that is, the Swedish code word codes; the keyboard is an international keyboard, and the code element is 2 6 English letters, and the letters are national languages. Or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; the codeword code can be divided into three word codeword codes, two word codeword codes, four word codeword codes, one word codeword codes, and multiword code wordcodes according to the number of words; Codeword codes can be divided into single word codes and multiple word codes according to the number of words to be input; single word codes refer to the codeword codes for one codeword to enter one word; multiword codes refer to the codewords to enter multiple words or Enter several codeword codewords for several codewords; according to the position and order of the words in the codewords, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the code in front of the word Word code; the middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the code word code in the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and the order of simplification, the code word code can be divided into: short code and Full code; short code is divided into: former short code Short code and short code before and after; short code refers to the code word code that simplifies the full code; pre-short code refers to the short code that simplifies the previous word; post short code refers to the simplification of the subsequent word Code; short-code before and after refers to the simplified code of the preceding and following words; full code refers to the codeword code without simplification; three-word code wordcode refers to the codeword code of three words; three-word code Word codes can be divided into: single three-word codes and multiple three-word codes; single three-word codes refer to a three-word code word to enter a single word; multiple three-word codes refer to a three-word code word to enter multiple words Or several three-word codes Enter the three-word codes of multiple words; According to the position and order of the words in the code words, it can be divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code; the former group code refers to the word in front The middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; what is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, according to The form of the former group code, the middle group code and the last group code can be combined Three kinds of codes; keys corresponding to the letters on the keyboard, the main subject to common standards corresponding relation; (1) tris Word code word input method, ① word input code: a. Before the group of words before the short code, b. Before the group of words before the short code and c. After the group of words before the short code; two-word code word code means that the number of words is 2 A single two-word code refers to a two-word code word entering a single i Division two-word code; a multiple two-word code refers to a two-word code word to enter multiple words or several two-word code words to enter The two-word code of multiple words; according to the position and order of the words in the code word, it can be divided into: the former group code and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group code is Refers to the following two-word code word code; according to the simplified code, it is a part of the full code. According to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined among them: a. Full group code before , B. Short code before the group of words, c. Short code before the group, d. Short code before and after the group, e. Full code after the group, f. Short code before the group, g. Short code after the group And h. Short codes before and after the group; plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes, plus code can be divided into: a . Before plus code, b. Post-addition and c. Pre- and post-addition; Pre-addition refers to the addition of letters in the front; Post-addition refers to the addition of letters in the back; Pre-addition refers to the addition of letters in front and back of the letter respectively; Plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in code; four-word code word code: short code before the group; alphabet code word code: short code before the group;
对于拼音文字中的塞尔维亚 （拉丁）语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字 母， 即塞尔维亚语（拉丁语）'码词码； 其键盘釆用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字 母， 字母是本国语或本国语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词 码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要 输入单词个数可分为： 单单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码 词码； 多单词码是指一个码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单 词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面 的码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码 词码是否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后 简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简 化的简码； 后简码是指对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单 词简化的简码； 全码是指没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词 码； 三单词码词码可分为： 単三 词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词 输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三 ·词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词 码输入多个单词的三单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组 码和后组码； .前组码是指单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词 码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从 主流通用标准对应关系； （1 )三单词码词输入方式，①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c.后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词 码词输入多个单词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位 置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码 是指单词在后面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后 组码的形式， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组 后简码、 d.前组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后 组前后简码； 加码是由附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b. 后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly 加码、 ed加码和 in前加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码为： 前组前简码； 对于拼音文字中的塞尔维亚-克罗地亚语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字 母，即塞尔维亚-克罗地亚语码词码；其键盘采用国际通用键盘，码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词 码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入 单词个数可分为： 单单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是旨一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码 词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词 码； 中组码是指单词在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是 否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和 前后简码； 简码是指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简 码； 后简码是指对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化 的简码； 全码是指没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三 单词码词码可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一 个单词的三单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入 多个单词的三单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后 组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组 码、 中组码和后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用 标准对应关系； （1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组 单词前简码和 c.后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单 词码是指一个二单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输 入多个单词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺 序， 可分为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单 词在后面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的 形式， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码： a.前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简 码； 加码是由附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码 是指字母分别在前面和后面的加码；包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加 码和 in前加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； For Serbian (Latin) words in Pinyin, code morphemes are words and letters; code word codes are words and letters, that is, Serbian (Latin) 'code word codes; the keyboard uses an international universal keyboard, and the code element is 2 6 English letters, the letters are Latin letters corresponding to the native language or the native language alphabet; codeword codes can be divided according to the number of words: three-word code word code, two-word code word code, four-word code word code, one-word code Word code and multi-word code word code; Code word code can be divided according to the number of words to be entered: single word code and multi-word code; single word code refers to a code word to enter a word code word code; multi-word code is Refers to the codeword code where one codeword enters multiple words or several codewords enter multiple words; according to the position and order of the words in the codeword, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; The group code refers to the code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the code word code in the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and the simplified order, the code Word codes can be divided into: Shortcodes are divided into: shortcodes before, shortcodes, and shortcodes before and after; shortcodes are codeword codes that simplify the full code; former shortcodes are shortcodes that simplify the previous word; The post-short code refers to the simplified code that simplifies the following words; the front and back short codes refers to the simplified code that simplifies the preceding and following words; the full code refers to the code word code without simplification; the three-word code word code refers to the word There are three codeword codes; Three-word codeword codes can be divided into: 単 Three-word codes and multiple three-word codes; Single three-word codes refer to a three-word code that enters a three-word code; more than three · Word code refers to a three-word code or multiple three-word codes to enter multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the code word, it can be divided into: front group code, middle group The first group code refers to the three-word code word with the word in front; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word with the word in the middle; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word with the word in the middle. Code; simplified according to the short code is part of the full code, according to the previous group code, the middle group Three types of codes can be combined in the form of the back group code; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard and obey the mainstream universal standard correspondence; (1) Three-word code word input method, ① the word input code: a. Before the words in the previous group Short code, b. Short code before the middle group of words and c. Short code before the second group of words; two-word code word code refers to a code word code with two words; single-two word code refers to a two-word code word Enter a two-word code for one word; Multi-two-word code refers to a two-word code where one two-word code word enters multiple words or several two-word code words enter multiple words; According to the position and order of words in the code word, It can be divided into: the first group code and the last group code; the former group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group code refers to the two-word code word code in the back of the word; Part of the code, according to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, can be combined into eight practical codes: a. Full group before the code, b. Short group before the word, c. Short group before the code, d . Short code before and after group of words, e. Full code after group, f. Short code before group, g. Word after group Shortcode and h. Short code before and after the group; Code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes. The code can be divided into: a. Pre-code, b. Post-code and c. Pre-code; Letters in the front are coded up; letters in the back are coded in the back; letters in the front and back are coded in front and back of the letter respectively; including: ing plus, er plus, est plus, ly plus, ed plus, and in plus; Four-word code word code: the first group of short code; the letter code word code is: the first group of short code; for Serbian-Croatian in Pinyin, the code morpheme is the word and letter; the code word code is the word and letter, that is, Serbian-Croatian code word code; its keyboard uses the international universal keyboard, the code element is 2 6 English letters, The alphabet is the native alphabet or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; The codeword code can be divided into three words: three-word code, two-word code, four-word code, one-word code, and multiple words. Codeword code; Codeword code can be divided into: single word code and multiple word code; single word code is a codeword code that enters a single word; multiword code means a codeword input Multiple words or several code words Enter the code word code of multiple words; according to the position and order of words in the code word, it can be divided into: front group code, middle group code, and last group code; the former group code refers to the word The codeword code in the front; the codeword in the middle group refers to the codeword code with the word in the middle; the code in the latter group refers to the codeword code with the word in the back; according to whether the codeword code is simplified and in the simplified order, the codeword code can be divided into : Shortcode and full code; shortcodes are further divided into: front shortcode, back shortcode and front and back shortcode; shortcode refers to the codeword code that simplifies the full code; front shortcode refers to the simplification of the previous word Shortcode; the shortcode refers to the simplified code that simplifies the following words ; Pre- and post-codes refer to simplified codes for words before and after; full codes refer to code words without simplified codes; three-word code word codes refer to code words with three words; three-word code words Codes can be divided into: single three-word code and multiple three-word code; single three-word code refers to a three-word code word to enter a single word; multiple three-word code refers to a three-word code word to enter multiple words or Several three-word codes Enter the three-word codes of multiple words; According to the position and order of the words in the code words, they can be divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code; the former group code refers to the word in front Three-word code word code; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code with the word in the middle; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word code with the word behind; according to the simplified code, it is a part of the full code. The form of group code, middle group code and post group code can be combined into three types of codes; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard and obey the mainstream universal standard correspondence; (1) Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a. short code before the group of words, b. before the middle group of words Shortcode and c. Shortcode before the next group of words; Two-word code word code refers to a code word with two words; Single-two word code refers to a two-word code that enters a word into a two-word code; more A two-word code refers to a two-word code where a two-word code word enters multiple words or several two-word code words enter multiple words; according to the position and order of the words in the code word, it can be divided into: the first group code and the back Group code; the first group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group code refers to the two-word code word code in the back of the word; what is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, and according to the previous group code and The form of the last group of codes can be combined into eight practical codes: a. The full code of the previous group, b. The short code of the previous group of words, c. The short code of the previous group of words, d. The short code of the previous group of words, e Full code of the back group, f. Short code of the back group, g. Short code of the back group words and h. Short code of the back group before and after; plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes. The plus code can be divided into : A. Pre-code, b. Post-code and c. Pre-code and post-code; Pre-code means the letter in front of the code; Post-code means the letter in the code Back-up code; front-to-back code refers to the code before and after the letter respectively; including: ing code, er code, est code, ly code, ed code and in code; four-word code code: short code before the group; Letter code word code: short code before the previous group;
对于拼音文字中的塞尔维亚 -西里尔语，码词素为单词和字母；码词码是单词和字母， 即塞尔维亚-西里尔语码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母 是本国语或本国语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词 个数可分为： 单单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多 单词码是指一个码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词 中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； .前组码是指单词在前面的码词码; 中组码是指单词在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简 化以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后 简码； 简码是指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简 码； 全码是指没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词 码词码可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单 词的三单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个 单词的三单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组 码是指单词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准 对应关系； （1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词 前简码和 c.后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码 是指一个二单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多 个单词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在 后面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码： a.前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前 组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前 后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指 字母分别在前面和后面的加码； 包括： . ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码 和 in前加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； For Serbian-Cyrillic in Pinyin, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code words are words and letters, that is, the Serbian-Cyrillic code word code; the keyboard uses an international keyboard, and the code element is 2 6 English Letters, letters are Latin letters corresponding to the native language or the native language alphabet; codeword codes can be divided according to the number of words: three-word codeword code, two-word codewordcode, four-word codewordcode, one-wordcodewordcode and Multi-word code word codes; Code word codes can be divided according to the number of words to be entered: single-word codes and multi-word codes; single-word codes refer to a code word that enters a word; multi-word codes refer to a code Enter multiple words or several code words to enter multiple code words. According to the position and order of the words in the code words, they can be divided into: front group code, middle group code, and rear group code. It refers to the codeword code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the codeword code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the codeword code in the back of the word; according to whether the codeword code is simplified and the simplified order, the codeword code Can be divided into: short code and full code; Shortcodes are divided into: shortcodes before, shortcodes, and shortcodes before and after; shortcodes are codeword codes that simplify the full code; former shortcodes are shortcodes that simplify the previous word; later shortcodes Refers to simplified shortcodes for the following words; Pre and post shortcodes refer to simplified shortcodes for the preceding and following words; full code refers to the codeword code without simplification; three-word codewordcode refers to the number of words as Three code words; Three word codes can be divided into: single three word codes and multiple three word codes; single three word codes refer to a three word code that enters a three word code; multiple three word codes are Refers to a three-word code to enter multiple words or several three-word codes to enter multiple words to a three-word code; according to the position and order of the words in the code word, it can be divided into: the front group code, the middle group code, and the rear group The first group code refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group The code refers to the three-word code word behind the word; according to the simplified code, it is a part of the full code. According to the form of the first group code, the middle group code and the last group code, three types of codes can be combined; letters and keyboard Each key corresponds to the common general standard correspondence; (1) Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a. Before the group of words before the short code, b. Before the group of words before the short code and c. After the group of words The first short code; the two-word code word code refers to the code number of two words; the single-two word code refers to a two-word code word to enter a two-word code; the multi-word code refers to a two-word code Enter multiple words or several two-word codewords. Enter two-word codes of multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the codeword, it can be divided into: the first group code and the last group code; the former group code refers to The first two-word code word of the word in front; the last group code refers to the second word code of the word in the back; simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, and can be combined according to the form of the first group code and the last group code Come out of eight practical codes: a. Full group before, b. Front Short code before words, c. Short codes before groups, d. Short codes before groups of words, e. Full codes after groups, f. Short codes before groups, g. Short codes after groups of words, and h. After groups Short code before and after; plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes, plus code can be divided into: a. Pre-code, b. Post-code and c. Pre- and post-code; pre-code refers to the letter in front of the code; The plus code refers to the plus code of the letter at the back; the plus code means the plus code of the letter to the front and the back respectively; including: .ing plus code, er plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in front plus code; Short code in front of group; Word code in short group: Short code in front of group;
对于拼音文字中的斯瓦西里语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即斯 瓦西里语码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或 本国语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词 码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一 个码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺 序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指 单词在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化 的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码 是指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指 对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是 指没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分 为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词 码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单 词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是 指单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单 词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和 后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； ( 1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： -a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c. 后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二 单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几 个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前 组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单 词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合 出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前 后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由 附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别 在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前 加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； 对于拼音文字中的土耳其语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即土耳 其语码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国 语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单 单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个 码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码；按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词 在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺 序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后 面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没 有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词 码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指 单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词 在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后 组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系；For Swahili in Pinyin text, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code words are words and letters, that is, the Swahili code word code; the keyboard uses an international keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters. The alphabet is the native alphabet or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; The codeword code can be divided into three words: three-word code, two-word code, four-word code, one-word code, and multiple words. Codeword code; Codeword code can be divided into: single word code and multiple word code; single word code refers to the codeword code for one codeword to enter one word; multiword code means the codeword input for one word Multiple words or several code words Enter the code word code of multiple words; according to the position and order of words in the code word, it can be divided into: front group code, middle group code, and last group code; the former group code refers to the word The codeword code in the front; the codeword in the middle group refers to the codeword code with the word in the middle; the code in the latter group refers to the codeword code with the word in the back; according to whether the codeword code is simplified and in the simplified order, the codeword code can be divided into : Short code and full code; short code is divided into Shortcode before, shortcode and before and after shortcode; shortcode refers to the codeword code that simplifies the full code; preshortcode refers to the shortcode that simplifies the previous word; postcode refers to the following words Simplified shortcodes; front and back shortcodes are simplified shortcodes of the preceding and following words; full codes are codeword codes that are not simplified; three-word codeword codes are codeword codes with three words Three-word codes can be divided into: single-three-word codes and multiple-three-word codes; single-three-word codes refer to a three-word code to enter a single-word three-word code; multiple-three-word codes refer to a three-word code word Enter multiple words or several three-word codes. Enter three-word codes for multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the code words, they can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code. The former group code is It refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the full code simplified according to the short code Part, in the form of the former group code, the middle group code and the last group code Three types of codes can be combined; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard, and follow the mainstream common standard correspondence; (1) three-word code word input method, ① word input code: -a. The first group of words before the short code, b. Group short code before and c. Group short word before short code; two-word code word code refers to the code number of two words; single-two word code refers to a two-word code word to enter a word of two words Codes; multiple two-word codes refer to two-word codes where one two-word code word enters multiple words or several two-word code words enter multiple words; according to the position and order of words in the code words, they can be divided into: the previous group The first group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the second group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; what is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code. The form of the group code and the back group code can be combined into eight practical codes: a. Full code before the group, b. Short code before the group of words, c. Short code before the group, d. Code, e. Full group after the group, f. Short group before the group, g. Short group after the word and h. Before group Shortcode; plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes, plus code can be divided into: a. Pre-code, b. Post-code, and c. Pre- and post-code; pre-code refers to the letter in front of the code; post-code Refers to the plus of the letter at the back; plus and minus means the plus of the letter at the front and the back respectively; including: ing plus, er plus, est plus, ly plus, ed plus and in before plus; four-word code word code: front group Before short code; Letter code word code: Before group short code; For Turkish in Pinyin text, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code words are words and letters, that is, the Turkish code word codes; the keyboard uses an international keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters, and the letters are national languages. Or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; the codeword code can be divided into three word codeword codes, two word codeword codes, four word codeword codes, one word codeword codes, and multiword code wordcodes according to the number of words; Codeword codes can be divided into single word codes and multiple word codes according to the number of words to be input; single word codes refer to the codeword codes for one codeword and one word; multiword codes refer to the multiple words or codewords for one codeword. Enter several codeword codewords for several codewords; according to the position and order of the words in the codewords, it can be divided into: the front group code, the middle group code, and the last group code; the former group code refers to the code in front of the word Word code; the middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the code word code in the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and the order of simplification, the code word code can be divided into: short code and Full code; short code is divided into: before Short code, short code and short code before and after; short code refers to the code word code that simplifies the full code; pre-short code refers to the short code that simplifies the previous word; post short code refers to the simplification of the subsequent word Short codes before and after are short codes that simplify the preceding and following words; full codes are code words that are not simplified; three-word codes are three-word code words; three The word code word code can be divided into: single three word code and multiple three word code; single three word code refers to a three word code word to enter a single word; multiple three word code refers to a three word code word to enter multiple Enter three-word codes of multiple words for several words or several three-word codes. According to the position and order of the words in the code words, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the last group code; the former group code refers to the word The first three-word code word code; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the last group code refers to the three-word code word code after the word; according to the simplified code, it is a part of the full code In the form of the former group code, the middle group code and the latter group code, Together three kinds of codes; keys corresponding to the letters on the keyboard, the main subject to common standards corresponding relation;
( 1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c. 后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二 单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几 个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前 组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单 词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合 出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前 后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由 附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别 在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前 加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； (1) Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a. Short code before the group of words, b. Short code before the group of words, and c. Short code before the group of words; two-word code means the word The number of two codeword codes is single; the two-word code refers to a two-word codeword inputting a two-word code; the multi-word code refers to a two-word codeword inputting multiple words or several two-word codes. Enter the two-word code of multiple words according to the position and order of the words in the code word, which can be divided into: the former group code and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group The code refers to the two-word code behind the word; according to the simplified code, it is a part of the full code. According to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined: a . Full code, b. Short code before the group of words, c. Short code before the group, d. Short code before and after the group, e. Full code after the group, f. Short code before the group, g. After group of words Shortcodes and h. Shortcodes before and after the group; pluscode is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes. The pluscode can be divided into: a. , B. Post-addition and c. Pre- and post-addition; pre-addition refers to the addition of the letter in front; post-addition refers to the addition of the letter at the back; front-end addition refers to the addition of the letter in front and back respectively; Plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in code; four-word code word code: short code before the group; letter code word: short code before the group;
对于拼音文字中的乌克兰语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即乌克 兰语码词码； 其键盘釆用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国 语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单 单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个 码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码；按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词 在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺 序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后 面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没 有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为- 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词 码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指 单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词 在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后 组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系；For the Ukrainian language in Pinyin, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code word codes are words and letters, that is, the Ukrainian code word codes; the keyboard uses an international universal keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters, and the letters are Latin letters corresponding to Mandarin or native Mandarin letters; Codeword codes can be divided according to the number of words: three-word codeword code, two-word codeword code, four-word codeword code, one-word codeword code, and multi-word codewordcode ; Code word code can be divided according to the number of words to be input: single word code and multi word code; single word code refers to a code word to enter a word code word; multi word code refers to a code word to enter multiple words Enter the codeword code of multiple words or several codewords; according to the position and order of the words in the codeword, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the word in front Code word code; the middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the code word code at the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and in the simplified order, the code word code can be divided into: short code And full code; shortcodes are divided into: before Short code, short code and short code before and after; short code refers to the code word code that simplifies the full code; pre-short code refers to the short code that simplifies the previous word; post short code refers to the simplification of the subsequent word Short codes before and after are short codes that simplify the preceding and following words; full codes are code words that are not simplified; three-word codes are three-word code words; three Word code word code can be divided into-single three word code and multiple three word code; single three word code refers to a three word code word to enter a three word code; multiple three word code refers to a three word code word to enter more Enter three words for multiple words or several three-word codes According to the position and order of words in the code words, it can be divided into: the first group code, the middle group code and the last group code; the former group code refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the word The three-word code word code in the middle; the last group code refers to the three-word code word code behind the word; what is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, according to the form of the first group code, the middle group code and the last group code Three types of codes can be combined; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard, and obey the corresponding relationship of the mainstream universal standards;
( 1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 <:. · 后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二 单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几 个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前 组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单 词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合 出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前 后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由 附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别 在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前 加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； (1) Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a. Before the short word of the previous group of words, b. Before the short word of the middle group of words and <:. · before the short word of the next group of words; Refers to two-word code word code; single-two-word code refers to a two-word code word to enter a two-word code; multiple-two-word code refers to a two-word code word to enter multiple words or several two The word code word is a two-word code of multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the code word, it can be divided into: the former group code and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; The last group code refers to the two-word code word code behind the word; according to the simplified code, it is a part of the full code. According to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined: a. Full code in front group, b. Short code in front group, c. Short code in front group, d. Short code in front group, e. Full code in back group, f. Short code in front group, g. Back group The short code after the word and the short code before and after the h. The plus code is a combination of additional letters and the code word code. The plus code can be divided into : A. Pre-code, b. Post-code and c. Pre-code and post-code; pre-code refers to the code plus before the letter; post-code refers to the code plus after the letter; pre-code refers to the code plus and minus the letter respectively; including : Ing plus code, er plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in front plus code; four-word code word code: short code before the group; letter code code: short code before the group;
对于拼音文字中的乌兹别克（拉丁）语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字 母， 即乌兹别克（拉丁）语码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词 码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入 单词个数可分为： 单单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码 词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词 码； 中组码是指单词在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是 否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和 前后简码； 简码是指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简 码； 后简码是指对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化 的简码； 全码是指没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三 单词码词码可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一 个单词的三单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入 多个单词的三单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 多三单词码可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三 单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简 ί马所简化的是全码的一部 分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； （1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前 简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c.后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码 词码； 单二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个 二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词 中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组 码和后组码的形式， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码 和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加 码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的 加码； 前后加码是指字母分别在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加 码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前 简码； For Uzbek (Latin) in Pinyin, code morphemes are words and letters; code words are words and letters, that is, Uzbek (Latin) code words; its keyboard uses international keyboards, and the number of code elements is 26 English Letters, letters are Latin letters corresponding to the native language or the native language alphabet; codeword codes can be divided according to the number of words: three-word codeword code, two-word codewordcode, four-word codewordcode, one-wordcodewordcode and Multi-word code word codes; Code word codes can be divided according to the number of words to be entered: single-word codes and multi-word codes; single-word codes refer to a code word that enters a word; multi-word codes refer to a code Enter multiple words or several codewords into the codeword code of the word; according to the position and order of the words in the codeword, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code is It refers to the codeword code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the codeword code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the codeword code in the back of the word; according to whether the codeword code is simplified and the simplified order, the codeword code can be Divided into: short code and full Shortcodes are further divided into: shortcodes before, shortcodes and shortcodes before and after; shortcodes are codeword codes that simplify the full code; former shortcodes are shortcodes that simplify the previous word; Shortcodes are shortcodes that simplify the following words; front and back shortcodes are shortcodes that simplify the preceding and following words; full codes are codewords that are not simplified; three-word codewordcodes are words Three-word code words; Three-word code words can be divided into: single-three-word codes and multiple-three-word codes; single-three-word codes refer to a three-word code that enters one-word three-word codes; multiple three-word codes The code refers to a three-word code that inputs multiple words or several three-word codes to input multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the code word, the multiple three-word code can be divided into: the first group of codes, The middle group code and the last group code; the first group code refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the last group code refers to the three-word code behind the word Word code; simplified by Jane Ma is part of the full code, according to the previous Three types of codes can be combined in the form of code, middle group code and back group code. The letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard and obey the mainstream universal standard correspondence. (1) Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a The first group of words before the short code, b. The middle group of words before the short code and c. The second group of words before the short code; the two-word code word code refers to the number of two code word code; the single two-word code refers to A two-word code word enters a two-word code of a word; a multiple two-word code refers to a two-word code word that inputs multiple words or a few two-word code words that input multiple words; a word in the code word The position and order can be divided into: the first group code and the second group code; the former group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group code refers to the two-word code word code in the back word; according to the short code Simplified is a part of the full code. According to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined: a. The full group before the code, b. The short group before the word in the previous group, c. The previous group Short code, d. Short code before and after the group of words, e. Full code after the group, f. Short code before the group g. short words after the group of words and h. short codes before and after the group; plus code is a combination of additional letters and code word codes, plus code can be divided into: a. before plus code, b. plus code and c. before and after Plus code; the first plus code refers to the letter in front of the plus; the last plus code refers to the letter in the back Plus code; plus and minus code refers to the letter plus and minus code respectively; including: ing plus code, er plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in code plus; four-word code word code: pre-group code; letter code Word code: short code before the group;
对于拼音文字中的西班牙语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即西班 牙语码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国 语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单 单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个 码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码；按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词 在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺 序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后 面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没 有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词 码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指 单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词 在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后 组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； ( 1 )三单词码词输入方式，①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c. 后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二 单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几 个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前 组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单 词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合 出其中实用的八种码： a.前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前 后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由 附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别 在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前 加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码；  For Spanish in Pinyin text, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code word codes are words and letters, that is, the Spanish code word codes; the keyboard uses an international universal keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters, and the letters are national languages. Or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; the codeword code can be divided into three word codeword codes, two word codeword codes, four word codeword codes, one word codeword codes, and multiword code wordcodes according to the number of words; Codeword codes can be divided into single word codes and multiple word codes according to the number of words to be input; single word codes refer to the codeword codes for one codeword and one word; multiword codes refer to the multiple words or codewords for one codeword. Enter several codeword codewords for several codewords; according to the position and order of the words in the codewords, it can be divided into: the front group code, the middle group code, and the last group code; the former group code refers to the code in front of the word Word code; the middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the code word code in the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and the order of simplification, the code word code can be divided into: short code and Full code Shortcode before, shortcode and before and after shortcode; shortcode refers to the codeword code that simplifies the full code; preshortcode refers to the shortcode that simplifies the previous word; postcode refers to the following words Simplified shortcodes; front and back shortcodes are simplified shortcodes of the preceding and following words; full codes are codeword codes that are not simplified; three-word codeword codes are codeword codes with three words Three-word codes can be divided into: single-three-word codes and multiple-three-word codes; single-three-word codes refer to a three-word code to enter a single-word three-word code; multiple-three-word codes refer to a three-word code word Enter multiple words or several three-word codes. Enter three-word codes for multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the code words, they can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code. The former group code is It refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the full code simplified according to the short code Part of the pre-group code, middle-group code, and post-group code Three types of codes can be combined; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard, and obey the mainstream universal standard correspondence; (1) three-word code word input method, ① word input code: a. Before the group of words before the short code, b. The short code before the middle group of words and c. The short code before the second group of words; the two-word code word code refers to the code number of two words; the single-two word code refers to a two-word code word input two Word code; Multiple two-word code refers to a two-word code where one two-word code word enters multiple words or several two-word code words enter multiple words; According to the position and order of words in the code word, it can be divided into: Group code and last group code; the first group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group code refers to the two-word code word code in the back of the word; what is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, according to The form of the front group code and the back group code can be combined into eight practical codes: a. The full group of the previous group, b. The short group of the previous group of words, c. The short group of the previous group of words, d. Shortcode, e. Full code after group, f. Short code before group, g. Short code after group and h. Short code before and after the group; plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes. The plus code can be divided into: a. pre-code, b. post-code and c. pre-code; The last plus refers to the plus of the letter at the back; the before and after plus refers to the plus of the letter before and after the letter; including: ing plus, er plus, est plus, ly plus, ed plus and in before plus; four-word code Word code: short code before the group; letter code: short code before the group;
对于拼音文字中的埃塞俄比亚语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即埃 塞俄比亚语码词码； 其键盘釆用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语 或本国语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码 词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分 为： 单单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是 指一个码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置 和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码 是指单词在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及 简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码 是指对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全 码是指没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码 可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三 单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的 三单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组 码是指单词在 面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是 指单词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组 码和后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应 关系； （1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简 码和 c.后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指 一个二单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单 词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分 为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面 的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可 以组合出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组 单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加 码是由附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后 加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字 母分别在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； For Ethiopian in Pinyin, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code words are words and letters, that is, the Ethiopian code word code; the keyboard uses an international keyboard, the code element is 2 6 English letters, the letters are the original Latin letters corresponding to Mandarin or native Mandarin letters; Codeword codes can be divided according to the number of words: three-word codeword code, two-word codeword code, four-word codeword code, one-word codeword code, and multi-word codewordcode ; Code word code can be divided according to the number of words to be input: single word code and multi word code; single word code refers to a code word to enter a word code word; multi word code refers to a code word to enter multiple words Enter the codeword code of multiple words or several codewords; According to the position and order of the words in the codeword, it can be divided into: the first group code, the middle group code and the last group code; the former group code refers to the word in front Code word code; the middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the code word code at the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and in the simplified order, the code word code can be divided into: short code And full code; For: pre-short code, post-short code, and pre- and post-short codes; short code refers to the code word code that simplifies the full code; pre-short code refers to the short code that simplifies the previous word; post-short code refers to the back Shortcodes for simplified words; shortcodes before and after are simplified shortcodes for words before and after; The code refers to a code word code without simplification; the three-word code word code refers to a code word code with three words; the three-word code word code can be divided into: single three-word code and multiple three-word code; single three-word code The code refers to a three-word code of a three-word code word; a multiple three-word code refers to a three-word code word to input multiple words or several three-word codes to input multiple words; according to the word in the code The position and order of the words can be divided into: the first group code, the middle group code and the last group code; the former group code refers to the three-word code word with the word in the face; the middle group code refers to the three-word code with the word in the middle Word code; the last group code refers to the three-word code word code behind the word; simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, according to the form of the former group code, the middle group code and the latter group code, three types can be combined The letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard and follow the mainstream common standard correspondence; (1) Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a. The previous short code of the previous group of words, b. The short code of the middle group of words and c. Short code before the next group of words; the two-word code is the number of words Two codeword codes; a single two-word code refers to a two-word codeword that inputs a single word; a multiple-two-word code refers to a two-word codeword that inputs multiple words or a few two-word codewords The two-word code of each word; according to the position and order of the words in the code word, it can be divided into: the former group code and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group code refers to The two-word code behind the word; according to the simplified code, it is a part of the full code. According to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined: a. Full group of the former group, b. short code before the group of words, c. short code before the group, d. short code before and after the group, e. full code after the group, f. short code before the group, g. short code after the group and h. Short code before and after the group; plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes. The plus code can be divided into: a. pre-code, b. post-code and c. pre-code; The post-addition refers to the addition of the letter at the back; the pre-addition refers to the letter at the front and the back respectively Code; including: ing overweight, er overweight, est overweight, ly overweight, overweight and in front ed overweight; four code word code word: the former group before the short code; code letter code word: the former group before the short code;
对于拼音文字中的希腊语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即希腊语 码词码； 其键盘釆用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国语字 母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单 词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词 码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个码词 输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可 分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词在 中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全 码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后面的 单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没有简 化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三 单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三 单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词码； 按 照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在 前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面 的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后组码的 形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； （1 )三 单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c.后组单 词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二单词码 词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单 词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码和 后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单词码词 码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合出其中 实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由附加字母 与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是 指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别在前面和 后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前加码； 四 单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； For the Greek words in Pinyin, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code words are words and letters, that is, the Greek code word codes; the keyboard uses an international universal keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters. Latin letters corresponding to Mandarin or native Mandarin letters; Codeword codes can be divided according to the number of words: three-word codeword code, two-word codeword code, four-word codeword code, one-word codeword code, and multi-word codewordcode ; Code word code can be divided according to the number of words to be input: single word code and multi word code; single word code refers to a code word to enter a word code word; multi word code refers to a code word to enter multiple words Enter the codeword code of multiple words or several codewords; According to the position and order of the words in the codeword, it can be divided into: the first group code, the middle group code and the last group code; the former group code refers to the word in front Code word code; the middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the code word code at the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and in the simplified order, the code word code can be divided into: short code And full code; shortcodes are divided into: former shortcodes Short code and short code before and after; short code refers to the code word code that simplifies the full code; pre-short code refers to the short code that simplifies the previous word; post short code refers to the simplification of the subsequent word Code; short-code before and after refers to the simplified code of the preceding and following words; full code refers to the codeword code without simplification; three-word code wordcode refers to the codeword code of three words; three-word code Word codes can be divided into: single three-word codes and multiple three-word codes; single three-word codes refer to a three-word code word to enter a single word; multiple three-word codes refer to a three-word code word to enter multiple words Or several three-word codes Enter the three-word codes of multiple words; According to the position and order of the words in the code words, it can be divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code; the former group code refers to the word in front The middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; what is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, according to The form of the former group code, the middle group code and the last group code can be combined Three kinds of codes; Letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard, and obey the mainstream universal standard correspondence; (1) Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a. Before the short word of the group of words, b. Before the short word of the group of words Code and c. Short code before the next group of words; two-word code word code refers to a code word code with two words; single-two word code refers to a two-word code word into a two-word code; more than two A word code refers to a two-word code where one two-word code word enters multiple words or several two-word code words enter multiple words; according to the position and order of the words in the code word, it can be divided into: the first group code and the second group The first group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the second group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; what is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, according to the first group code and the subsequent code The form of the group code can be combined into eight practical codes: a. The full code of the previous group, b. The short code of the previous group of words, c. The short code of the previous group, d. The short code of the previous group of words, e. Full code of the back group, f. Short code of the back group, g. Short code of the back group of words and h. Short code of the back group; Plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes. For: a. Pre-code, b. Post-code, and c. Pre-code and pre-code; pre-code refers to the code plus before the letter; post-code refers to the code plus after the letter; pre-code means the code plus and minus the letter respectively; Including: ing plus code, er plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in before plus code; Four-word code word code: short code before group; letter code word code: previous group code;
对于拼音文字中的匈牙利语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即匈牙 利语码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国 语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单 单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个 码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码；按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词 在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺 序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后 面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没 有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词 码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指 单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词 在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后 组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； For Hungarian in Pinyin, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code words are words and letters, that is, the Hungarian code word codes; the keyboard is an international keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters, and the letters are national languages. Or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; the codeword code can be divided into three word codeword codes, two word codeword codes, four word codeword codes, one word codeword codes, and multiword code wordcodes according to the number of words; Codeword codes can be divided into single word codes and multiple word codes according to the number of words to be input; single word codes refer to the codeword codes for one codeword and one word; multiword codes refer to the multiple words or codewords for one codeword. Enter several codeword codewords for several codewords; according to the position and order of the words in the codewords, it can be divided into: the front group code, the middle group code, and the last group code; the former group code refers to the code in front of the word Word code; the middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the code word code in the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and the order of simplification, the code word code can be divided into: short code and Full code Shortcode before, shortcode and before and after shortcode; shortcode refers to the codeword code that simplifies the full code; preshortcode refers to the shortcode that simplifies the previous word; postcode refers to the following words Simplified shortcodes; front and back shortcodes are simplified shortcodes of the preceding and following words; full codes are codeword codes that are not simplified; three-word codeword codes are codeword codes with three words Three-word codes can be divided into: single-three-word codes and multiple-three-word codes; single-three-word codes refer to a three-word code to enter a single-word three-word code; multiple-three-word codes refer to a three-word code word Enter multiple words or several three-word codes. Enter three-word codes for multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the code words, they can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code. The former group code is It refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the full code simplified according to the short code Part of the Type, three kinds of codes may be combined; each key on the keyboard corresponding to the letters, the main subject to common standards corresponding relation;
( 1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c. 后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二 单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几 个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前 组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单 词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合 出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前 后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由 附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别 在 面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前 加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； (1) Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a. Short code before the group of words, b. Short code before the group of words, and c. Short code before the group of words; two-word code means the word The number of two codeword codes is single; the two-word code refers to a two-word codeword inputting a two-word code; the multi-word code refers to a two-word codeword inputting multiple words or several two-word codes. Enter the two-word code of multiple words according to the position and order of the words in the code word, which can be divided into: the former group code and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group The code refers to the two-word code behind the word; according to the simplified code, it is a part of the full code. According to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined: a. Full code, b. Short code before the group of words, c. Short code before the group, d. Short code before and after the group, e. Full code after the group, f. Short code before the group, g. After group of words Shortcodes and h. Shortcodes before and after the group; plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes, plus code can be divided into: a. Pre-code, b. Post-code and c. Pre-code and post-code; Pre-code refers to the code plus in front of the letter; Post-code code refers to the plus code in the back of the letter; ing plus code, er plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in before plus code; Four-word code word code: previous group short code; letter code word code: previous group short code;
对于拼音文字中的意大利语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即意大 利语码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国 语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单 单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个 码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码；按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词 在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺 序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后 面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没 有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词 码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指 单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词 在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后 组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系；For Italian in Pinyin, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code words are words and letters, that is, the Italian code word codes; the keyboard uses an international keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters, and the letters are national languages. Or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; the codeword code can be divided into three word codeword codes, two word codeword codes, four word codeword codes, one word codeword codes, and multiword code wordcodes according to the number of words; Codeword codes can be divided into single word codes and multiple word codes according to the number of words to be input; single word codes refer to the codeword codes for one codeword and one word; multiword codes refer to the multiple words or codewords for one codeword. Enter several codeword codewords for several codewords; according to the position and order of the words in the codewords, it can be divided into: the front group code, the middle group code, and the last group code; the former group code refers to the code in front of the word Word code; the middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the code word code in the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and the order of simplification, the code word code can be divided into: short code and Full code; short code is divided into: before Code, the short code and the short code before and after; refers to a short code Simplified code word code for the full code; Pre-short code refers to the short code that simplifies the previous word; Post-short code refers to the short code that simplifies the following words; Pre- and post-short codes refer to the front and back Simplified shortcodes for words; full codes refer to codewords without simplified codes; three-word codewordcodes refer to three-word codewordcodes; three-word codewordcodes can be divided into: single-three-word codes and multiple Three-word code; A single-three-word code refers to a three-word code that enters a single-word three-word code; A multi-three-word code refers to a three-word code that enters multiple words or several three-word codes to enter multiple words. Word code; According to the position and order of words in the code word, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to The three-word code word with the word in the middle; the last group code refers to the three-word code with the word behind; the part simplified by the short code is a part of the full code, according to the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code. Form, which can be combined into three codes; letters and each key pair on the keyboard Should comply with the corresponding relationship of the mainstream universal standards;
( 1 )三单词码词输入方式，①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c. 后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二 单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几 个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前 组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单 词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合 出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前 后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由 附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别 在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前 加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码为： 前组前简码； (1) Three-word code word input method, ①word input code: a. Before the group of words before the short code, b. Before the group of words before the short code and c. After the group of words before the short code; the two-word code is the word The number of two codeword codes is single; the two-word code refers to a two-word codeword inputting a two-word code; the multi-word code refers to a two-word codeword inputting multiple words or several two-word codes. Enter the two-word code of multiple words according to the position and order of the words in the code word, which can be divided into: the former group code and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group The code refers to the two-word code behind the word; according to the simplified code, it is a part of the full code. According to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined: a. Full code, b. Short code before the group of words, c. Short code before the group, d. Short code before and after the group, e. Full code after the group, f. Short code before the group, g. After group of words Shortcodes and h. Shortcodes before and after the group; plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes, plus code can be divided into: a . Pre-addition, b. Post-addition and c. Pre- and post-addition; Pre-addition refers to the addition of letters in front; post-addition refers to the addition of letters in the back; Plus code, er plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in before plus code; four-word code word code: short code before group; letter code word group: before group code
对于拼音文字中的印度尼西亚语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即 印度尼西亚语码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国 语或本国语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词 码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可 分为： 单单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码 是指一个码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位 置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组 码是指单词在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以 及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码; 简码是指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码 是指对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全 码是指没有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码 可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三 单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的 三单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组 码是指单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是 指单词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组 码和后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应 关系； （1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简 码和 c.后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指 一个二单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单 词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分 为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面 的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可For the Indonesian language in Pinyin, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code word codes are words and letters, that is, the Indonesian code word codes; the keyboard is an international universal keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters, and the letters are national languages. Or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; the codeword code can be divided into three word codeword codes, two word codeword codes, four word codeword codes, one word codeword codes, and multiword code wordcodes according to the number of words; Codeword codes can be divided into single word codes and multiple word codes according to the number of words to be input; single word codes refer to the codeword codes for one codeword and one word; multiword codes refer to the multiple words or codewords for one codeword. Enter several codeword codewords for several codewords; according to the position and order of the words in the codewords, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the code in front of the word Word code; the middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the code word code in the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and the order of simplification, the code word code can be divided into: short code and Full code For: short code before, short code and before and after short code; short code refers to the code word code that simplifies the full code; front short code means the short code that simplifies the previous word; post short code means the back Simplified shortcodes for the words; Pre- and post-shortcodes are simplified shortcodes for the preceding and following words; Full-code is a codeword code without simplification; Three-word codewordcode is a code with three words Word codes; Three-word codes can be divided into: single-three-word codes and multiple-three-word codes; single-three-word codes refer to a three-word code that enters a single word; multiple-three-word codes refer to a three-word code Enter multiple words or several three-word codes for codewords. Enter three-word codes for multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the codewords, they can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group The code refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; Part of the full code, according to the shape of the first group code, middle group code and last group code Three types of codes can be combined; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard, and obey the mainstream universal standard correspondence; (1) three-word code word input methods, ① word input code: a. The previous group of short codes, b. Group of words before the short code and c. Group of words before the short code; two-word code word code refers to the number of two code word code; single two-word code refers to a two-word code word two words into a word Codes; multiple two-word codes refer to two-word codes where one two-word code word enters multiple words or several two-word code words enter multiple words; according to the position and order of words in the code words, they can be divided into: the previous group Code and last group code; the first group code refers to the two-word code word with the word in front; the latter group code refers to the word in the back The two-word code word code; according to the simplified code is a part of the full code, according to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, can
'以组合出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组 单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加 码是由附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后 加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字 母分别在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； 'Combine eight practical codes among them: a. All codes before the group, b. Short codes before the group of words, c. Short codes before the group, d. Short codes before and after the group, e. Full codes after the group , F. Short code before the group, g. Short code after the group and h. Short code before and after; plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes, plus code can be divided into: a. Before plus code , B. Post-addition and c. Pre- and post-addition; pre-addition refers to the addition of the letter in front; post-addition refers to the addition of the letter at the back; front-end addition refers to the addition of the letter at the front and back respectively; Plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in code; four-word code word code: short code before the group; letter code word: short code before the group;
对于拼音文字中的豪萨语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即豪萨语 码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国语字 母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单 词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词 码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个码词 输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可 分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词在 中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全 码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后面的 单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没有简 化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三 单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三 单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词码； 按 照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在 前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面 的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后组码的 形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； （1 )三 单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c.后组单 词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二单词码 词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单 词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码和 后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单词码词 码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合出其中 实用的八种码: a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由附加字母 与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是 指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别在前面和 后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前加码； 四 单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码；  For Hausa in Pinyin, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code words are words and letters, that is, Hausa code words; the keyboard uses an international keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters. The letters are The native alphabet or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; The codeword code can be divided into three words: three-word code, two-word code, four-word code, one-word code, and multi-word code Codes; codeword codes can be divided into single word codes and multiple word codes according to the number of words to be entered; single word codes refer to codeword codes in which one codeword enters one word; multiword codes refer to one codeword in which multiple words are entered. Enter the codeword code of multiple words for a word or several codewords. According to the position and order of the words in the codeword, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the word in front The middle group code refers to the codeword code with the word in the middle; the latter group code refers to the codeword code with the word to the back; according to whether the codeword code is simplified and in the simplified order, the codeword code can be divided into: Code and full code; short codes are divided into: Shortcodes, shortcodes, and before and after shortcodes; shortcodes are codeword codes that simplify the full code; pre-shortcodes are shortcodes that simplify the preceding word; post-shortcodes are subsequent words Simplified shortcodes; front and back shortcodes are simplified shortcodes of the preceding and following words; full codes are codeword codes that are not simplified; three-word codeword codes are codeword codes with three words; Three-word code words can be divided into: single-three-word codes and multiple-three-word codes; single-three-word codes refer to a three-word code that inputs a single word; multiple-three-word codes refer to a three-word code input Multiple words or several three-word codes Enter the three-word codes of multiple words; according to the position and order of the words in the code words, they can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to The first three-word code word of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code of the middle of the word; the last group code refers to the three-word code word code of the word behind; the full code is simplified according to the short code One part, according to the shape of the former group code, the middle group code and the last group code Three types of codes can be combined; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard, and obey the mainstream universal standard correspondence; (1) three-word code word input methods, ① word input code: a. Before the group of words before the short code, b. The short code before the middle group of words and c. The short code before the second group of words; the two-word code word code refers to the code word code with 2 words; the single-two word code refers to the two-word code word Word code; Multiple two-word code refers to a two-word code where one two-word code word enters multiple words or several two-word code words enter multiple words; According to the position and order of words in the code word, it can be divided into: Group code and last group code; the first group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group code refers to the two-word code word code in the back of the word; what is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, according to The form of the former group code and the latter group code can be combined into eight practical codes: a. Full group code before, b. Short group code before the word, c. Short group code before the group, d. Before and after group word Shortcode, e. Full code after group, f. Short code before group, g. Short code after group and h. Short code before and after the group; plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes. The plus code can be divided into: a. pre-code, b. post-code and c. pre-code; The last plus refers to the plus of the letter at the back; the before and after plus refers to the plus of the letter before and after the letter; including: ing plus, er plus, est plus, ly plus, ed plus and in before plus; four-word code Word code: short code before the group; letter code: short code before the group;
对于拼音文字中的越南语〈字喃〉 （西里尔文、 亚美尼亚文、 古代叙利亚语、 Thaana 语、 天成文书〈梵文〉、 锡克教文、 奥利雅文、 泰卢固文、 德拉维族文、 泰文、 孟加拉文、 古吉拉特文、 泰米尔文、 卡纳达文、 老挝文、 缅甸语、 格鲁吉亚文、 切罗基族语、 欧甘 文字、古代北欧文字 <Runic>、高棉语、加拿大土著语、蒙古语）， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即越南语〈字喃〉（西里尔文、亚美尼亚文、古代叙利亚语、 Thaana 语、 天成文书〈梵文〉、 锡克教文、 奥利雅文、 泰卢固文、 德拉维族文、 泰文、 孟加拉文、 古吉拉特文、 泰米尔文、 卡纳达文、 老挝文、 缅甸语、 格鲁吉亚文、 切罗基族语、 欧甘 文字、 古代北欧文字 <Runic>、 高棉语、 加拿大土著语、 蒙古语）码词码； 其键盘采用国 际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码 词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词 码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词码和多单词码； 单单词 码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个码词输入多个单词或几个码 词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码 和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的码词码； 后组码 是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码 和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没有简化的码词码； 三单词码 词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词 码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置 和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的三单词码词码； 按照 简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； （1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单 词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c.后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码 是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入一个单词的二单词 码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单词码词输入多个单词的二 单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词 在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是 全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全 码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前 简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由附加字母与码词码组合而成的编 码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing 加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； For Pinyin in Vietnamese, Cyrillic, Armenian, Ancient Syrian, Thaana, Celestial (Sanskrit), Sikh, Oriya, Telugu, Dravidian, Thai, Bengali, Gujarati, Tamil, Kannada, Lao, Burmese, Georgian, Cherokee, Ogan, Ancient Norse <Runic>, Khmer, Canadian Aboriginal, Mongolian), codeword morphemes are words and letters; codeword codes are words and letters, that is, Vietnamese <Zanran> (Cyrillic, Armenian, ancient Syrian, Thaana, Tiancheng instrument <Sanskrit> , Sikh, Oriya, Telugu, Dravidian, Thai, Bengali, Gujarati, Tamil, Kannada, Lao, Burmese, Georgian, Cherokee Base, Ogan Text, ancient Nordic script (Runic), Khmer, Canadian Aboriginal, Mongolian) code word code; its keyboard uses the international keyboard, the code element is 2 6 English letters, the letters are corresponding to the national language or national language letters Latin letters; Codeword codes can be divided according to the number of words: three-word codeword code, two-word codewordcode, four-word codewordcode, one-word codeword and multi-wordcode wordcode; codewordcode according to the input The number of words can be divided into: single-word code and multi-word code; single-word code refers to a code word that enters one word; multi-word code refers to a code word that enters multiple words or several code words The code word code of each word; According to the position and order of the words in the code word, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the code word code in front of the word; the middle group code It refers to the codeword code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the codeword code in the back of the word; according to whether the codeword code is simplified and in the simplified order, the codeword code can be divided into: short code and full code; short code and Divided into: before short code, after short code and before and after Shortcode refers to the codeword code that simplifies the full code; the front shortcode refers to the shortcode that simplifies the previous word; the shortcode refers to the shortcode that simplifies the subsequent words; the front and back shortcodes are Refers to simplified shortcodes for the preceding and following words; full code refers to the codeword code without simplification; three-word codeword code refers to the codeword code with three words; three-word codewordcode can be divided into: Single three-word code and multiple three-word code; single three-word code refers to a three-word code word that enters a three-word code; multiple three-word code refers to a three-word code word that enters multiple words or several three-word codes Enter the three-word code of multiple words; According to the position and order of the words in the code word, it can be divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code; the former group code refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word The middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; what is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, according to the previous group code, the middle group Code and the following group codes, three kinds of codes can be combined; letters and Each key on the keyboard corresponds to the mainstream common standard correspondence; (1) Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a. Before the group of words before the short code, b. Before the group of words before the short code and c. After the group Short code before word; Two-word code word code refers to the code number of two words; Single-two word code refers to a two-word code word Enter a two-word code; Multiple two-word code refers to a two-word code Word code words Enter multiple words or several two-word code words Enter two-word codes of multiple words; According to the position and order of the words in the code words, it can be divided into: the former group code and the latter group code; the former group code is Refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group code refers to the two-word code word code in the back of the word; simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, according to the form of the first group code and the last group code, you can Combining eight practical codes: a. Full code before the group, b. Short code before the group of words, c. Short code before the group, d. Short code before and after the group of words, e. Full code after the group, f . After the group before the short code, g. After the group of words after the short code and h. After the group before and after the short code; plus code is by additional letters The combination of code words and codes can be divided into: a. Pre-code, b. Post-code, and c. Pre-code and pre-code; pre-code refers to the letter in front of the code; post-code means the letter in the code; The plus code refers to the plus code of the letter before and after; including: ing plus code, er plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in plus code; Four-word code word code: Short code before group; Letter code word code: Previous short code
对于拼音文字中的藏语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即藏语码词 码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国语字母对 应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码 词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词码和 多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个码词输入 多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的 码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词 码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全码进 行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后面的单词 进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没有简化的 码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三单词 码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三单词 码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词码； 按照单 词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面 的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的三 单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； （1 )三单词码 词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c.后组单词前简 码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入 一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单词码词 输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单词码词码； 按照 简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合出其中实用的八 种码： a.前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前后简码、 e.后组 全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由附加字母与码词 码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母 在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别在前面和后面的 加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前加码； 四单词码 词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； For Tibetan in Pinyin, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code words are words and letters, that is, the Tibetan code word codes; the keyboard is an international keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters, and the letters are national languages. Or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; the codeword code can be divided into three word codeword codes, two word codeword codes, four word codeword codes, one word codeword codes, and multiword code wordcodes according to the number of words; Codeword codes can be divided into single word codes and multiple word codes according to the number of words to be input; single word codes refer to the codeword codes for one codeword and one word; multiword codes refer to the multiple words or codewords for one codeword. Enter several codeword codewords for several codewords; according to the position and order of the words in the codewords, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the code in front of the word Word code; the middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the code word code in the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and the order of simplification, the code word code can be divided into: short code and Full code; short codes are divided into: before short code, after Shortcodes and shortcodes before and after; shortcodes are shortcodes that simplify the full code; front shortcodes are shortcodes that simplify the previous word; last shortcodes are shortcodes that simplify the subsequent words ; Pre- and post-codes refer to simplified codes for words before and after; full codes refer to code words without simplified codes; three-word code word codes refer to code words with three words; three-word code words Codes can be divided into: single three-word code and multiple three-word code; single three-word code refers to a three-word code word to enter a single word; multiple three-word code refers to a three-word code word to enter multiple words or Several three-word codes Enter three-word codes for multiple words; The position and order of the words in the code words can be divided into: the first group code, the middle group code and the last group code; the former group code refers to the three-word code word before the word; the middle group code refers to the word in the middle Three-word code word code; The last group code refers to the three-word code word code behind the word; simplified by the short code is a part of the full code, and can be combined according to the form of the first group code, the middle group code and the last group code. Three types of codes are provided; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard and obey the mainstream universal standard correspondence; (1) three-word code word input method, ① word input code: a. Before the group of words before the short code, b. Before the words of the middle group Shortcode and c. Shortcode before the next group of words; Two-word code word code refers to a code word with two words; Single-two word code refers to a two-word code that enters a word into a two-word code; more A two-word code refers to a two-word code where a two-word code word enters multiple words or several two-word code words enter multiple words; according to the position and order of the words in the code word, it can be divided into: the first group code and the back Group code; the first group code refers to the two-word code in front of the word; the last group It refers to the two-word code word code behind the word; according to the simplified code, it is a part of the full code. According to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined: a. Code, b. Short code before the group of words, c. Short code before the group of words, d. Short code before and after the group words, e. Full code after the group, f. Short code before the group, g. Short word after the group Code and h. Short code before and after the group; plus code is a combination of additional letters and code word codes, plus code can be divided into: a. Pre-code, b. Post-code and c. Pre- and post-code; pre-code refers to letters Adding code in front; adding code in the back means adding the letter in the back; adding code in the front means adding the letter in front and behind the code respectively; including: ing plus code, er plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in plus code; four Word code: short code before the group; letter code: short code before the group;
对于拼音文字中的蒙古语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即蒙古语 码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国语字 母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单 词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词 码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个码词 输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可 分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词在 中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全 码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后面的 单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没有简 化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三 单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三 单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词码； 按 照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在 前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面 的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后组码的 形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； （1 )三 单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组 词前简码和 c.后组单 词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二单词码 词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单 词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码和 后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单词码词 码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合出其中 实用的八种码： a.前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由附加字母 与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为: a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是 指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别在前面和 后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前加码； 四 单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； For Mongolian in Pinyin, code morphemes are words and letters; code word codes are words and letters, that is, Mongolian code word codes; the keyboard is an international universal keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters, and the letters are national languages. Or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; the codeword code can be divided into three word codeword codes, two word codeword codes, four word codeword codes, one word codeword codes, and multiword code wordcodes according to the number of words; Codeword codes can be divided into single word codes and multiple word codes according to the number of words to be input; single word codes refer to the codeword codes for one codeword and one word; multiword codes refer to the multiple words or codewords for one codeword. Enter several codeword codewords for several codewords; according to the position and order of the words in the codewords, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the code in front of the word Word code; the middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the code word code in the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and the order of simplification, the code word code can be divided into: short code and Full code; short code is divided into: former short code Short code and short code before and after; short code refers to the code word code that simplifies the full code; pre-short code refers to the short code that simplifies the previous word; post short code refers to the simplification of the subsequent word Code; short-code before and after refers to the simplified code of the preceding and following words; full code refers to the codeword code without simplification; three-word code wordcode refers to the codeword code of three words; three-word code Word codes can be divided into: single three-word codes and multiple three-word codes; single three-word codes refer to a three-word code word to enter a single word; multiple three-word codes refer to a three-word code word to enter multiple words Or several three-word codes Enter the three-word codes of multiple words; According to the position and order of the words in the code words, it can be divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code; the former group code refers to the word in front The middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; what is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, according to The form of the former group code, the middle group code and the last group code can be combined Three kinds of codes; Letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard, subject to the mainstream universal standard correspondence; (1) Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a. Before the short word of the group of words, b. Before the short word of the group of words Code and c. Short code before the next group of words; two-word code word code refers to a code word code with two words; single-two word code refers to a two-word code word into a two-word code; more than two A word code refers to a two-word code where one two-word code word enters multiple words or several two-word code words enter multiple words; according to the position and order of the words in the code word, it can be divided into: the first group code and the second group The first group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the second group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; what is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, according to the first group code and the subsequent code The form of the group code can be combined into eight practical codes: a. The full code of the previous group, b. The short code of the previous group of words, c. The short code of the previous group of words, d. The short code of the previous group of words, e. Full code in the back group, f. Short code in the back group, g. Short code in the back group and h. Short code in the back group; It is a combination of additional letters and codewords. Codes can be divided into: a. Pre-code, b. Post-code, and c. Pre- and post-code; pre-code refers to the letter in front of the code; post-code means the letter in the Plus code at the back; plus and minus means the letters in front and The following plus code; including: ing plus code, er plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in before plus code; Four-word code word code: previous group short code; letter code word code: previous group short code;
对于拼音文字中的维吾尔语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即维吾 尔语码词码； 其键盘釆用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国 语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单 单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个 码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码；按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词 在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺 序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； '简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后 面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没 有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词 码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指 单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词 在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后 组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； ( 1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c. 后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二 单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几 个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前 组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单 词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合 出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前 后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由 附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别 在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前 加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； For Uyghur words in Pinyin, code morphemes are words and letters; code word codes are words and letters, that is, Uighur code word codes; the keyboard uses an international universal keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters. Latin letters corresponding to Mandarin or native Mandarin letters; Codeword codes can be divided according to the number of words: three-word codeword code, two-word codeword code, four-word codeword code, one-word codeword code, and multi-word codewordcode ; Code word code can be divided according to the number of words to be input: single word code and multi word code; single word code refers to a code word to enter a word code word; multi word code refers to a code word to enter multiple words Enter the codeword code of multiple words or several codewords; according to the position and order of the words in the codeword, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the word in front Code word code; the middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the code word code at the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and in the simplified order, the code word code can be divided into: short code And full code; 'shortcode is divided into: before Short code, short code and short code before and after; short code refers to the code word code that simplifies the full code; pre-short code refers to the short code that simplifies the previous word; post short code refers to the simplification of the subsequent word Short codes before and after are short codes that simplify the preceding and following words; full codes are code words that are not simplified; three-word codes are three-word code words; three Word code word code can be divided into: single three word code and multiple three word code; single three word code refers to a three word code word to enter a three word code; multiple three word code refers to a three word code word to enter more Enter three-word codes of multiple words for several words or several three-word codes. According to the position and order of the words in the code words, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the last group code; the former group code refers to the word The first three-word code word code; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the last group code refers to the three-word code word code after the word; simplified according to the short code is part of the full code In the form of the former group code, the middle group code and the latter group code, the Three kinds of codes are combined; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard, and follow the mainstream universal standard correspondence; (1) Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a. The previous group of short codes, b. The middle group of words The first short code and c. The short word before the next group of words; the two-word code word code refers to the code number of two words; the single-two word code refers to a two-word code word into a two-word code; Multiple two-word code refers to a two-word code where one two-word code word enters multiple words or several two-word code words enter multiple words; according to the position and order of words in the code word, it can be divided into: the former group code and Back group code; The first group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; The latter group code refers to the two-word code word code in the back of the word; What is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, according to the previous group code And the following group codes, you can combine eight practical codes: a . The full code of the previous group, b. The short code of the previous group of words, c. The short code of the previous group of words, d. The short code of the previous group of words, e. full code in the back group, f. short code in the back group, g. short code in the back group and h. short code in the back group ; Plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword code, plus code can be divided into: a. Before the code, b. After the code and c. Before and after the code; before the code means the letter before the code; after code means Letters are added at the back; plus and minus means the letters are added at the front and the back respectively; including: ing plus, er plus, est plus, ly plus, ed plus, and in before plus code; Four-word plus code: before the previous group Code; letter code word code: short code before the previous group;
对于拼音文字中的满语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即满语码词 码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国语字母对 应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： ≡单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码 词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词码和 多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个码词输入 多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的 码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词 码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全码进 行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后面的单词 进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没有简化的 码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三单词 码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三单词 码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词码； 按照单 词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面 的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的三 单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后组码的形式, 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； （1 )三单词码 词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c.后组单词前简 码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入 一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单词码词 输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码和后组码; 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单词码词码； 按照 简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合出其中实用的八 种码： a.前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前后简码、 e.后组 全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由附加字母与码词 码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母 在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别在前面和后面的 加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前加码； 四单词码 词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； For Manchu in Pinyin, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code words are words and letters, that is, Manchu code words; the keyboard is an international keyboard, and the code element is 2 6 English letters, and the letters are national languages. Or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; the codeword code can be divided according to the number of words: ≡word codeword code, two-word codeword code, four-word codeword code, one-word codeword code, and multi-word codewordcode; Codeword codes can be divided into single word codes and multiple word codes according to the number of words to be input; single word codes refer to the codeword codes for one codeword and one word; multiword codes refer to the multiple words or codewords for one codeword. Enter several codeword codewords for several codewords; according to the position and order of the words in the codewords, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the code in front of the word Word code; the middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the code word code in the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and the order of simplification, the code word code can be divided into: short code and Full code; short codes are divided into: before short code, after Shortcodes and shortcodes before and after; shortcodes are shortcodes that simplify the full code; front shortcodes are shortcodes that simplify the previous word; last shortcodes are shortcodes that simplify the subsequent words ; Pre- and post-codes refer to simplified codes for words before and after; full codes refer to code words without simplified codes; three-word code word codes refer to code words with three words; three-word code words The code can be divided into: single and three words Code and multiple three-word code; single three-word code refers to a three-word code word to enter a three-word code; multiple three-word code refers to a three-word code word to enter multiple words or several three-word codes to enter multiple Three-word codes of words; According to the position and order of the words in the code words, it can be divided into: the first group code, the middle group code, and the last group code; the former group code refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group The code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; what is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, according to the previous group code, the middle group code and the back In the form of group codes, three types of codes can be combined; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard and obey the mainstream general standard correspondence; (1) three-word code word input methods, ① word input code: a. The previous short code of the previous group of words , B. The short code before the middle group of words and c. The short code before the second group of words; the two-word code word code refers to the code number of two words; the single-two word code refers to a two-word code word enter one A two-word code for a word; a multi-word code refers to a two-word code Enter multiple words or several two-word code words. Enter two-word codes of multiple words according to the position and order of the words in the code words. They can be divided into: the former group code and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the word The first two-word code word code; the last group code refers to the second word code word of the word behind; according to the simplified code is a part of the full code, according to the form of the first group code and the last group code, can be combined to form There are eight kinds of codes that are practical: a. Full code before the group, b. Short code before the group of words, c. Short code before the group, d. Short code before and after the group of words, e. Full code after the group, f. Back Short code before group, g. Short code after group of words, and h. Short code before and after group; plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword code, plus code can be divided into: a. Before plus code, b. After Adding code and c. Adding code before and after; Adding code means adding the letter to the front; Adding code means adding the letter to the back; Adding code means adding the letter to the front and back respectively; Including: ing plus code, er plus code, est plus code , Ly plus code, ed plus code and in code; four-word code word code: short code before the group; letters Code word: the former group before the short code;
对于拼音文字中的乌尔都语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即乌尔 都语码词码； 其键盘釆用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国 语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单 单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个 码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码；按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词 在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺 序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后 面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没 有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为- 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词 码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指 单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词 在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后 组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； For Urdu in Pinyin, code morphemes are words and letters; code words are words and letters, that is, Urdu code word codes; the keyboard uses an international keyboard, and the code element is 2 6 English letters The letter is the native alphabet or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; the codeword code can be divided into three words: three-word code, two-word code, four-word code, one-word code, and more Word code word code; Code word code can be divided according to the number of words to be entered: single word code and multi word code; single word code refers to a code word to enter a word code word code; multi word code refers to a code word Enter multiple words or several codewords. Enter the codeword codes of multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the codewords, they can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code. The former group code refers to The codeword code in front of the word; the middle code refers to the codeword in the middle of the word; the latter code refers to the codeword in the back of the word; according to whether the codeword code is simplified and in the simplified order, the codeword code can be divided For: shortcode and full code; shortcodes are divided into Shortcode before, shortcode and before and after shortcode; shortcode refers to the codeword code that simplifies the full code; preshortcode refers to the shortcode that simplifies the previous word; postcode refers to the following words Simplified shortcodes; front and back shortcodes are simplified shortcodes of the preceding and following words; full codes are codeword codes that are not simplified; three-word codeword codes are codeword codes with three words Three-word codes can be divided into single-three-word codes and multiple-three-word codes; single-three-word codes refer to a three-word code that enters a single word; multiple-three-word codes refer to a three-word code Enter multiple words or several three-word codes. Enter three-word codes for multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the code words, they can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code. The former group code is It refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the full code simplified according to the short code Part according to the shape of the former group code, middle group code and last group code Three types of codes can be combined; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard and obey the correspondence relationship of the mainstream universal standards;
( 1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c. 后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二 单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几 个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 多二单词码 可分为： 前组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在 后面的二单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前 组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前 后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指 字母分别在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码 和 in前加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； (1) Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a. Short code before the group of words, b. Short code before the group of words, and c. Short code before the group of words; two-word code means the word The number of two codeword codes is single; the two-word code refers to a two-word codeword inputting a two-word code; the multi-word code refers to a two-word codeword inputting multiple words or several two-word codes. Enter the two-word code of multiple words according to the position and order of the words in the code word. The two-word code can be divided into: the former group code and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the two-word code word in front of the word The last group code refers to the two-word code word code followed by the word; according to the simplified code, it is a part of the full code. According to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined: a. Full code before the group, b. Short code before the group of words, c. Short code before the group before, d. Short code before and after the group of words, e. Full code before the group of groups, f. Short code before the group of groups, g. Short words after the group of words and h. Short codes before and after the group; The plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes. The plus code can be divided into: a. Pre-code, b. Post-code, and c. Pre- and post-code; pre-code means the letter in front of the code; post-code means the letter Adding code at the back; Adding code before and after refers to the adding of the letters before and after the letter respectively; including: ing plus code, er plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in before plus code; Four-word code word code: pre-group short code ; Letter code word code: before the short code before the group;
对于拼音文字中的波斯语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即波斯语 码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国语字 母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单 词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单单词 码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个码词 输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可 分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词在 中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指对全 码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后面的 单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没有简 化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三 单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三 单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词码； 按 照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在 前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面 的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后组码的 形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； （1 )三 单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c.后组单 词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二单词码 词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几个二单 词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码和 后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单词码词 码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合出其中 实用的八种码： a.前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由附加字母 与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是 指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别在前面和 后面的加码； 包括: ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前加码； 四 单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码；  For Persian in Pinyin, code morphemes are words and letters; code word codes are words and letters, that is, Persian code word codes; the keyboard uses international keyboards, and the code element is 26 English letters, and the letters are national languages. Or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; the codeword code can be divided into three word codeword codes, two word codeword codes, four word codeword codes, one word codeword codes, and multiword code wordcodes according to the number of words; Codeword codes can be divided into single word codes and multiple word codes according to the number of words to be input; single word codes refer to the codeword codes for one codeword and one word; multiword codes refer to the multiple words or codewords for one codeword. Enter several codeword codewords for several codewords; according to the position and order of the words in the codewords, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the code in front of the word Word code; the middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the code word code in the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and the order of simplification, the code word code can be divided into: short code and Full code; short code is divided into: Shortcodes, shortcodes, and before and after shortcodes; shortcodes are codeword codes that simplify the full code; pre-shortcodes are shortcodes that simplify the preceding word; post-shortcodes are subsequent words Simplified shortcodes; front and back shortcodes are simplified shortcodes of the preceding and following words; full codes are codeword codes that are not simplified; three-word codeword codes are codeword codes with three words; Three-word code words can be divided into: single-three-word codes and multiple-three-word codes; single-three-word codes refer to a three-word code that inputs a single word; multiple-three-word codes refer to a three-word code input Multiple words or several three-word codes Enter the three-word codes of multiple words; according to the position and order of the words in the code words, they can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to The first three-word code word of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code of the middle of the word; the last group code refers to the three-word code word code of the word behind; the full code is simplified according to the short code One part, according to the shape of the former group code, the middle group code and the last group code Three types of codes can be combined; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard, and obey the mainstream universal standard correspondence; (1) three-word code word input methods, ① word input code: a. Before the group of words before the short code, b. The short code before the middle group of words and c. The short code before the second group of words; the two-word code word code refers to the code word code with 2 words; the single-two word code refers to the two-word code word Word code; Multiple two-word code refers to a two-word code where one two-word code word enters multiple words or several two-word code words enter multiple words; According to the position and order of words in the code word, it can be divided into: Group code and last group code; the first group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group code refers to the two-word code word code in the back of the word; what is simplified according to the short code is a part of the full code, according to The form of the front group code and the back group code can be combined into eight practical codes: a. The full group of the previous group, b. The short group of the previous group of words, c. The short group of the previous group of words, d. Shortcode, e. Full code after group, f. Short code before group, g. Short code after group and h. Short code before and after the group; plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes. The plus code can be divided into: a. pre-code, b. post-code and c. pre-code; Post-addition refers to the addition of the letter at the back; pre- and post-addition refers to the addition of the letter before and after the letter; including: ing plus, er plus, est plus, ly plus, ed plus and in before; four-word code Word code: short code before the group; letter code: short code before the group;
对于拼音文字中的希伯来语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即希伯 来语码词码； 其键盘采用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国 语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单 单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个 码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码；按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词 在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺 序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后 面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的单词简化的简码； 全码是指没 有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词 码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指 单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词 在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后 组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系；For Hebrew in Pinyin text, code morphemes are words and letters; code word codes are words and letters, that is, Hebrew code word codes; the keyboard is an international universal keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters. The alphabet is the native alphabet or the Latin alphabet corresponding to the native alphabet; The codeword code can be divided into three words: three-word code, two-word code, four-word code, one-word code, and multiple words. Codeword code; Codeword code can be divided into: single word code and multiple word code; single word code refers to the codeword code for one codeword to enter one word; multiword code means the codeword input for one word Multiple words or several code words Enter the code word code of multiple words; according to the position and order of the words in the code word, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the word The codeword code in the front; the codeword in the middle group refers to the codeword code with the word in the middle; the code in the latter group refers to the codeword code with the word in the back; according to whether the codeword code is simplified and in the simplified order, the codeword code can be divided into : Short code and full code; short code is divided into: Code, the simple code and simple code before and after; simple code to simplify the code refers to the code word for the full code; the former refers to the simple code word in front of the simplified short code; refers to the short code after Simplified shortcodes for the words above; shortcodes before and after refer to the simplified shortcodes for the preceding and following words; full codes are codewords without simplified code; three-word codewordcode means that the number of words is three Code word code; Three word code word code can be divided into: single three word code and multiple three word code; single three word code refers to a three word code word to enter a three word code; multiple three word code refers to a three word code Enter multiple words or several three-word codes into a three-word code of a word code. According to the position and order of words in the code word, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code. The group code refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; simplified according to the short code It is a part of the full code, and three types of codes can be combined according to the form of the front group code, the middle group code, and the back group code; the letters correspond to the keys on the keyboard, and follow the correspondence relationship of the mainstream universal standards;
( 1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c. 后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二 单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几 个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前 组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单 词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合 出其中实用的八种码： a.前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前 后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由 附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别 在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 .ed加码和 in前 加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码； (1) Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a. Short code before the group of words, b. Short code before the group of words, and c. Short code before the group of words; two-word code means the word The number of two codeword codes is single; the two-word code refers to a two-word codeword inputting a two-word code; the multi-word code refers to a two-word codeword inputting multiple words or several two-word codes. Enter the two-word code of multiple words according to the position and order of the words in the code word, which can be divided into: the former group code and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group The code refers to the two-word code behind the word; according to the simplified code, it is a part of the full code. According to the form of the former group code and the latter group code, eight practical codes can be combined: a . Full code, b. Short code before the group of words, c. Short code before the group, d. Short code before and after the group, e. Full code after the group, f. Short code before the group, g. After group of words Shortcodes and h. Shortcodes before and after the group; pluscode is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes. The pluscode can be divided into: a. , B. Post-addition and c. Pre- and post-addition; pre-addition refers to the addition of the letter in front; post-addition refers to the addition of the letter at the back; front-end addition refers to the addition of the letter in front and back respectively; including: ing-addition, er Plus code, est plus code, ly plus code, .ed plus code and in before plus code; Four-word code word code: short code before the group; letter code word: short code before the group;
对于拼音文字中的阿拉伯语， 码词素为单词和字母； 码词码是单词和字母， 即阿拉 伯语码词码； 其键盘釆用国际通用键盘， 码元为 2 6个英文字母， 字母是本国语或本国 语字母对应的拉丁字母； 码词码按照单词个数可分为： 三单词码词码、 二单词码词码、 四单词码词码、 一单词码词码和多单词码词码； 码词码按照要输入单词个数可分为： 单 单词码和多单词码； 单单词码是指一个码词输入一个单词的码词码； 多单词码是指一个 码词输入多个单词或几个码词输入多个单词的码词码；按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的码词码； 中组码是指单词 在中间的码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的码词码； 按照码词码是否简化以及简化的顺 序， 码词码可分为： 简码和全码； 简码又分为： 前简码、 后简码和前后简码； 简码是指 对全码进行简化的码词码； 前简码是指对前面的单词进行简化的简码； 后简码是指对后 面的单词进行简化的简码； 前后简码是指对前面和后面的準词简化的简码； 全码是指没 有简化的码词码； 三单词码词码是指单词个数为三个的码词码； 三单词码词码可分为： 单三单词码和多三单词码； 单三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入一个单词的三单词码； 多三单词码是指一个三单词码词输入多个单词或几个三单词码输入多个单词的三单词 码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前组码、 中组码和后组码； 前组码是指 单词在前面的三单词码词码； 中组码是指单词在中间的三单词码词码； 后组码是指单词 在后面的三单词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码、 中组码和后 组码的形式， 可组合出三种码； 字母与键盘上各键对应， 服从主流通用标准对应关系； For Arabic in Pinyin, the code morphemes are words and letters; the code words are words and letters, that is, the Arabic code word codes; the keyboard uses an international universal keyboard, and the code element is 26 English letters, and the letters are the original Latin letters corresponding to Mandarin or native Mandarin letters; Codeword codes can be divided according to the number of words: three-word codeword code, two-word codeword code, four-word codeword code, one-word codeword code, and multi-word codewordcode ; Code word code can be divided according to the number of words to be input: single word code and multi word code; single word code refers to a code word to enter a word code word; multi word code refers to a code word to enter multiple words Enter the codeword code of multiple words or several codewords; according to the position and order of the words in the codeword, it can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the word in front Code word code; the middle group code refers to the code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the code word code at the back of the word; according to whether the code word code is simplified and in the simplified order, the code word code can be divided into: short code And full code; short code is divided into Shortcode before, shortcode and before and after shortcode; shortcode refers to the codeword code that simplifies the full code; preshortcode refers to the shortcode that simplifies the previous word; postcode refers to the following words Simplified shortcodes; front and back shortcodes are simplified shortcodes of the preceding and following quasi-words; full codes are codewords without simplified codewords; three-word codewordcodes are codewords with three words Three-word codes can be divided into: single-three-word codes and multiple-three-word codes; single-three-word codes refer to a three-word code that enters one word; multiple-three-word codes refer to a three-word code Enter multiple words or several three-word codes. Enter three-word codes for multiple words. According to the position and order of the words in the code words, they can be divided into: the former group code, the middle group code, and the latter group code; the former group code It refers to the three-word code word code in front of the word; the middle group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; the latter group code refers to the three-word code word code in the middle of the word; Part of the code, according to the previous group code, middle group code and last group code Type, three kinds of codes may be combined; each key on the keyboard corresponding to the letters, the main subject to common standards corresponding relation;
( 1 )三单词码词输入方式， ①单词输入码： a.前组单词前简码、 b.中组单词前简码和 c. 后组单词前简码； 二单词码词码是指单词个数为 2个的码词码； 单二单词码是指一个二 单词码词输入一个单词的二单词码； 多二单词码是指一个二单词码词输入多个单词或几 个二单词码词输入多个单词的二单词码； 按照单词在码词中的位置和顺序， 可分为： 前 组码和后组码； 前组码是指单词在前面的二单词码词码； 后组码是指单词在后面的二单 词码词码； 按照简码所简化的是全码的一部分， 按照前组码和后组码的形式， 可以组合 出其中实用的八种码： a. 前组全码、 b.前组单词前简码、 c.前组后简码、 d.前组单词前 后简码、 e.后组全码、 f.后组前简码、 g.后组单词后简码和 h.后组前后简码； 加码是由 附加字母与码词码组合而成的编码， 加码可分为： a.前加码、 b.后加码和 c.前后加码； 前加码是指字母在前面的加码； 后加码是指字母在后面的加码； 前后加码是指字母分别 在前面和后面的加码； 包括： ing加码、 er加码、 est加码、 ly加码、 ed加码和 in前 加码； 四单词码词码： 前组前简码； 字母码词码： 前组前简码。 (1) Three-word code word input method, ① Word input code: a. Short code before the group of words, b. Short code before the group of words, and c. Short code before the group of words; two-word code means the word The number of two codeword codes is single; the two-word code refers to a two-word codeword inputting a two-word code; the multi-word code refers to a two-word codeword inputting multiple words or several two-word codes. Enter the two-word code of multiple words according to the position and order of the words in the code word, which can be divided into: the former group code and the latter group code; the former group code refers to the two-word code word code in front of the word; the latter group The code refers to the two-word code behind the word; according to the simplified code, it is a part of the full code, and can be combined according to the form of the former group code and the latter group code. Among them are eight kinds of codes that are practical: a. Full code before the group, b. Short code before the group of words, c. Short code before the group, d. Short code before and after the group of words, e. Full code after the group, f. The short code before the last group, g. The short code after the group of words and h. The short code before and after the group; plus code is a combination of additional letters and codeword codes, plus code can be divided into: a. Before plus code, b. Post-addition and c. Pre- and post-addition; Pre-addition refers to the addition of letters in the front; Post-addition refers to the addition of letters in the back; Pre-addition refers to the addition of letters in front and back of the letter respectively; Plus code, ly plus code, ed plus code and in code; four-word code word code: short code before the group; letter code word: short code before the group.
7、 根据权利要求 1、 2、 3、 4或 5所述的语言码输入法， 其特征是： 该语言码输入 法可应用于涉及语言输入的微机、 终端、 PDA、 网络、 通讯、 图书管理、 检查、 搜索、 网 络实名、 音像制品、 印刷品、 键盘输入、 扫描输入、 手写输入、 语言输入、 密码编写、 手机输入、 PDA输入、 计算机语言编写、 OCR输入、 小键盘输入、 鼠标键盘输入； 所述的 语言是指： 包括汉语在内的现存于世的各国各民族语言。  7. The language code input method according to claim 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5, characterized in that: the language code input method can be applied to a computer, a terminal, a PDA, a network, a communication, and a library management that involve language input. , Check, search, network real name, audiovisual products, printed matter, keyboard input, scan input, handwriting input, language input, password writing, mobile phone input, PDA input, computer language writing, OCR input, keypad input, mouse and keyboard input; all The languages mentioned are: Languages of various nations and nationalities, including Chinese.
PCT/CN2003/000721 2002-09-05 2003-08-27 A language-code input method WO2004023284A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU2003261577A AU2003261577A1 (en) 2002-09-05 2003-08-27 A language-code input method

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CNA021417857A CN1529219A (en) 2002-09-05 2002-09-05 Language code inputting method
CN02141785.7 2002-09-05

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2004023284A1 true WO2004023284A1 (en) 2004-03-18

Family

ID=31954579

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2003/000721 WO2004023284A1 (en) 2002-09-05 2003-08-27 A language-code input method

Country Status (3)

Country Link
CN (1) CN1529219A (en)
AU (1) AU2003261577A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2004023284A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103455168A (en) * 2013-08-21 2013-12-18 吴礼明 Five-vowel based Vietnamese complex pen input method

Families Citing this family (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN1828488B (en) * 2005-02-28 2010-12-22 北京中数博文信息科技有限公司 Simple digital method for inputting French
CN1828489B (en) * 2005-02-28 2010-12-22 北京中数博文信息科技有限公司 Simple digital method for inputting Bulgarian
CN1834860B (en) * 2005-03-14 2010-05-05 北京中数博文信息科技有限公司 Simple digital code spanish inputting method
CN110580349A (en) * 2017-07-04 2019-12-17 艾朝君 chinese character and Persian intercommunication mutual identification technical method

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN1211002A (en) * 1997-09-09 1999-03-17 范宗喜 Huaxia international general language alphabetic writing and its keyboard
CN1335551A (en) * 2000-07-21 2002-02-13 洪奇麟 Text input method
CN1378124A (en) * 2001-03-29 2002-11-06 袁会文 Fifty key computer digital keyboard and its multiple country character input method

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN1211002A (en) * 1997-09-09 1999-03-17 范宗喜 Huaxia international general language alphabetic writing and its keyboard
CN1335551A (en) * 2000-07-21 2002-02-13 洪奇麟 Text input method
CN1378124A (en) * 2001-03-29 2002-11-06 袁会文 Fifty key computer digital keyboard and its multiple country character input method

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103455168A (en) * 2013-08-21 2013-12-18 吴礼明 Five-vowel based Vietnamese complex pen input method

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN1529219A (en) 2004-09-15
AU2003261577A1 (en) 2004-03-29

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN101751144A (en) Chinese character &#39;sound shape&#39; input method of computer keyboard and numerical keyboard
CN100462901C (en) GB phoneticize input method
US20050010392A1 (en) Traditional Chinese / simplified Chinese character translator
WO2004023284A1 (en) A language-code input method
CN100403239C (en) Tibetan input method based on English keyboard
CN101710263A (en) Computer keyboard and numerical keyboard Chinese character input method
CN114595665A (en) Method for constructing binary extremely-short code word character and word coding set
CN101135938B (en) Chinese characters phonetic two-tone input method
WO2023124573A1 (en) Digital new language and input method therefor, and input tool
CN107256092B (en) Chinese character digital shape code quick input method
CN103576891A (en) One key fast typing method
CN1112629C (en) Chinese-character and English input method by numeral keypad
CN102053718B (en) For generating method and the keyboard input devices of Chinese character
CN1027839C (en) Chinese character encoding input method
CN100498655C (en) Simplified Chinese character phonetic two-key input method
CN1017662B (en) Irrational order no. digital coding method and the keyboard thereof
Joshi et al. Input Scheme for Hindi Using Phonetic Mapping
KR100284945B1 (en) Korean keyboard
CN110956017A (en) Chinese mandarin information ASCII natural language understanding code
CN101271366A (en) Head and tail double-pin input method and keyboard thereof
CN100456214C (en) Chinese document quick-speed input processing technology and keyboard thereof
CN1267010A (en) Chinese and Foreign language universal region-digit conversion input method and its keyboard
CN104731360A (en) Hierarchical initial coding method
CN100389375C (en) Digital code input method
CN104536590A (en) Embedded soft keyboard system based on Xixia character sound rhyme and root input method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NI NO NZ OM PG PH PL PT RO RU SC SD SE SG SK SL SY TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IT LU MC NL PT RO SE SI SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
WPC Withdrawal of priority claims after completion of the technical preparations for international publication

Ref country code: WO

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Country of ref document: JP

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase